WO2005117869A1 - Combinations comprising (s)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, and methods for reducing hypertension - Google Patents

Combinations comprising (s)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, and methods for reducing hypertension Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2005117869A1
WO2005117869A1 PCT/US2005/016655 US2005016655W WO2005117869A1 WO 2005117869 A1 WO2005117869 A1 WO 2005117869A1 US 2005016655 W US2005016655 W US 2005016655W WO 2005117869 A1 WO2005117869 A1 WO 2005117869A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
phenyl
amino
methyl
trifluoro
transfer protein
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2005/016655
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Timothy J. Barberich
Original Assignee
Sepracor Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sepracor Inc. filed Critical Sepracor Inc.
Publication of WO2005117869A1 publication Critical patent/WO2005117869A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/4422—1,4-Dihydropyridines, e.g. nifedipine, nicardipine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis

Definitions

  • cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors or calcium-channel blockers have been used or are believed useful include hypertension, angina, hyperlipidemia, arteriosclerosis, coronary artery disease, myocardial infarction, arrhythmia, congestive heart failure, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic cardiac myopafhy, renal insufficiency, peripheral vascular disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, cognitive dysfunction, stroke, and headache.
  • Plasma cholesterol levels have been positively correlated with the incidence of clinical events associated with coronary heart disease.
  • the regulation of whole-body cholesterol homeostasis in humans and animals involves modulation of cholesterol biosynthesis, bile acid biosynthesis, and the catabolism of cholesterol-containing plasma lipoproteins.
  • the liver is the major organ responsible for cholesterol biosynthesis and catabolism.
  • the liver is the site of synthesis and secretion of very low density lipoproteins (VLDL) which are subsequently metabolized to low density lipoproteins (LDL) in the circulation.
  • VLDL very low density lipoproteins
  • LDL low density lipoproteins
  • LDL are the predominant cholesterol-carrying lipoproteins in the plasma and an increase in their concentration is correlated with increased atherosclerosis.
  • the relative abundance of high density lipoprotein and low density lipoprotein is controlled in part by cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP).
  • CETP cholesteryl ester transfer protein
  • CETP is a plasma protein that facilitates the movement of cholesteryl esters and triglycerides between various lipoproteins in the blood. See Tall J. Lipid Res. 1993, 34, 1255-74.
  • the transfer of cholesteryl ester from HDL to LDL by CETP has the effect of lowering HDL cholesterol. Therefore, one way of increasing the relative amount of high density lipoprotein, the "good" lipoprotein, is to inhibit cholesteryl ester transfer protein mediated conversion of HDL to LDL.
  • Inhibition of cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP) has been shown to elevate plasma HDL-cholesterol and lower plasma LDL-cholesterol, thereby providing a therapeutically beneficial plasma lipid profile.
  • Calcium-channel blockers are a chemically diverse class of compounds having important therapeutic value in the control of a variety of diseases including several cardiovascular disorders, such as hypertension, angina, and cardiac arrhythmias. See Fleckenstein in Experimental Facts and Therapeutic Prospects, John Wiley, New York (1983); and D. McCall Curr. Pract. Cardiol 1985, 10, 1-11. Calcium-channel blockers prevent or slow the entry of calcium into cells by regulating cellular calcium channels.
  • Calcium-channel blockers are also believed to be useful in the treatment of other disorders in which the regulation of calcium plays a role in normal hemostasis.
  • disorders include, for example, pulmonary hypertension, peripheral vascular disease, mild congestive heart failure, hypertrophic subaortic stenosis, protection against ischemic injury, stroke, migraine, tumor resistance to anti-neoplastic drugs, achalasia, esophageal spasms, bronchial asthma, premature labor, dysmenorrhea, and enhancement of success in renal transplantation.
  • pulmonary hypertension peripheral vascular disease
  • mild congestive heart failure hypertrophic subaortic stenosis
  • protection against ischemic injury stroke
  • migraine tumor resistance to anti-neoplastic drugs
  • achalasia esophageal spasms
  • bronchial asthma premature labor, dysmenorrhea
  • enhancement of success in renal transplantation Remington, The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Nineteenth Edition, Mack Publishing Company, Eaton, Pa.,
  • Calcium antagonist was introduced by Fleckenstein when two drugs, prenylamine and verapamil, originally found as coronary dilators in the LANGENDORFF-experiment, were shown to mimic the cardiac effects of simple Ca 2+ - withdrawal, diminishing Ca 2+ -dependent high energy phosphate utilization, contractile force, and oxygen requirement of the beating heart without impairing the Na + -dependent action potential parameters.
  • Amlodipine is a dihydropyridine calcium-channel blocker that is used to treat hypertension. Racemic amlodipine consists of two chiral forms, (S)-amlodipine and (R)- amlodipine. The S-enantiomer is known to be much more active than the i?-enantiomer. Importantly, administration of only ( ⁇ S)-amlodipine avoids the adverse effects, including headache and edema, dizziness, flushing, palpitation, fatigue, nausea, abdominal pain and somnolence, associated with administration of racemic amlodipine.
  • (S)- Amlodipine is useful in treating cerebral ischemia, cerebral disorders, arrhythmias, cardiac hypertrophy, heart failure, coronary vasospasm, myocardial infarction, renal impairment, viral infection, thrombosis, atherosclerosis, peripheral vascular disease, migraine headache, restenosis following vascular surgery or injury and acute renal failure while avoiding the above- described adverse effects associated with the administration of the racemic mixture of amlodipine. More effective treatments are needed for hypertension, hyperlipidemia, and related cardiovascular disorders. In particular, new therapeutic treatments are needed which cause a more substantial reduction in blood pressure while minimizing the negative side effects associated with taking such agents.
  • compositions comprising optically pure (»S)-am ⁇ odipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor fulfill this need and provide other related advantages.
  • Summary of the Invention One aspect of the present invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising optically pure (S)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor.
  • the cholesteryl ester transfer protein is torcetrapib, JTT-705, or SC-795.
  • the cholesteryl ester transfer protein is torcetrapib.
  • said optically pure ( ⁇ S)-amlodipine is optically pure (5)-amlodipine malate, or a polymo ⁇ h, pseudopolymo ⁇ h or solvate thereof.
  • Another aspect of the present invention relates to a method of treating a patient suffering from hypertension, hyperlipidemia, or a cardiac disorder, comprising co-administering a therapeutically effective amount of optically pure (5)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, h certain embodiments, said optically pure (S)-amlodipine is optically pure (S)- amlodipine malate, or a polymo ⁇ h, pseudopolymo ⁇ h or solvate thereof.
  • Figure 1 depicts a procedure for the preparation of (S)-amlodipine-L-malate (form A). Note: If the free base of (S)-amlodipine is used as the starting material, then the first step (NaOH/MTBE) may be eliminated.
  • Figure 2 depicts a procedure for the preparation of (S)-amlodipine hemi-D-tartrate DMAC solvate.
  • Figure 3 depicts a procedure for the preparation of (S)-amlodipine free base from ( ⁇ -amlodipine hemi-D-tartrate DMAC solvate.
  • Figure 4 depicts a procedure for the preparation of (S)-amlodipine-L-malate (form A) from ( ⁇ S)-amlodipine free base.
  • Figure 5 depicts solid state stability data for (S)-amlodipine L-malate (form A).
  • Figure 6 depicts solid state stability data for (jS)-amlodipine L-malate (form A).
  • Figure 7 depicts representative plasma concentration-time relationship after a single oral dose of a hypothetical drug. Area under the plasma concentration-time curve is indicated by shading.
  • the present invention relates generally to pharmaceutical compositions containing two or more active agents that when taken together reduce hypertension.
  • the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising optically pure (S)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor.
  • S optically pure
  • a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor A large number of cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors are known in the art and are amenable to the present invention.
  • the cholesteryl ester transfer protein is torcetrapib, JTT-705, or SC-795.
  • the cholesteryl ester transfer protein is torcetrapib.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are useful for treating a patient suffering from hypertension, hyperlipidemia, or related cardiac disorders.
  • (S) -Amlodipine is a dihydropyridine calcium antagonist (calcium ion antagonist or slow channel blocker) that inhibits the transmembrane influx of calcium ions into vascular smooth muscle and cardiac muscle.
  • Amlodipine is known to exist in two chiral forms designated (S)-amlodipine and (R)-amlodipine.
  • the S-enantiomer is known to be much more active than the R-enantiomer.
  • Methods of treatment using (S)-amlodi ⁇ ine are described in U.S. Patent 6,476,058. See Burges et al. Cardiovas Drug Dev. 1990, 8, 25-44 for a review of amlodipine.
  • Amlodipine its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, routes of administration, dosages, and formulations are described in U.S. Patents 4,572,909 and 4,879,303.
  • the chemical name of (S)-amlodipme is (S)-3-Ethyl-5-l-methyl-2-(2- aminoethoxymethyl)-4-(2-chlorophenyl)-l,4-dihydro- 6-methyl-3,5-pyridinedicarboxylate and the structure is presented below.
  • ( ⁇ S)-Amlodipine can be prepared by separation of the R- and S-enantiomers via fractional crystallization of diastereomeric mixtures formed by basic resolving agents and racemic carboxylic-acid-containing precursors of amlodipine. See T. Shibanuma et al. Chem. Pharm. Bull. 1980, 5(9), 2809-2812 and M. Eltze et al. Chirality 1990, 2, 233-240.
  • (S)-amlodipine may be obtained by resolution of the corresponding racemic 4- aryl- 1 -ethoxymethyl- 1 ,4-dihydro-5 -methoxycarbonyl-2,6-dimethylpyridine-3 -carboxylic acids followed by subsequent alkylation and esterification as described in WO 88/07524 and WO 88/07525.
  • Optically pure cinchonine and cinchonidine salts are basic resolving agents that have proven useful in the resolution of amlodipine.
  • a technique for separation of the (S)-amlodipine isomer from the racemic mixture has been illustrated schematically by J. E. Arrowsmith in EP 0331 315. See also U.S.
  • the (S) isomer has been reported to be more active than the (R) isomer. Negative inotropic effects can be detected in vitro but such effects have not been seen in intact animals at therapeutic doses. Serum calcium concentration is not affected by amlodipine. Within the physiologic pH range, amlodipine is an ionized compound
  • Steady state plasma levels of amlodipine are reached after 7 to 8 days of consecutive daily dosing.
  • the pharmacokinetics of amlodipine are not significantly influenced by renal impairment. Patients with renal failure may therefore receive the usual initial dose.
  • Elderly patients and patients with hepatic insufficiency have decreased clearance of amlodipine with a resulting increase in AUC of approximately 40-60%, and a lower initial dose may be required.
  • racemic amlodipine produces vasodilation resulting in a reduction of supine and standing blood pressures. These decreases in blood pressure are not accompanied by a significant change in heart rate or plasma catecholamine levels with chronic dosing.
  • the magnitude of reduction in blood pressure with amlodipine is also correlated with the height of pretreatment elevation; thus, individuals with moderate hypertension (diastolic pressure 105-114 mm Hg) had about a 50% greater response than patients with mild hypertension (diastolic pressure 90-104 mm Hg).
  • Normotensive subjects experienced no clinically significant change in blood pressures (+1/-2 mm Hg).
  • hemodynamic measurements of cardiac function at rest and during exercise (or pacing) in patients with normal ventricular function treated with amlodipine have generally demonstrated a small increase in cardiac index without significant influence on dP/dt or on left ventricular end diastolic pressure or volume.
  • amlodipine has not been associated with a negative inotropic effect when administered in the therapeutic dose range to intact animals and man, even when co- admimstered with beta-blockers to-man. Similar findings, however, have been observed in normals or well-compensated patients with heart failure with agents possessing significant negative inotropic effects, hi a double-blind, placebo-controlled clinical trial involving 118 patients with well compensated heart failure (NYHA Class II and Class III), treatment with racemic amlodipine did not lead to worsened heart failure, based on measures of exercise tolerance, left ventricular ejection fraction and clinical symptomatology.
  • the dose, and perhaps the dose frequency, will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient, h general, the total daily dose ranges, for the conditions described herein, is from about 0.5 mg to about 50 mg.
  • a daily dose range should be between about 1 mg to about 25 mg.
  • a daily dose range should be between about 1 mg to about 10 mg.
  • the daily dose range should be about 2, 4, 6, or 8 mg.
  • the therapy may be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 0.05 mg to about 1 mg and increased up to about 5 mg or higher depending-on the patient's global response.
  • (S)- Amlodipine may be useful in the treatment of cerebral ischemia.
  • Cerebral ischemia often the result of atherosclerotic disease or hypertension, results from insufficient cerebral circulation. Under normal circumstances, an extensive collateral circulation ensures adequate blood flow. However, cerebral ischemia may result from either an intra- or extracranial interruption of arterial blood flow. If interruption is transient, the cerebral tissues recover, and neurologic symptoms disappear. If the ischemia lasts for a somewhat more extended period, infarction results and the resulting neurologic damage is permanent. In the case of extended ischemia resulting in infarction, treatment is directed to the underlying vascular disease, to blood platelet aggregation inhibitors, and anticoagulant therapy. Because of its activity as a calcium channel antagonist, (>S)-amlodipine may also be useful in treating cardiac arrhythmias.
  • Cardiac arrhythmias represent a broad, complex group of electrophysiologic disorders that affect the mechanical properties of the heart and vasculature, altering normal cardiac rhythm, function and output.
  • Normal cardiac rhythm originates with the sinoatrial node, which possesses high intrinsic automaticity. Adequate automaticity and conduction lead to activation of atrial and ventricular fibers, producing in sequence the elements of normal functional heart beat.
  • Calcium antagonists may be of value in conditions where calcium-related changes in membrane potential and conduction alter normal rhythm. In the absence of treatment, symptoms vary with individual arrhythmias, but are often the consequence of inadequate cardiac filling and output and often include fatigue, decreased exercise tolerance, syncope, shortness of breath, nausea, lightheadedness and the like.
  • ( ⁇ S)-Amlodipine may be useful to treat cardiac hypertrophy.
  • Cardiac hypertrophy can result from excessive workload either due to an obstruction to outflow, termed systolic overload, or to excessive volumes presented to the heart in diastole, termed diastolic overload.
  • Systolic overload results in concentric ventricular hypertrophy, in which there is an increased thickness in the walls of the heart not associated with increased volume.
  • Diastolic overload causes dilation and hypertrophy with an increased blood volume.
  • An inadequate cardiac output results from the heart's failure in systolic or diastolic overload, leading to fatigue, shortness of breath, pulmonary congestion, edema and the like.
  • Calcium channel antagonists effect workload and, as such, may be useful in treating cardiac hypertrophy due to the effect of the calcium antagonist on cardiac and vascular smooth muscle in reducing blood pressure.
  • ( ⁇ S)-Amlodipine could be used to treat coronary arterial spasm.
  • Coronary arterial spasm can occur in the absence of significant coronary atherosclerosis and is thought to be an initiating event in variant angina and in myocardial infarction. Coronary spasm may occur without the patient feeling any significant discomfort.
  • diverse neural impulses to the heart may provoke coronary vascular spasm. This may result in enhanced myocardial ischemia and arrhythmia, which in turn may culminate in ventricular fibrillation and sudden cardiac death.
  • the calcium channel antagonists maybe of particular usefulness due to their effect on cardiac and vascular smooth muscle.
  • (S)-Amlodi ⁇ ine may be useful in the treatment of myocardial infarction, ischemic myocardial necrosis, and ischemia reperfusion injury.
  • Myocardial infarction or ischemic myocardial necrosis generally results from the abrupt reduction of coronary blood flow to a portion of the myocardium.
  • the condition likely originates from atherosclerosis of the coronary arteries. Either coronary artery vasospasm or acute coronary thrombosis precipitates the condition, although the etiology is the subject of continuing research.
  • Myocardial infarction is predominantly a disease of the left ventricle. Precordial pain and left ventricular dysfunction characterize the disease. The pain, which can be severe aching or pressure, leads to apprehension. Symptoms include left ventricular heart failure, pulmonary edema, shock or significant cardiac arrhythmia. Calcium channel antagonists may find utility in the management of myocardial infarction patients due to their effects on coronary artery vasospasm, blood pressure or other effects on cardiac function or vascular smooth muscle. S)-Amlodipine may be used to treat congestive heart failure. Congestive heart failure can be caused by hypertension, cardiomyopathy, coronary artery disease or valvular heart disease.
  • (S)- Amlodipine maybe of use in treating migraine.
  • Classic migraine typically begins with visual auras followed by severe headaches, often accompanied by nausea and vomiting.
  • Common migraine has similar symptoms without the preceding visual aura.
  • the causes of migraine have been studied intensely, and are still a matter of debate. The most generally accepted cause is hypoxia due to reduced cerebral blood flow.
  • Calcium channel antagonists have been used for migraine prophylaxis since they can increase cerebral blood flow.
  • ( ⁇ S)-Amlodipine may be useful for treating Raynaud's phenomenon, which is characterized by vascular spasm of the extremities. These vasospasms can be caused by cold or stress. A pallor or cyanosis is usually present due to severe constriction of the digital arteries. The phenomenon is often seen as a secondary disorder with arterial diseases or connective tissue diseases such as scleroderma, arthritis or lupus erythematosus. Calcium channel antagonists have been shown to be effective in treating Raynaud's phenomenon. Interestingly, (S)- Amlodipine L-malate has been found to be unexpectedly bioavailable in mammals (in particular humans).
  • AUC Area Under the Curve and indicates the total amount of the drug in plasma over a period of time; see discussion below
  • (S)-amlodipine-malate showed increased levels of (5)-amlodipine compared to humans dosed with equivalent amounts of (S)- amlodipine maleate.
  • This increased bioavailability increases the effectiveness of the drug without increasing the dosage. This allows an improved effectiveness for the compound with an equivalent dose or the use of a lower dose to achieve the same efficacy.
  • Cholesteryl Ester Transfer Protein Inhibitors (CETP Inhibitors) Cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors (CETP Inhibitors) are a class of compounds that selectively inhibit cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • CETP inhibitors are effective agents for increasing HDL levels in a variety of animal models, and results from advanced-stage clinical trials indicate that CETP inhibitors can be used to treat a variety of cardiac disorders.
  • a large number of CETP inhibitors are known and are amenable to the present invention.
  • Representative CETP inhibitors are described below.
  • the cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors used in the present invention can be characterized by their CETP inhibition properties.
  • One method of evaluating the ability of a compound to inhibit CETP is by measuring the IC 50 - value of the compound using procedures known in the art. Representative examples of procedures to determine the IC 50 , Kj, and ED 50 can be found in E. J. Reinhard et al. J. Med. Chem.
  • the IC 50 - values of several promising CETP inhibitors are as follows: torcetrapib (50 nM), SC-795 (20 nM), JTT-705 (9 ⁇ M), and CGS 25159 ( ⁇ 10 ⁇ M). See R. W. Clark et al. Arterioscler Thromb. Vase. Biol. 2004, 24(3), 490-7; D. T. Connolly et al.
  • the compounds of the present invention have an ICso-value of less than about 50 ⁇ M against cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain instances, the compounds of the present invention have an IC 50 - value of less than about 1 ⁇ M against cholesteryl ester transfer protein, hi certain instances, the compounds of the present invention have an IC 50 -value of less than about 750 nM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the compounds of the present invention have an IC50- value of less than about 500 nM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the compounds of the present invention have an IC 5 o-value of less than about 200 nM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the compounds of the present invention have an IC 5 o- value of less than about 100 nM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein, h a most preferred embodiment, the compounds of the present invention have an IC 5 o-value of less than about 50, 25, 10, or 5 nM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • a dose of the cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof suitable for administration to a human will be in the range of 0.01 to 50 mg per kilogram body weight of the recipient per day, preferably in the range of 0.1 to 3 mg per kilogram body weight per day. Unless otherwise stated all weights of active ingredients are calculated in terms of drug per se.
  • the desired dose is presented as two, three, four, five or more sub-doses administered at appropriate intervals throughout the day. These sub-doses may be administered in unit dosage forms, for example, containing about 5 to 50 mg.
  • the total daily dose ranges, for the conditions described herein is from about 0.5 mg to about 4 g.
  • a daily dose range should be between about 1 mg to about 500 mg. Most preferably, a daily dose range should be between about 1 mg to about 250 mg. In certain embodiments, the daily dose range should be about 10, 50, 100, 150, or 200 mg.
  • the therapy may be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 5 mg to about 15 mg and increased up to about 25 mg or higher depending on the patient's global response.
  • a variety of assays are known in the art for evaluating the therapeutic potential of cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors, e.g., measurement of serum cholesterol levels (HDL, TGI, and VLDL+LDL) and cholesteryl ester transfer protein activity.
  • HEPATIC CHOL Hepatic Cholesterol Concentration
  • VLDL and LDL (VLDL+LDL) cholesterol concentrations will be calculated as the difference between total and HDL cholesterol.
  • Dog Model for Evaluating Drugs that Alter Lipid Levels Male beagle dogs, obtained from a vendor such as Marshall farms and weighing 6- 12 kg are fed once a day for two hours and given water ad libitum. Dogs may be randomly assigned to a dosing groups consisting of 6 to 12 dogs each, such as: vehicle, i.g.; 1 mg/kg, i.g.; 2 mg/kg, i.q.; 4 mg/kg, i.g.; 2 mg/kg, p.o. (powder in capsule).
  • Intra-gastric dosing of a therapeutic material dissolved in aqueous solution may be done using a gavage tube.
  • aqueous solution for example, 0.2% Tween 80 solution [polyoxyethylene mono-oleate, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, Mo.]
  • blood samples may be drawn from the cephalic vein in the morning before feeding in order to evaluate serum cholesterol (total and HDL) and triglycerides.
  • Animals are to be allowed 2 hours to eat before any remaining food is removed.
  • Feces are to be collected over a two-day period at the end of the study and may be analyzed for bile acid or lipid content.
  • Blood samples are also to be taken, at the end of the treatment period, for comparison with pre-study serum lipid levels. Statistical significance will be determined using the standard student's T-test with p ⁇ 0.05.
  • Dog Serum Lipid Measurement Blood is to be collected from the cephalic vein of fasted dogs in serum separator tubes (Vacutainer SST, Becton Dickinson and Co., Franklin Lakes, N.J.). The blood is centrifuged at 2000 ⁇ m for 20 minutes and the serum decanted.
  • Total cholesterol may be measured in a 96-well format using a Wako enzymatic diagnostic kit (Cholesterol CII) (Wako Chemicals, Richmond, Va.), utilizing the cholesterol oxidase reaction to produce hydrogen peroxide which is measured calorimetrically.
  • a standard curve from 0.5 to 10 ⁇ g cholesterol is to be prepared in the first 2 columns of the plate.
  • the serum samples (20-40 ⁇ L, depending on the expected lipid concentration) or known serum control samples are added to separate wells in duplicate. Water is added to bring the volume to 100 ⁇ L in each well. A 100 ⁇ L aliquot of color reagent is added to each well and the plates will be read at 500 nm after a 15 minute incubation at 37 degrees centigrade.
  • HDL cholesterol may be assayed using Sigma kit No. 352-3 (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, Mo.) which utilizes dextran sulfate and Mg ions to selectively precipitate LDL and VLDL.
  • a volume of 150 ⁇ L of each serum sample is to be added to individual microfuge tubes, followed by 15 ⁇ L of HDL cholesterol reagent (Sigma 352-3). Samples are to be mixed and centrifuged at 5000 ⁇ m for 5 minutes. A 50 ⁇ L aliquot of the supernatant is to be then mixed with 200 ⁇ L of saline and assayed using the same procedure as for total cholesterol measurement.
  • Triglycerides are to be measured using Sigma kit No. 337 in a 96-well plate format.
  • This procedure will measure glycerol, following its release by reaction of triglycerides with lipoprotein lipase.
  • Standard solutions of glycerol (Sigma 339-11) ranging from 1 to 24 ⁇ g are to be used to generate the standard curve.
  • Serum samples (20-40 ⁇ L, depending on the expected lipid concentration) are added to wells in duplicate. Water is added to bring the volume to 100 ⁇ L in each well and 100 ⁇ L of color reagent is also added to each well. After mixing and a 15 minute incubation, the plates will be read at 540 nm and the triglyceride values calculated from the standard curve. A replicate plate is also to be run using a blank enzyme reagent to correct for any endogenous glycerol in the serum samples.
  • Fecal samples may be collected to determine the fecal bile acid (FBA) concentration for each animal. Fecal collections may be made during the final 48 hours of the study, for two consecutive 24 hour periods between 9:00 am and 10:00 am each day, prior to dosing and feeding. The separate two-day collections from each animal are to be weighed, combined and homogenized with distilled water in a processor (Cuisinart) to generate a homogeneous slurry. About 1.4 g of the homogenate is to be extracted in a final concentration of 50% tertiary butanol/distilled water (2:0.6) for 45 minutes in a 37 °C water bath and centrifuged for 13 minutes at 2000 x g. The concentration of bile acids
  • mmoles/day may be determined using a 96-well enzymatic assay system.
  • a 20 ⁇ L aliquot of the fecal extract is to be added to two sets each of triplicate wells in a 96-well assay plate.
  • a standardized sodium taurocholate solution and a standardized fecal extract solution (previously made from pooled samples and characterized for its bile acid concentration) will also analyzed for assay quality control.
  • Twenty-microliter aliquots of sodium taurocholate, serially diluted to generate a standard curve are similarly to be added to two sets of triplicate wells.
  • reaction mixture containing 1 M hydrazine hydrate, 0.1 M pyrophosphate and 0.46 mg/ml NAD is to be added to each well.
  • HSD 3a- hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase enzyme
  • assay buffer 0.1 M sodium pyrophosphate
  • the difference in optical density HSD enzyme is to be used to determine the bile acid concentration (mM) of each sample based on the sodium taurocholate standard curve.
  • the bile acid concentration of the extract, the weight of the fecal homogenate (grams) and the body weight of the animal are to be used to calculate the corresponding FBA concentration in mmoles/kg/day for each animal.
  • the mean FBA concentration (mmoles/kg/day) of the vehicle group is to be subtracted from the FBA concentration of each treatment group to determine the increase (delta value) in FBA concentration as a result of the treatment.
  • Plasma Lipids Assay in Rabbits Plasma lipids can be assayed using standard methods as reported by J. R. Schuh et al., J. Clin.
  • Plasma Lipids Plasma for lipid analysis is obtained by withdrawing blood from the ear vein into EDTA-containing tubes (Vacutainer; Becton Dickenson & Co., Rutherford, N.J.), followed by centrifugal separation of the cells. Total cholesterol is determined enzymatically, using the cholesterol oxidase reaction. See C. A. Allain et al. Clin. Chem. 1974, 20, 470-475. HDL cholesterol is also measured enzymatically, after selective precipitation of LDL and VLDL by dextran sulfate with magnesium. See G. R. Warnick et al. Clin. Chem. 1982, 28, 1379-1388.
  • Plasma triglyceride levels are determined by measuring the amount of glycerol released by lipoprotein lipase through an enzyme-linked assay. See G. Bucolo et al. Clin. Chem. 1973, 19, 476-482. Atherosclerosis Animals are killed by pentobarbital injection. Thoracic aortas are rapidly removed, immersion fixed in 10% neutral buffered formalin, and stained with oil red O (0.3w). After a single longitudinal incision along the wall opposite the arterial ostia, the vessels are pinned open for evaluation of the plaque area.
  • the percent plaque coverage is determined from the values for the total area examined and the stained area, by threshold analysis using a true color image analyzer (Videometric 150; American rnnovision, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) interfaced to a color camera (Toshiba 3CCD) mounted on a dissecting microscope. Tissue cholesterol will be measured enzymatically as described, after extraction with a chloroform/methanol mixture (2:1) according to the method of Folch et al. (J Biol. Chem., 226, 497-509 (1957)).
  • the EDTA human plasma pool previously stored at -20 °C is to be thawed at room temperature, and centrifuged for 5 minutes to remove any particulate matter.
  • Tritiated HDL radiolabeled in the cholesteryl ester moiety ([ 3 H]CE- HDL) as described by Morton and Zilversmit (J. Biol. Chem., 256, 11992-95 (1981)), is to be added to the plasma to a final concentration of (25 ⁇ g/ml cholesterol).
  • Inhibitor compounds are to be added to the plasma as follows: Equal volumes of the plasma containing the [ 3 H]CE-HDL (396 ⁇ L) are added by pipette into micro tubes (Titertube®, Bio-Rad laboratories, Hercules, Calif). Compounds, usually dissolved as 20-50 mM stock solutions in DMSO, are to be serially diluted in DMSO (or an alternative solvent in some cases, such as dimethylformamide or ethanol). Four ⁇ L of each of the serial dilutions of inhibitor compounds or DMSO alone are then added to each of the plasma tubes. The tubes are immediately mixed.
  • Test wells are to contain plasma with dilutions of inhibitor compounds.
  • Control wells are to contain plasma with DMSO alone.
  • Blank wells are to contain plasma with DMSO alone that are left in the micro tubes at 4 °C for the 4 hour incubation and are added to the microtiter wells at the end of the incubation period.
  • VLDL and LDL are precipitated by the addition of 10 ⁇ L of precipitating reagent (1% (w/v) dextran sulfate (Dextralip50)/0.5 M magnesium chloride, pH 7.4) to all wells.
  • the wells are mixed on a plate mixer and then incubated at ambient temperature for 10 min.
  • the plates are then centrifuged at 1000 xg for 30 min at 10 °C.
  • the supernatants (50 ⁇ L) from each well are then transferred to PicoplateTM 96 plate wells (Packard, Meriden, Conn.) containing 250:1 MicroscintTM-40 (Packard, Meriden, Conn.).
  • IC 50 values will be determined as the concentration of inhibitor compound inhibiting transfer of [ 3 H]CE from the supernatant [ 3 H]CE-HDL to the precipitated VLDL and LDL by 50% compared to the transfer obtained in the control wells.
  • % Control [dpm b
  • CETP Activity In Vitro The ability of compounds to inhibit CETP activity are assessed using an in vitro assay that measures the rate of transfer of radiolabeled cholesteryl ester ([ 3 H]CE) from HDL donor particles to LDL acceptor particles. Details of the assay are provided by Glenn et al.
  • CETP Cholesteryl Ester Transfer Protein
  • [ 3 H]CE-labeled HDL, LDL, CETP and assay buffer 50 mM tris(hydroxymethyl) aminomethane, pH 7.4; 150 mM sodium chloride; 2 mM ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid; 1% bovine serum albumin
  • 50 mM tris(hydroxymethyl) aminomethane, pH 7.4; 150 mM sodium chloride; 2 mM ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid; 1% bovine serum albumin are incubated in a volume of 200 ⁇ L, for 2 hours at 37 °C in 96-well plates.
  • LDL is differentially precipitated by the addition of 50 ⁇ L of 1% (w/v) dextran sulfate/0.5 M magnesium chloride, mixed by vortex, and incubated at room temperature for 10 minutes.
  • the solution (200 ⁇ L) is transferred to a filter plate (Millipore).
  • the radioactivity present in the precipitated LDL is measured by liquid scintillation counting. Correction for non-specific transfer or precipitation is made by including samples that do not contain CETP.
  • the rate of [ 3 H]CE transfer using this assay is linear with respect to time and CETP concentration, up to 25- 30% of [ 3 H]CE transferred.
  • the potency of test compounds can be determined by performing the above described assay in the presence of varying concentrations of the test compounds and determining the concentration required for 50% inhibition of transfer of [ 3 H]CE from HDL to LDL. This value is defined as the IC 50 .
  • the IC 50 values determined from this assay will be accurate when the IC 50 is greater than 10 nM.
  • Inhibition of CETP Activity can be determined by administering the compound to an animal by intravenous injection or oral gavage, measuring the amount of transfer of tritium-labeled cholesteryl ester ([ 3 H]CE) from HDL to VLDL and LDL particles, and comparing this amount of transfer with the amount of transfer observed in control animals.
  • Male golden Syrian hamsters are to be maintained on a diet of chow containing
  • 0.24% cholesterol for at least two weeks prior to the study.
  • animals receiving intravenous dosing immediately before the experiment, animals are anesthetized with pentobarbital. Anesthesia is maintained throughout the experiment.
  • In-dwelling catheters are to be inserted into the jugular vein and carotid artery. At the start of the experiment all animals will receive 0.2 mL of a solution containing [ 3 H]CE-HDL into the jugular vein.
  • [ 3 H]CE-HDL is a preparation of human HDL containing tritium-labeled cholesteryl ester, and is prepared according to the method of Glenn et al. (Meth. Enzymol., 263, 339-351 (1996)).
  • Test compound is dissolved as a 80 mM stock solution in vehicle (2% ethanol: 98% PEG 400, Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo., USA) and administered either by bolus injection or by continuous infusion.
  • vehicle 2% ethanol: 98% PEG 400, Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo., USA
  • Test compound is dissolved as a 80 mM stock solution in vehicle (2% ethanol: 98% PEG 400, Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo., USA) and administered either by bolus injection or by continuous infusion.
  • vehicle 2% ethanol: 98% PEG 400, Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo., USA
  • Plasma samples are to be taken at two hours and four hours by the same method. Blood samples are mixed well and kept on ice until the completion of the experiment. Plasma is obtained by centrifugation of the blood samples at 4 °C. The plasma (50 ⁇ L) is treated with 5 ⁇ L of precipitating reagent (dextran sulfate, 10 g/L; 0.5 M magnesium chloride) to remove VLDL/LDL. After centrifugation, the resulting supernatant (25 ⁇ L) containing the HDL will be analyzed for radioactivity using a liquid scintillation counter. The percentage [ 3 H]CE transferred from HDL to LDL and VLDL (% transfer) will be calculated based on the total radioactivity in equivalent plasma samples before precipitation.
  • precipitating reagent extract sulfate, 10 g/L; 0.5 M magnesium chloride
  • the amount of transfer from HDL to LDL and VLDL in control animals will be 20% to 35% after 4 hours.
  • conscious, non-anesthetized animals can receive an oral gavage dose of test compound as a suspension in 0.1% methyl cellulose in water.
  • the animals are to be anesthetized with pentobarbital and then dosed with 0.2 mL of a solution containing [ 3 H]CE-HDL into the jugular vein as described above.
  • Control animals are to receive 0.25 mL of the vehicle solution without test compound by oral gavage.
  • inhibition of CETP activity by a test compound can be determined by administering the compound to mice that have been selected for expression of human CETP (hCETP) by transgenic manipulation (hCETP mice).
  • Test compounds can be administered by intravenous injection, or oral gavage and the amount of transfer of tritium-labeled cholesteryl ester ([ 3 H]CE) from HDL to VLDL and LDL particles is determined, and compared to the amount of transfer observed in control animals.
  • mice that are homozygous for the hCETP gene are to be maintained on a high fat chow diet, such as TD 88051 , as described by Nishina et al. (J Lipid Res., 31 , 859-869 (1990)) for at least two weeks prior to the study.
  • Mice are to receive an oral gavage dose of test compound as a suspension in 0.1% methyl cellulose in water or an intravenous bolus injection of test compound in 10% ethanol and 90% polyethylene glycol.
  • Control animals are to receive the vehicle solution without test compound by oral gavage or by an intravenous bolus injection. At the start of the experiment all animals will receive 0.05 mL of a solution containing [ 3 H]CE-HDL into the tail vein.
  • [ 3 H]CE-HDL will be a preparation of human HDL containing tritium-labeled cholesteryl ester, and is prepared according to the method of Glenn et al. (Meth. Enzymol., 263, 339-351 (1996)). After 30 minutes, the animals are exsanguinated and blood collected in standard microtainer tubes containing ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid. Blood samples are mixed well and kept on ice until the completion of the experiment. Plasma will be obtained by centrifugation of the blood samples at 4 °C. The plasma is separated and analyzed by gel filtration chromatography and the relative proportion of [ 3 H]CE in the VLDL, LDL and HDL regions will be determined.
  • the percentage [ 3 H]CE transferred from HDL to LDL and VLDL (% transfer) will be calculated based on the total radioactivity in equivalent plasma samples before precipitation. Typically, the amount of transfer from HDL to LDL and VLDL in control animals will be 20% to 35% after 30 min.
  • Cholesteryl Ester Transfer Protein Inhibitors A large number of CETP Inhibitors are known and are amenable to the present invention. For example, one of the first CETP inhibitors was a monoclonal antibody reported by Swenson and coworkers that specifically inhibits CETP. See Swenson et al., (J. Biol. Chem., 264, 14318 (1989)). Other CETP inhibitors include proteins from human plasma described in Son et al. (Biochim.
  • 2-aryl-substituted pyridines as cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors useful as cardiovascular agents.
  • One substituent at C 3 of the pyridine ring can be an hydroxyalkyl group.
  • Dow and Wright describe heterocyclic derivatives substituted with an aldehyde addition product of an alkylamine to afford 1 -hydroxy- 1 -amines. These are reported to be ⁇ -3- adrenergic receptor agonists useful for treating diabetes and other disorders, hi Great
  • German Patent Application No. 2305665, Fisher et al. disclose 3-agonist secondary amino alcohol substituted pyridine derivatives useful for treating several disorders including cholesterol levels and atherosclerotic diseases.
  • Schmidt et al. describe tetrahydroquinoline derivatives as cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors.
  • European Patent Application No. 818197, Schmek et al. describe pyridines with fused heterocycles as cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors.
  • Brandes et al. in German Patent Application No. 19627430 describe bicyclic condensed pyridine derivatives as cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors, hi PCT Patent Application No. WO 9839299, Muller-Gliemann et al.
  • quinoline derivatives as cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors.
  • Polycyclic compounds that are useful as CETP inhibitors are disclosed by A. Oomura et al. in Japanese Patent No. 10287662.
  • Cycloalkylpyridines useful as CETP inhibitors are disclosed by Schmidt et al. in European Patent No. EP 818448.
  • Substituted tefrahydronaphthalene compounds useful as CETP inhibitors are described in PCT Patent Application No. WO 99/14174.
  • CETP inhibitor 85)-3-cyclopentyl-l-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-[(S)-fluoro(4-trifluoromethylpheny l)methyl]-8-hydroxy-6-spirocclobutyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydronaphthalene.
  • Some 4-heteroaryl- tetrahydroquinolines useful as CETP inhibitors are described in PCT Patent Application No. WO 9914215.
  • that disclosure describes 3-(4-trifluoromethylbenzoyl)- 5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinolin-5-one as a useful CETP inhibitor.
  • CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are also described in U.S. 5,932,587; DE 19741400 Al; DE 19741399 Al; WO 9914215 Al; WO 9914174; DE 19709125 Al; DE 19704244 Al; DE 19704243 Al; EP 818448 Al; WO 9804528 A2; DE 19627431 Al; DE 19627430 Al; DE 19627419 Al; EP 796846 Al; DE 19832159; DE 818197; DE 19741051; WO 9941237 Al; WO 9914204 Al; WO 9835937 Al; JP 11049743; WO 200018721; WO 200018723; WO 200018724; WO 200017164; WO 200017165; WO 200017166; EP 992496; and EP 987251, all of which are hereby inco ⁇ orated by reference.
  • CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are also described in the following U.S. published patent applications and issued patents 2004/0058908, 2004/0039018, 2004/0028644, 2003/0203892, 2003/0198674, 2003/0186952, 2003/0166720, 2003/0166712, 2003/0109558, 2002/0103225; 6,569,905; 6,489,366; 6,462,091; 6,458,851; 6,458,850; 5,519,001; and 5,512,548, all of which are hereby inco ⁇ orated by reference.
  • CGS 25159 CGS 25159 is a isoflavan derivative investigated by researches at CIBA Co ⁇ oration.
  • CGS 25159 has an IC 50 value of ⁇ 10 ⁇ M against CETP.
  • the biological activity of CGS 25159 is described in H.V. Kothari et al. Atherosclerosis 1997, 128(1), 59-66.
  • CGS 25159 has the chemical name 3-(3-fluoro ⁇ henyl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-l- benzopyran-6,7-diol and the structure is presented below.
  • Chloropuupehenone Chloropuupehenone is a sesquite ⁇ ene derivative described by B. N. Ravi and workers inJ. PureAppl Chem. 1979, 51, 1893. Chloropuupehenone inhibits CETP and has an IC 5 o of 0.3 ⁇ M. See Coval et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1995, 5, 605-610. The structure of chloropuupehenone is presented below.
  • CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A was isolated from fungal cultures of Cytospora. The isolation and biological activity are described in J. C. Lee et al. J. Antibiotics 1996, 49, 693. CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A has IC of 40 ⁇ M against CETP and the structure is presented below.
  • CP 532623 is a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor being developed by Pfizer for the treatment of atherosclerosis.
  • JTT-705 JTT-705 is an oral cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor being developed by Japan Tobacco for the treatment of hyperlipidemia and prevention of heart disease in low HDL patients. A phase I clinical trial is underway in Japan, and the results from a phase II clinical trial in the Netherlands have been reported.
  • JTT-705 has the chemical name 2- methylpropanethioic acid, S-[2-[[[[[l-(2-ethylbutyl)cyclohexyl]carbonyl]amino]phenyl]ester.
  • a prophylactic or therapeutic dose of JTT-705, or one of its salts, in the acute or chronic management of disease will vary with the severity of the condition to be treated and the route of administration.
  • the dose, and perhaps the dose frequency will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient, hi general, the total daily dose ranges, for the conditions described herein, is from about 1 mg to about 2000 mg.
  • a daily dose range should be between about 150 mg to about 1500 mg.
  • a daily dose range should be between about 200 mg to about 1000 mg.
  • the daily dose range should be about 350, 500, 750, or 900 mg.
  • the therapy may be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 100 mg to about 200 mg and increased up to about 400 mg or higher depending-on the patient's global response.
  • Niceritrol Niceritrol is an antihyperlipoproteinemic agent that has recently been shown to inhibit cholesteryl ester transfer protein. See J. Sasaki et al. Int. J. Clin. Pharmacol. Ther. 1995, 33(7), 420-6. Procedures for the synthesis of niceritrol are described in British patents 1,022,880 and 1,053,689. Toxicity data is presented in T. Sugawara et al. Oyo Yakuri 1977, 14, 741.
  • Niceritrol has the chemical name 3-pyridinecarboxylic acid 2,2- bis[[(3-pyridinylcarbonyl)oxy]methyl]-l,3-propanediyl ester and the structure is presented below.
  • the size of a prophylactic or therapeutic dose of niceritrol, or one of its salts, in the acute or chronic management of disease will vary with the severity of the condition to be treated and the route of administration.
  • the dose, and perhaps the dose frequency, will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient.
  • the total daily dose ranges, for the conditions described herein is from about 1 mg to about 2000 mg.
  • a daily dose range should be between about 250 mg to about 1500 mg.
  • a daily dose range should be between about 500 mg to about 1000 mg. In certain embodiments, the daily dose range should be about 600, 700, 800, or 900 mg. In managing the patient, the therapy may be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 100 mg to about 200 mg and increased up to about 400 mg or higher depending-on the patient's global response.
  • PD 140195 PD 140195 is a triazole derivative that inhibits cholesteryl ester transfer protein in vitro. PD 140195 has the chemical name 4-phenyl-5-tridecyl-4H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thiol. The biological activity of has been described in C. L. Bisgaier et al. Lipids 1994, 29(12), 811. SC-744. SC-794.
  • SC-795 & SC-364
  • SC-744, SC-794, SC-795, & SC-364 are l,l,l-trifluoro-3-amino-2-propanol derivatives that bind to CETP. It is believed that SC-744, SC-794, and SC-795 do not affect lipoprotein structure or CETP-lipoprotein recognition. These trifluoroamino- propanol derivatives inhibit CETP by reversibly binding to CETP. Interestingly, SC-795 binds to CETP with approximately 5000 times higher affinity than cholesterol which is the natural ligand for CETP. The synthesis and biological activity of SC-744, SC-794, SC-795, and SC-364 are described in Durley et al. J. Med. Chem.
  • SC-744 has an IC 50 value of 200 nM in a buffer solution using purified CETP and lipoprotein.
  • the IC 5 o value of SC-744 in plasma was 6 ⁇ M.
  • the ⁇ -enantiomer, SC-795 has an IC 50 value of 20 nM in a buffer solution using purified CETP and lipoprotein.
  • the S-enantiomer, SC-794 is thought to have little CETP inhibitory activity.
  • IC 50 value of SC-794 is >0.8 ⁇ M in a buffer solution using purified CETP and lipoprotein.
  • SC-794 The chemical name of SC-794 is (25)-3 -[(3 -phenoxyphenyl) [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol and the structure is presented below.
  • SC-795 The chemical name of SC-795 is (2i?)-3-[(3-phenoxyphenyl)[[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol and the structure is presented below.
  • SC-364 is l,l'-[dithiobis[4,l-phenylene[[[3-(l,l,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]imino]]]bis[3,3,3-trifluoro-2-propanol] and the structure is presented below.
  • SC-744 is a racemic mixture of SC-794 and SC-795.
  • SCH 58149 is a depsipeptide isolated from an organic extract of a fungal fermentation broth. SCH 58149 inhibits cholesteryl ester transfer protein and has an IC 50 of
  • Synthetic Peptide A is a thirty-eight amino acid synthetic peptide that inhibits cholesteryl ester transfer protein in vitro. Synthetic Peptide A was discovered during selective breeding experiments conducted on baboons. The preparation and biological activity of Synthetic Peptide A is described in R.S. Kushwaha J. Lipid Res. 1993, 34(8),
  • Torcetrapib is a tetrahydroquinoline derivative being developed by Pfizer for treatment of atherosclerosis and heart disease.
  • Brousseau and coworkers report that once- daily administration of a 120 mg dose of torcefrapid to patients resulted in a 46 percent increase in HDL-cholesterol.
  • a twice-daily administration of a 120 mg dose of torcefrapid to patients resulted in a 106 percent increase in HDL-cholesterol. See Brousseau, M.E. et al. N. Engl. J. Med. 2004, 350(15), 1505-15.
  • For addition discussions of the biological activity of torcetrapib see R. W. Clark et al.
  • Torcetrapib has the chemical name ethyl (2R,4S)-4-[[3,5- bis(trifluoromethyl)benzyl](methoxycarbonyl)amino]-2-ethyl-6-(trifluoromethyl)-3,4- dihydroquinoline-l(2H)-carboxylate and the structure is presented below.
  • a prophylactic or therapeutic dose of torcetrapib, or one of its salts, in the acute or chronic management of disease will vary with the severity of the condition to be treated and the route of administration.
  • the dose, and perhaps the dose frequency will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient, hi general, the total daily dose ranges, for the conditions described herein, is from about 1 mg to about 1000 mg.
  • a daily dose range should be between about 25 mg to about 500 mg.
  • a daily dose range should be between about 75 mg to about 300 mg.
  • the daily dose range should be about 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, or 275 mg.
  • U-l 06305 is a polycyclopropane derivate that has CETP inhibitory activity.
  • U- 106305 was discovered from the fermentation broth of a culture of UC 11136. Procedures for the preparation of U-106305 are described in A.G. M. Barrett et al. J Am. Chem. Soc. 1996, 118, 7863 and M. S. Kuo et al. J Am. Chem. Soc. 1995, 117, 10629.
  • U-106305 inhibited CETP by 50% when the concentration of U-106305 was 25 ⁇ M. The structure of U-106305 is presented below.
  • Wiedendiol-A Wiedendiol-A
  • Wiedendiol-A is a sesquite ⁇ ene-hydroquinone isolated from the marine sponge Xestospongia wedenmayeri.
  • the isolation and structure elucidation of Wiedendiol-A is reported in Coval et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1995, 5, 605-610.
  • Wiedendiol-A inhibits CETP and has an IC 50 of 5 ⁇ M.
  • the structure of Wiedendiol-A is presented below.
  • Wiedendiol-B Wiedendiol-B is a sesquite ⁇ ene-hydroquinone isolated from the marine sponge
  • Wiedendiol-B inhibits
  • CETP and has an IC 5 Q of 5 ⁇ M.
  • the structure of Wiedendiol-B is presented below.
  • WRMWY WRMWY is a pentapeptide identified in a bacteriophage assay. WRMWY inhibits cholesteryl ester transfer protein and has a Ki of 164 ⁇ M. The isolation and biological activity of WRMWY are described in P. D. Bonin et al. J. Pept. Res. 1998, 51(3), 216. SCH-50678 & Related Marine Products SCH-50678 and a series of structurally similar marine products that inhibit CETP are reported in S. J. Coval et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1995, 5, 605-610. SCH-50678 has an IC 50 value of 46 ⁇ M and the structure is presented below.
  • Puupenhenone triacetate has an IC 50 value of 46 ⁇ M and is described in B. N. Ravi J. Pure Appl. Chem. 1979, 51, 1893.
  • Puupenhenone has an IC 50 value of 6 ⁇ M and is described in B. N. Ravi J. Pure Appl. Chem. 1979, 51, 1893.
  • _Avarol has an IC 50 value of 25 ⁇ M and is described in L. Minale et al. Tetrahedron Lett. 1974, 3401.
  • Aureol has an IC 50 value of 22 ⁇ M and is described in P. Djura et al. J. Org. Chem. 1980, 45, 1435.
  • Illimaquinone has an IC 50 value of 100 ⁇ M and is described in R. T. Luibrand Tetrahedron 1979, 35, 609.
  • Spongiatriol has an IC 50 value of 103 ⁇ M and is described in R. Kazlauskas et al. Aust. J. Chem. 1979, 32, 867.
  • Spongiadiol has an IC 5 Q value of 196 ⁇ M and is described in R. T. Luibrand Tetrahedron 1979, 35, 609.
  • Sulfiricin has an IC 50 value of >190 ⁇ M and is described in A. E. Wright J. Org. Chem. 1989, 54, 3472.
  • Cholesteryl Phosphate Analogs A variety of cholesteryl phosphate analogs are known to inhibit CETP. The synthesis of 100-108 has been described by Pietzonka et al. in Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett.
  • IC 50 values for CETP inhibition are 4 ⁇ M (100), 5 ⁇ M (101), 2 ⁇ M (102), 30 ⁇ M (103), 24 ⁇ M (104), 15 ⁇ M (105), 6 ⁇ M (106), 30 ⁇ M (107), and 14 ⁇ M
  • 1,3, 5 -Triazine Compounds A series of 1,3,5-triazine compounds have been reported by Xia coworkers which inhibit CETP. The synthesis and CETP inhibitory activity of 109-119 is described in Xia et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1996, 6, 919-22. The IC 50 value for CETP inhibition and the structure of the compound is presented below.
  • Xia and coworkers also describe several other 1,3,5-triazine compounds and the percent inhibition of CETP wherein the concentration of the triazine was 50 ⁇ M. The percent inhibition and the structure of the compound are presented below.
  • Phenoxyphenyl Substituted Trifluoro-3-Amino-2-Propanols A large number of substituted phenoxyphenyl trifluoro-3-amino-2-propanols are known to inhibit CETP and are amenable to the present invention.
  • Durley and coworkers report that substitution of the phenoxy group at the 3-, 4-, or 5- positions increases the CETP binding affinity of the compound.
  • the synthesis and biological activity of a large number of substituted trifluoro-3-amino-2-propanols has been reported by Durley and coworkers inJ. Med. Chem. 2003, 46, 2152-68.
  • the structures and IC50 values of compounds 126-185 are presented below.
  • CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are oxy-substituted 4- carboxyamino-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolines represented by formula I:
  • Ri.i is hydrogen, Yi, W1-X1, or W1-Y1; Wi is carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, sulfmyl, or sulfonyl; Xi is -O-Yi, -S-Y l5 -N(H)-Y ⁇ , or -N-(Y ⁇ ) 2 ; Yi represents independently for each occurrence Zi or a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to ten membered straight or branched carbon chain; wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono-
  • R 1-3 is hydrogen or Oj
  • Qi is a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono-, or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Vi; Vi is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to eight membered
  • the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula I selected from the group consisting of [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-dichloro-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]- 6,7-dimethoxy-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-dinitro-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6,7-dimethoxy-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H- quinoline-1 -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(2,6-dichloro-pyr
  • R ⁇ -i is hydrogen, Y ⁇ , Wi-X ⁇ , or W ⁇ -Y ⁇ J W ⁇ is carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, sulfinyl, or sulfonyl;
  • X ⁇ is -O-Y ⁇ , -S-Y ⁇ -N(H)-Y ⁇ or -N-(Yêt) 2 ;
  • Y II represents independently for each occurrence Z ⁇ or a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to ten membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono- substituted with oxo; said
  • the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula II selected from the group consisting of [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl- amino]-2-methyl-7-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-7-chloro-2-methyl- 3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis- trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-metho ⁇ ycarbonyl-amino]-6-chloro-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H- quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-
  • R U M is hydrogen, Y ⁇ ⁇ , Wm-Xm, or W m -Ym; W ⁇ i is carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, sulfinyl, or sulfonyl; Xm is -O-Yi ⁇ , -S-Y m , -N(H)-Y ⁇ , or -N-(Y m ) 2 ; Yin represents independently for each occurrence Zm or a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to ten membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or fri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optional
  • Rm -8 are taken together and form at least one four to eight membered ring that is partially saturated or fully unsaturated optionally having one to three heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said ring or rings formed by R m - 5 and Rm -6 , or Rm -6 and Rm- 7 , and/or Rm -7 and Rm -8 are optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (d-C 6 )alkyl, (d-C )a ⁇ kylsulfonyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkenyl, hydroxy, (d-C 6 )alkoxy, (d-C ⁇ alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C 6 )alkylamino; wherein said (d-C 6 )alky
  • the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula III selected from the group consisting of [2R, 4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-methyl-2,3,4,6,7,8-hexahydro-cyclopenta[g]quinoline-l- carboxylic acid ethyl ester;
  • Riv-i is hydrogen, Yr , Wrv-Xrv, or Wrv-Yrv; Wrv is carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, sulfinyl or sulfonyl; Xrv is -O-Yiv, -S-Yrv, -N(H)-Yrv, or -N-(Yrv) 2 ; Yrv represents independently for each occurrence Zrv or a fully saturated, partially unsaturated or fully unsaturated one to ten membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono
  • the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula IV selected from the group consisting of [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-isopropyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l- carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6-chloro-2-cyclopropyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2S,4S] 2-cycloprop
  • CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are 4-amino substituted-2- substituted-l,2,3,4-tefrahydroquinolines represented by formula V:
  • Rv-i is Y v , Wv-Xv, or W v -Y v ;
  • Wv is a carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, sulfinyl, or sulfonyl;
  • Xv is -O-Yv, -S-Yv, -N(H)-Y V , or -N-(Y V ) 2 ;
  • Yy represents independently for each occurrence Zy or a fully saturated, partially unsaturated or fully unsaturated one to ten membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substi
  • Rv- 6 and Rv-7, and/or Rv- 7 and R V - 8 are optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (d-C 6 )alkyl, (d- C 4 )alkylsulfonyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkenyl, hydroxy, (C 1 -C 6 )alkoxy, (d-C ⁇ alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C 6 )alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(C 1 -C 6 )alkylamino; wherein said (d-C 6 )alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with hydroxy, (d-C 6 )alkoxy, (d-C ⁇ alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C ⁇
  • the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula V selected from the group consisting of [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-formyl-amino]-2- cyclopropyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-formyl-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6- trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid propyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[acetyl- (3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H- quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid tert-but
  • Rv ⁇ -23 and Rv ⁇ -24 each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen, cycloalkyl containing 3 to 6 carbon atoms, a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms, benzyl or phenyl, which is optionally substituted with up to two identical or different substituents in the form of halogen, trifluoromethyl, cyano, phenyl or nifro, and/or the carbocyclic rings formed are optionally substituted with a spiro-linked radical represented by formula
  • Wvi is oxygen or sulfur; Yvi and Yvi together form a 2- to 6-membered sfraight-chain or branched alkylene chain; e is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7; fis 1 or 2; Rvi-25, Rvi-26, Rv ⁇ -27, Rvi-28, Rvi-29, Rvi-3 0 and Rvi-3i each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen, trifluoromethyl, phenyl, halogen or a straight-chain or branched alkyl or alkoxy containing up to 6 carbon atoms each; or Rvi-25 and Rvi-26, or Rv ⁇ - 27 and Rvi- 28 each together are a sfraight-chain or branched alkyl chain containing up to 6 carbon atoms; or Rvi-25 and Rvi-26, or Rv ⁇ -27 and Rvi-28 each together form a radical of
  • Wvi has the meaning given above; g is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7; Rvi -3 2 and Rv ⁇ - 33 together form a 3- to 7-membered heterocycle, which contains an oxygen, sulfur, SO, SO 2 or BNRv ⁇ -34 ; and Rv ⁇ - 3 is a hydrogen atom, a phenyl, benzyl, or a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 4 carbon atoms, and salts and N oxides thereof, with the exception of 5(6H)-quinolones, 3-benzoyl-7,8-dihydro-2,7,7-frimethyl-4-phenyl. Procedures for preparation of compounds of formula VI are described in European Patent Application No.
  • the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula VI selected from the group consisting of 2-cyclopentyl-4-(4-fluorophenyl)-7,7-dimethyl-3-(4- trifluoromethylbenzoyl)-4,6,7,8-tetrahydro-lH-quinolin-5-one; 2-cyclopentyl-4-(4- fluorophenyl)-7,7-dimethyl-3-(4-tri.fluoromethylbenzoyl)-7,8-dihydro-6H-quinolin-5-one; [2-cyclopentyl-4-(4-fluorophenyl)-5-hydroxy-7,7-dimethyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinolin-3- yl]-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-methanone;
  • Rv ⁇ -i 5a is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, hydrogen, halogen, alkylthio, alkenylthio, alkynylthio, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy and heterocyclyloxy
  • Rv ⁇ -i 6a is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, haloalkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, arylalkoxy, and trialkylsilyloxy
  • Rv ⁇ - 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkyl, hal
  • Rv ⁇ - 46 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl
  • Rv ⁇ -4 7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl
  • Rv ⁇ - 48 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl
  • Rv ⁇ - 49 is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, haloaryl, haloheteroaryl, and haloheterocyclyl
  • Rv ⁇ - 50 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalky
  • CETP inhibitor of formula VII is dimethyl 5,5- dithiobis[2-difluoromethyl-4-(2-methylpropyl)-6-(trifluoromethyl)-3-pyridine-carboxylate].
  • Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are substituted biphenyls represented by formula VIII:
  • Avm is aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted up to 3 times in an identical manner or differently by halogen, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, or by straight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, or alkoxy with up to 7 carbon atoms each, or -NRV ⁇ MRV ⁇ I-2;
  • R VIIM and Rvm-2 each represent independently hydrogen, phenyl, or straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms;
  • Dvm is a straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, which is substituted by hydroxy;
  • Evm and Lv ffl each represent independently straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted by cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms; or is a cycloalkyl
  • R VIM , and Rvm-2, or Rv ⁇ -9 and Rv ⁇ -10 form a carbonyl group together with the carbon atom.
  • the compounds of formula VIII are described in WO 9804528, which is hereby inco ⁇ orated by reference.
  • CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are substituted 1,2,4- triazoles represented by formula IX:
  • R DM is higher alkyl, higher alkenyl, higher alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, aryloxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl
  • the CETP inhibitor a compoundof formula IX selected from the group consisting of 2,4-dihydro-4-(3-methoxyphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4- triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(2-fluorophenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-friazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(2- methylphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(3-chlorophenyl)-5- tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(2-methoxyphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H- 1,2,4- triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(2-methoxyphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H- 1,
  • CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are hetero- tetrahydroquinolines represented by formula X:
  • Ax represents cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms or a 5 to 7-membered, saturated, partially saturated or unsaturated, optionally benzo-condensed heterocyclic ring containing up to 3 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of S, N and O; that in case of a saturated heterocyclic ring is bonded to a nitrogen function, optionally bridged over it, and in which the aromatic systems mentioned above are optionally substituted up to 5 -times in an identical or different substituents in the form of halogen, nitro, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy or by a sfraight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, hydroxyalkyl or alkoxy each having up to 7 carbon atoms or by BNR ⁇ -3 R ⁇ -4 ; wherein R ⁇ -3 and Rx ⁇ each represent independently hydrogen, phenyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms or a 5 to 7-membered, saturated, partially saturated or unsaturated
  • R ⁇ -5, R ⁇ - 6 and R x-9 each represent independently cycloalkyl having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, or an aryl having 6 to 10 carbon atoms or a 5- to 7-membered aromatic, optionally benzo-condensed saturated or unsaturated, mono-, bi-, or tricyclic heterocyclic ring from the group consisting of S, N and O; in which the rings are substituted, optionally, in case of the nifrogen containing aromatic rings via the N function, with up to 5 identical or different substituents in the form of halogen, trifluoromethyl, nifro, hydroxy, cyano, carbonyl, trifluoromethoxy, straight sfraight-chain or branched acyl, alkyl, alkylthio, alkylalkoxy, alkoxy, or alkoxycarbonyl;
  • R ⁇ . 13 and R ⁇ -14 are identical or different and have the meaning of R ⁇ -3 and R ⁇ -4 indicated above, or
  • R ⁇ _ 5 and/or R ⁇ -6 are a radical of the R ⁇ -7 is hydrogen or halogen;
  • Lx is a straight chain or branched alkylene or alkenylene chain having up to 8 carbon atoms, that are optionally substituted with up to 2 hydroxy groups;
  • Tx and Xx are identical or different and denote a straight chain or branched
  • R ⁇ . 18 is hydrogen or straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms or phenyl; Ex represents cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms, or straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, that is optionally substituted by cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms or hydroxy, or represents a phenyl, that is optionally substituted by halogen or trifluoromethyl; Rx-i and R ⁇ . 2 together form a straight-chain or branched alkylene chain with up to 7 carbon atoms, that must be substituted by carbonyl group and/or by a radical of
  • R ⁇ -19 is hydrogen, cycloalkyl with 3 up to 7 carbon atoms, straight chain or branched silylalkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms or straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms that are optionally substituted by hydroxyl, straight chain or branched alkoxy with up to 6 carbon atoms or by phenyl, which in turn might be substituted by halogen, nitro, trifluormethyl, trifluoromethoxy or by phenyl or by tefrazole-substituted phenyl, and alkyl, optionally be substituted by a group with the formula BOR ⁇ .
  • R ⁇ - 22 is a straight chain or branched acyl with up to 4 carbon atoms or benzyl; or R ⁇ _ 19 is straight chain or branched acyl with up to 20 carbon atoms or benzoyl, that is optionally substituted by halogen, trifluoromethyl, nitro or trifluoromethoxy, or it is straight chain or branched fluoroacyl with up to 8 carbon atoms and 9 fluorine atoms; Rx -2 o and R ⁇ -21 each represent independently hydrogen, phenyl or straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms; or R ⁇ -20 and R ⁇ .
  • carbocyclic rings formed are optionally substituted, optionally also geminally, with up to six identical or different substituents in the form of triflouromethyl, hydroxy, nitrile, halogen, carboxyl, nitro, azido, cyano, cycloalkyl or cycloalkyloxy with 3 to 7 carbon atoms each, by straight chain or branched alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxy or alkylthio with up to 6 carbon atoms each or by straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms, which in turn is substituted with up to 2 identically or differently by hydroxyl, benzyloxy, trifluoromethyl, benzoyl, straight chain or branched alkoxy, oxyacyl or carbonyl with up to 4 carbon atoms each and/or phenyl, which may in turn be substituted with a halogen, trifuoromethyl or
  • R ⁇ -32 R ⁇ -33 is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7; fis 1 or 2; R ⁇ -23 and R ⁇ - 4 are identical or different and denote hydrogen, cycloalkyl with 3 to 6 carbon atoms, straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms, benzyl or phenyl, that is optionally substituted with up to 2 identically or differently by halogen, trifluoromethyl, cyano, phenyl or nitro, and/or the formed carbocyclic rings are substituted
  • a spiro-linked radical of 1 ,2 ; -SO 2 Ph; -[C(O)] d NR ⁇ . 23 R ⁇ . 24 ; or O; wherein Wx is oxygen or sulfur; Yx and Y' ⁇ together form a 2 to 6 membered straight chain or branched alkylene chain; c is 1, 2, 3, or 4; d is O or 1; R ⁇ -25, R ⁇ -26, R ⁇ -27, R ⁇ -28, R ⁇ -29, R ⁇ -30 and R x-3 ⁇ each represent independently hydrogen, trifluoromethyl, phenyl, halogen or sfraight chain or branched alkyl or alkoxy with up to 6 carbon atoms each; or R ⁇ - 25 and R ⁇ -26 or R ⁇ -2 7 and R ⁇ -28 respectively form together a straight chain or branched alkyl chain with up to 6 carbon atoms; or R ⁇ -25 and R ⁇ -2 6 or R ⁇ . 7 and R ⁇ -28 each
  • Wx has the meaning given above; g is a number equaling 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7; R ⁇ -32 and R ⁇ -33 form together a 3- to 7- membered heterocycle,. which contains an oxygen or sulfur atom or a group with the formula SO, SO 2 or -NR ⁇ -34 ; and Rx -3 is hydrogen, phenyl, benzyl or straight or branched alkyl with up to 4 carbon atoms. Procedures for the preparation of compounds of formula X are described in WO
  • the CETP inhibitor of formula X is selected from the group consisting of 2-cyclopentyl-5-hydroxy-7,7-dimethyl-4-(3-thienyl)-3-(4-trifluorome- thylbenxoyl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinoline; 2-cyclopentyl-3-[fluoro-(4- trifluoromethylphenyl)methyl]-5-hydiOxy-7,7-dimethyl-4-(3-thienyl)-5,6,7,8- tetrahydroquinoline; and 2-cyclopentyl-5 -hydroxy-7,7-dimethyl-4-(3 -thienyl)-3 - (trifluoromethylbenxyl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinoline.
  • Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are substituted tetrahydro naphthalines and
  • a ⁇ is for cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms, or stands for aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms, or stands for a 5- to 7-membered, saturated, partially unsaturated or unsaturated, possibly benzocondensated, heterocycle with up to 4 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of S, N, and O; wherein aryl and the heterocyclic ring systems mentioned above are substituted up to 5-fold, identical or different, by cyano, halogen, nitro, carboxyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoro- methoxy, or by straight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylthio, alkoxycarbonyl, oxyalkoxycarbonyl or alkoxy each with up to 7 carbon atoms, or -NR ⁇ -3 R ⁇ -4 ; R ⁇ -3 and R ⁇ .
  • D ⁇ is a radical of R ⁇ - 5 -L-, -C(R ⁇ - 6 )(R ⁇ . 7 )(R ⁇ -8), or R ⁇ -9-T ⁇ -V ⁇ -X ⁇ -;
  • R ⁇ -5, R ⁇ - 6 and R ⁇ -9 each represent independently cycloalkyl with 3 to 6 carbon atoms, or denote aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms, or denote a 5- to 7-membered, possibly benzocondensated, saturated or unsaturated, mono-, bi- or tricyclic heterocycle with up to 4 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of S, N, and O; wherein said cycles are optionallyt substituted in the case of the nitrogen-containing rings also via the N-function up to 5-fold, identical or different, by halogen, trifluoromethyl nitro, hydroxy, cyano, carboxyl, trifluoromethoxy, straight
  • RX M 7 is hydrogen or straight-chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy or acyl with up to 6 carbon atoms each;
  • L ⁇ is a straight-chain or branched alkylene- or alkenylene chain with up to 8 carbon atoms each, which is possibly substituted up to 2-fold by hydroxy;
  • T ⁇ and X ⁇ each represent independently a straight-chain or branched alkylene chain with up to 8 carbon atoms, or T ⁇ and X ⁇ are a bond;
  • V ⁇ is oxygen, sulfur, or -NR ⁇ -18 ;
  • RX MS is hydrogen or straight-chain or branched alkyl alkoxy or alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms each, or a radical of - NR X S R X - K J;
  • R X 5 and R ⁇ -16 are identical or different and have the meaning given above for R ⁇ _ 13 and R x-14 ;
  • RX M 7 is hydrogen or straight-chain or branched alkyl, al
  • R ⁇ -i9 is hydrogen, cycloalkyl with 3 to 7 carbon atoms, straight-chain or branched silylalkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, or straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, which is possibly substituted by hydroxy, straight-chain or branched alkoxy with up to 6 carbon atoms, or by phenyl, which itself can be substituted by halogen, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy or by phenyl substituted by phenyl or tetrazol; and said alkyl is optionally substituted by -ORn-22; R ⁇ - 22 is a straight-chain or branched acyl with up to 4 carbon atoms, or benzyl; R ⁇ _ 19 is a straight-chain or branched acyl with up to 20 carbon atoms or benzoy
  • R ⁇ - 23 and R ⁇ - 4 each represent independently hydrogen, cycloalkyl with 3 to 6 carbon atoms, straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms, benzyl or phenyl, which is optionally substituted up to 2-fold identical or different, by halogen, trifluoromethyl, cyano, phenyl or nifro, and/or the alkylene chain formed by R X M and R ⁇ _ 2 is optionally substituted by a spiro-jointed radical of R ⁇
  • g is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7; R ⁇ -32 and R ⁇ -33 together form a 3- to 7-membered heterocycle that contains an oxygen- or sulfur atom or a group of the formula SO, SO 2 or -NR ⁇ _ 3 ; and R ⁇ -34 is hydrogen, phenyl, benzyl, or straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 4 carbon atoms.
  • Ax ⁇ and Ex ⁇ each represent independently aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms optionally substituted, up to 5 -fold identical or different, by halogen, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro or by sfraight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, hydroxy alkyl or alkoxy with up to 7 carbon atoms each, or by -NR XIM R ⁇ -2 ; R XIM and R ⁇ n -2 each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen, phenyl, or sfraight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms; Dx ⁇ is a straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, which is substituted by hydroxy; Lx ⁇ represents independently for each occurrence cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms or sfraight-chain or branched alky
  • the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula XII selected from the group consisting of 4,6-bis-(p-fluorophenyl)-2-isopropyl-3-[(p- trifluoromethylphenyl)-(fluoro)-methyl]-5-(l-hydroxyethyl)pyridine; 2,4-bis-(4- fluorophenyl)-6-isopropyl-5-[4-(trifluoromethylphenyl)-fluoromethyl]-3- hydroxymethyl)pyridine; and 2,4-bis-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-isopropyl-5-[2-(3- trifluoromethylphenyl)- vinyl] -3 -hydroxymethyl)pyridine.
  • Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are represented by formula XIII:
  • Rxm is a straight chain or branched C O alkyl; sfraight chain or branched C 2-1 o alkenyl; halogenated C 1-4 lower alkyl; C 3-10 cycloalkyl that may be substituted; C 5-8 cycloalkenyl that may be substituted; C 3-10 cycloalkyl C MO alkyl that may be substituted; aryl that may be substituted; aralkyl that may be substituted; or a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic group having 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms or sulfur atoms that may be substituted; X ⁇ -1, X ⁇ -2, X ⁇ -3, X ⁇ m-4 each represent independently hydrogen, halogen, C ⁇ -4 lower alkyl, halogenated C1-4 lower alkyl, C 1 -4 lower alkoxy, cyano, nifro, acyl,
  • the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula XIII selected from the group consisting of N,N'-(dithiodi-2,l-phenylene)bis[2,2-dimethyl- propanamide]; N,N'-(dithiodi-2,l-phenylene)bis[l-methyl-cyclohexanecarboxamide]; N,N'- (dithiodi-2,l-phenylene)bis[l-(3-methylbutyl)-cyclopentanecarb-oxamide]; N,N'-(dithiodi- 2, 1 -phenylene)bis[ 1 -(3 -methylbutyl)-cyclohexanecarbo-xamide] ; N,N'-(dithiodi-2, 1 - phenylene)bis[ 1 -
  • nxrv is an integer selected from 0 through 5;
  • R ⁇ rv- ⁇ is selected from the group consisting of haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkoxyalkyl, and haloalkenyloxyalkyl;
  • Xxrv is selected from the group consisting of O, H, F, S, S(O),NH, N(OH), N(alkyl), and N(alkoxy);
  • R ⁇ rv-i6 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, aryloxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkenyloxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, aralkoxyalkyl, heteroaralkoxyalkyl, alkylsulfinylalkyl, alkyls
  • the CETP inhibitor of formula XIV is selected from the group consisting of 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxyphenpxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroeth- oxy)-phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- iso ⁇ ropylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3 -(1,1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 -cyclopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1,2,2- tefrafluoroethoxy)
  • nxv is 1 or 2;
  • Axv and Qxv are independently selected from the group consisting -CH 2 (CR ⁇ v- 37 Rxv- 3 8)vXi-(CR ⁇ v-33R ⁇ v-34)uxv-T ⁇ v-(CR ⁇ v-35R ⁇ v-36)wXVH, a radical represented by formula AQ-1
  • AQ-2 provided that one of Axv and Qxv must be AQ-1 and that one of Axv and Qxv must be selected from the group consisting of AQ-2 and -CH 2 (CR ⁇ v-37R ⁇ v-3s)vxv-(CR ⁇ v-33R ⁇ v- 34 ) uX v-T ⁇ v-(CR ⁇ v- 35 R ⁇ v- 36 ) w xv-H;
  • Vxv is an integer selected from 0 through 1 provided that vxv is 1 when any one of R ⁇ v-33, R ⁇ v-34, R ⁇ v-35, and R ⁇ v-36 is aryl or heteroaryl;
  • uxv and Wxv are integers independently selected from 0 through 6; D ⁇ v-1, D ⁇ v -2
  • D ⁇ v- ⁇ , D ⁇ v-2, J ⁇ v- ⁇ , J ⁇ v-2, and K ⁇ v- ⁇ must be a covalent bond when two of D ⁇ v- ⁇ » D ⁇ v- 2 , J ⁇ v- ⁇ , J ⁇ v-2, and K ⁇ v- ⁇ are O and S, and no more than four of D ⁇ v- ⁇ , D ⁇ v -2 , J ⁇ v- ⁇ , Jxv- B ⁇ v- ⁇ , B ⁇ v-2, D ⁇ v- 3 , D ⁇ v-4, J ⁇ v-3, J ⁇ v-4, and K ⁇ v-2 are independently selected from the group consisting of C, C(R ⁇ v-3 0 ), N, O, S and a covalent bond with the provisos that no more than 5 of B ⁇ v- ⁇ , B XV -2, D ⁇ v-3, D ⁇ v- 4 , J ⁇ v-3, J ⁇ v-4, and K ⁇ v-2 are a covalent bond, no more than two of B ⁇ v- ⁇ , B ⁇ v- 2 , D
  • R ⁇ v- 33 , R ⁇ v-34, R ⁇ v-3 5 , and R ⁇ v-36 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrido, carboxy, heteroaralkylthio, heteroaralkoxy, cycloalkylamino, acylalkyl, acylalkoxy, aroylalkoxy, heterocyclyloxy, aralkylaryl, aralkyl, aralkenyl, aralkynyl, heterocyclyl, perhaloaralkyl, aralkylsulfonyl, aralkylsulfonylalkyl, aralkylsulfinyl, aralkylsulfinylalkyl, halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkenyl, cycloalkylsulfinyl, cycloalkylsulfinylalkyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, cycloal
  • the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula XV selected from the group consisting of 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl] (cyclohexylmethyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3- ethylphenoxy)phenyl] (cyclopentylmethyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(4- chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl](cyclopropylmethyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3- [[3 -(4-chloro-3 -ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [(3
  • CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are (R)-chiral halogenated 1-substituted amino-(n+l)-alkanols represented by formula XVI XIV and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; wherein n ⁇ v ⁇ is an integer selected from 1 through 4; R ⁇ v ⁇ - ⁇ is selected from the group consisting of haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkoxymethyl, and haloalkenyloxymethyl; provided that R ⁇ v-n has a higher Cahn- Ingold-Prelog stereochemical system ranking than both R ⁇ v ⁇ -2 and (CHR ⁇ v ⁇ - 3 ) n - N(A ⁇ v ⁇ )Qxv ⁇ 5 wherein A XV ⁇ is formula XVI-(II) represented by
  • XVI-(II), and Q is formula XVI-(III) represented by R ⁇ v ⁇ -i 6 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, alkyl, acyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, trialkylsilyl, and a spacer selected from the group consisting of a covalent single bond and a linear spacer moiety having a chain length of 1 to 4 atoms linked to the point of bonding of any aromatic substituent selected from the group consisting of R ⁇ v ⁇ -4 , R ⁇ v ⁇ - 8, R ⁇ v ⁇ -9, and R ⁇ v ⁇ - 13 to form a heterocyclyl ring having from 5 through 10 contiguous members; D ⁇ v ⁇ - ⁇ , D ⁇ v ⁇ -2, Jxvi-i, J ⁇ v ⁇ -2 and KXVM are independently selected from the group consisting of C, N, O, S and covalent bond with the provisos that no more than one of D ⁇ v ⁇ - i, D ⁇ v ⁇ -2 , J ⁇ v ⁇ - ⁇ ,
  • R ⁇ v ⁇ -i4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, hydroxy, cyano, hydroxyalkyl, acyl, alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxyalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, haloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, monocarboalkoxyalkyl, monocyanoalkyl, dicyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, carboalkoxy, carboxamide, and carboxamidoalkyl;
  • Z ⁇ v ⁇ is selected from a group consisting of a covalent single bond, (C(R ⁇ v ⁇ - ⁇ s) 2 ) q , wherein q is an integer selected from 1 and 2, and (CH(R ⁇ )
  • R ⁇ v ⁇ -i5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, cyano, hydroxyalkyl, acyl, alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxyalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, haloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, monocarboalkoxyalkyl, monocyanoalkyl, dicyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, carboal
  • the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula XVI selected from the group consisting of (2R)-3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)pheny ⁇ ][[3- (1,1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3- isopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-cyclopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroeth
  • a X V II is an aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted with up to five identical or different substituents in the form of a halogen, nitro, hydroxyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy or a straight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, hydroxyalkyl or alkoxy containing up to 7 carbon atoms each, or in the form of a group according to the formula --NRXVIMRXVII-S; R ⁇ v ⁇ -4 and R ⁇ v ⁇ -5 each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen, phenyl or a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms; D ⁇ v ⁇ is an aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted with a phenyl, nifro, halogen, trifluoromethyl or trifluoromethoxy, or a radical of R ⁇ v
  • R ⁇ v ⁇ -6, R ⁇ v ⁇ -7, and R ⁇ v ⁇ - ⁇ o each represent independently for each occurrence cycloalkyl containing 3 to 6 carbon atoms, or an aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atom or a 5- to 7-membered, optionally benzo-condensed, saturated or unsaturated, mono-, bi- or tricyclic heterocycle containing up to 4 heteroatomsselected from the group consisting of S, N and O; wherein the rings are optionally substituted, in the case of the nitrogen- containing rings also via the N function, with up to five identical or different substituents in the form of a halogen, trifluoromethyl, mfro, hydroxyl, cyano, carboxyl, trifluoromethoxy, a straight-chain or branched acyl
  • R ⁇ v ⁇ -14 and R ⁇ v ⁇ - ⁇ 5 each represent independently for each occurrence R ⁇ v ⁇ - 14 and R ⁇ v ⁇ -5 as defined above
  • R ⁇ v ⁇ - 6 and/or R ⁇ v ⁇ -7 each represent independently for each occurrence radical of R ⁇ v ⁇ -8 is hydrogen or halogen
  • R ⁇ v ⁇ - 9 ia hydrogen, halogen, azido, trifluoromethyl, hydroxyl, trifluoromethoxy, a straight-chain or branched alkoxy or alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms each, or a radical according to the formula NR ⁇ v ⁇ -i6R ⁇ v ⁇ -i7
  • RX.v ⁇ -i ⁇ and R ⁇ v ⁇ -17 each represent independently for each occurrence R ⁇ vn- 4 and R ⁇ v ⁇ -5 as defined above
  • R ⁇ v ⁇ -8 and R ⁇ v ⁇ -9 together form a radical
  • Axvni is phenyl optionally substituted with up to two identical or different substituents in the form of halogen, trifluoromethyl or a sfraight-chain or branched alkyl or alkoxy containing up to three carbon atoms;
  • Dxvm is -C(R ⁇ v ⁇ -5)(R ⁇ v ⁇ -6)(R ⁇ v ⁇ -7), R ⁇ v ⁇ -7) or -CH 2 -O-CH -;
  • R ⁇ vm-5 is hydrogen and R ⁇ vn- 6 is halogen or hydrogen; or
  • R ⁇ v ⁇ -5 and R ⁇ v ⁇ -6 are hydrogen;
  • R ⁇ v-111- 7 and R ⁇ v ⁇ -8 each represent independently phenyl, naphthyl, benzothiazolyl, quinolinyl, pyrimidyl or pyridyl with up to four identical or different substituents in the form
  • R ⁇ vm-9 and R ⁇ vm-10 each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen or a straight-chained or branched alkyl of up to three carbon atoms;
  • E ⁇ v ⁇ represents independently for each occurrence cycloalkyl of from three to six carbon atoms or a straight-chained or branched alkyl of up to eight carbon atoms;
  • R ⁇ v ⁇ -1 is hydroxy;
  • R ⁇ v ⁇ -2 is hydrogen or methyl;
  • R ⁇ v ⁇ - 3 and R ⁇ v ⁇ -4 represent independently for each occurrence straight-chained or branched alkyl of up to three carbon atoms; or
  • R. ⁇ v ⁇ -3 and R ⁇ v ⁇ - 4 taken together form an alkenylene made up of between two and four carbon atoms.
  • AUC is the most reliable measure of bioavailability. It is directly proportional to the total amount of unchanged drug that reaches the systemic circulation. For an accurate measurement, blood must be sampled frequently over a long enough time to observe virtually complete drug elimination. Drug products may be considered bioequivalent in extent and rate of abso ⁇ tion if their plasma-level curves are essentially superimposable.
  • Combination Therapy One aspect of the present invention relates to combination therapy. This type of therapy is advantageous because the co-administration of active ingredients achieves a therapeutic effect that is greater than the therapeutic effect achieved by administration of only a single therapeutic agent. In a preferred embodiment, the co-administration of two or more therapeutic agents achieves a synergistic effect, i.e., a therapeutic affect that is greater than the sum of the therapeutic effects of the individual components of the combination.
  • the active ingredients that comprise a combination therapy may be administered together via a single dosage form or by separate administration of each active agent, hi certain embodiments, the first and second therapeutic agents are administered in a single dosage form.
  • the agents may be formulated into a single tablet, pill, capsule, or solution for parenteral administration and the like.
  • the first therapeutic agent and the second therapeutic agents may be admimstered as separate compositions, e.g., as separate tablets or solutions.
  • the first active agent may be administered at the same time as the second active agent or the first active agent may be admimstered intermittently with the second active agent.
  • the length of time between administration of the first and second therapeutic agent may be adjusted to achieve the desired therapeutic effect.
  • the second therapeutic agent may be administered only a few minutes (e.g., 1, 2, 5, 10, 30, or 60 min) after administration of the first therapeutic agent.
  • the second therapeutic agent may be administered several hours (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 24, or 36 hr) after administration of the first therapeutic agent.
  • the second therapeutic agent may be administered at 2 hours and then again at 10 hours following administration of the first therapeutic agent.
  • the therapeutic effects of each active ingredient overlap for at least a portion of the duration of each therapeutic agent so that the overall therapeutic effect of the combination therapy is attributable in part to the combined or synergistic effects of the combination therapy.
  • the dosage of the active agents will generally be dependent upon a number of factors including pharmacodynamic characteristics of each agent of the combination, mode and route of administration of active agent(s), the health of the patient being freated, the extent of treatment desired, the nature and kind of concurrent therapy, if any, and the frequency of treatment and the nature of the effect desired.
  • dosage ranges of the active agents often range from about 0.001 to about 250 mg/kg body weight per day. For a normal adult having a body weight of about 70 kg, a dosage in the range of from about 0.1 to about 25 mg/kg body weight is typically preferred. However, some variability in this general dosage range may be required depending upon the age and weight of the subject being treated, the intended route of administration, the particular agent being administered and the like.
  • the potency of each agent and the interactive effects achieved using them together must be considered.
  • the determination of dosage ranges and optimal dosages for a particular mammal is also well within the ability of one of ordinary skill in the art having the benefit of the instant disclosure.
  • the ratio of the first active agent to second active agent is 30:1, 20:1, 15:1, 10:1, 9:1, 8:1, 7:1, 6:1, or 5:1.
  • the ratio of the first active agent to the second active agent is 4:1, 3:1, 2:1, 1:1, 1:2, 1:3, or 1 :4. In certain embodiments, it may be advantageous for the pharmaceutical combination to have a relatively large amount of the second component compared to the first component, hi certain instances, the ratio of the second active agent to the first active agent is 30:1, 20:1, 15:1, 10:1, 9:1, 8:1, 7:1, 6:1, or 5:1.
  • compositions comprising any of the above-identified combinations of first therapeutic agent and second therapeutic agent may be admimstered in divided doses 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or more times per day or in a form that will provide a rate of release effective to attain the desired results, hi a preferred embodiment, the dosage form contains both the first and second active agents. In a more preferred embodiment, the dosage form only has to be admimstered one time per day and the dosage form contains both the first and second active agents.
  • a formulation intended for oral admimsfration to humans may contain from 0.1 mg to 5 g of the first therapeutic agent and 0.1 mg to 5 g of the second therapeutic agent, both of which are compounded with an appropriate and convenient amount of carrier material varying from about 5 to about 95 percent of the total composition.
  • Unit dosages will generally contain between from about 0.5 mg to about 1500 mg of the first therapeutic agent and 0.5 mg to about 1500 mg of the second therapeutic agent.
  • the dosage comprises 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 200 mg, 300 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, 800 mg, or 1000 mg, etc., up to 1500 mg of the first therapeutic agent.
  • the dosage comprises 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 200 mg, 300 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, 800 mg, or 1000 mg, etc., up to 1500 mg of the second therapeutic agent.
  • the optimal ratios of the first and second therapeutic agent can be determined by standard assays known in the art. Application of an equieffective dose substitution model and a curvilinear regression analysis utilizing all the data for the individual compounds and various dose ratios for the combinations can be used to establish the existence of unexpectedly enhanced antihypertensive, antihyperlipidemic, or other related cardiac activity of combinations of active agents, i.e., the resulting activity is greater than the activity expected from the sum of the activities of the individual components.
  • the toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD 50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED 50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population).
  • the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD 5 o/ED 5 o.
  • Compounds wliich exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred.
  • the data obtained from these cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans.
  • the dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED 50 with little or no toxicity.
  • the dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
  • a dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC 50 (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of RT production from infected cells compared to untreated control as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans.
  • Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC). Synersism
  • HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
  • a synergistic effect permits the effective freatment of a disease using lower amounts (doses) of either individual therapy.
  • the lower doses result in lower toxicity without reduced efficacy, hi addition, a synergistic effect can result in improved efficacy, e.g., improved antiviral activity.
  • synergy may result in an improved avoidance or reduction of disease as compared to any single therapy.
  • Combination therapy often allows for the use of lower doses of the first therapeutic or the second therapeutic agent (referred to as "apparent one-way synergy" herein), or lower doses of both therapeutic agents (referred to as "two-way synergy” herein) than would normally be required when either drug is used alone. By using lower amounts of either or both drugs, the side effects associated with them are reduced.
  • the synergism exhibited between the second therapeutic agent and the first therapeutic agent is such that the dosage of the first therapeutic agent would be sub-therapeutic if admimstered without the dosage of the second therapeutic agent
  • the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising an therapeutically effective dose of a first therapeutic agent together with a dose of a second therapeutic agent effective to augment the therapeutic effect of the first therapeutic agent.
  • the synergism exhibited between the second therapeutic agent and the first therapeutic agent is such that the dosage of the second therapeutic agent would be sub-therapeutic if administered without the dosage of the first therapeutic agent.
  • the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising an therapeutically effective dose of a second therapeutic agent together with a dose of a first therapeutic agent effective to augment the therapeutic effect of the second therapeutic agent.
  • the invention is directed in part to synergistic combinations of the first therapeutic agent in an amount sufficient to render a therapeutic effect together with a second therapeutic agent.
  • a therapeutic effect is attained which is at least about 2 (or at least about 4, 6, 8, or 10) times greater than that obtained with the dose of the first therapeutic agent alone
  • the synergistic combination provides a therapeutic effect which is up to about 20, 30 or 40 times greater than that obtained with the dose of first therapeutic agent alone.
  • the synergistic combinations display what is referred to herein as an "apparent one-way synergy", meaning that the dose of second therapeutic agent synergistically potentiates the effect of the first therapeutic agent, but the dose of first therapeutic agent does not appear to significantly potentiate the effect of the second therapeutic agent.
  • the combination of active agents exhibit two-way synergism, meaning that the second therapeutic agent potentiates the effect of the first therapeutic agent, and the first therapeutic agent potentiates the effect of the second therapeutic agent.
  • embodiments of the invention relate to combinations of a second therapeutic agent and a first therapeutic agent where the dose of each drug is reduced due to the synergism between the drugs, and the therapeutic effect derived from the combination of drugs in reduced doses is enhanced.
  • the two-way synergism is not always readily apparent in actual dosages due to the potency ratio of the first therapeutic agent to the second therapeutic agent.
  • two-way synergism can be difficult to detect when one therapeutic agent displays much greater therapeutic potency relative to the other therapeutic agent.
  • the synergistic effects of combination therapy may be evaluated by biological activity assays.
  • the therapeutic agents are be mixed at molar ratios designed to give approximately equipotent therapeutic effects based on the EC 9 0 values.
  • This program evaluates drug interactions by use of the widely accepted method of Chou and Talalay combined with a statistically evaluation using the Monte Carlo statistical package.
  • the data are displayed in several different formats including median- effect and dose-effects plots, isobolograms, and combination index [CI] plots with standard deviations.
  • CI combination index
  • compositions of the Invention relate to a pharmaceutical composition, comprising optically pure (S)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 500 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 250 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 100 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester fransfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an ICso less than about 50 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 25 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 10 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A, CP 532623 , JTT-705, niceritrol, PD 140195, SC-744, SC-794, SC-795, SC-364, SCH 58149, Synthetic Peptide A, torcetrapib, U-106305, wiedendiol-A, wiedendiol-B, WRMWY, SCH-50678, puupenhenone triacetate, puupenhenone, avarol, aureol, illimaquinone, spongiatriol, spongiadiol, sulfiricin, compounds 100-203, compound of formula I-XVIII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
  • said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, C
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is JTT-705, SC-795, torcetrapib, compounds 177-181, compounds 186-203, compound of formula IV, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
  • said present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is SC-795 or torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of either of them.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
  • the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned pharmaceutical compositions, wherein said optically pure (S)-amlodipine is optically pure ( ⁇ S)-amlodipine malate, or a polymo ⁇ h, pseudopolymo ⁇ h or solvate thereof.
  • Another aspect of the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition consisting essentially of optically pure (S)-amlodipine, a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC 5 Q less than about 500 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 250 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 100 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 50 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 25 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 10 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A, CP 532623 , JTT-705, nicerifrol, PD 140195, SC-744, SC-794, SC-795, SC-364, SCH 58149, Synthetic Peptide A, torcetrapib, U-106305, wiedendiol-A, wiedendiol-B, WRMWY, SCH-50678, puupenhenone triacetate, puupenhenone, avarol, aureol, illimaquinone, spongiatriol, spongiadiol, sulfiricin, compounds 100-203, compound of formula I-XVIII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
  • said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, C
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is JTT-705, SC-795, torcetrapib, compounds 177-181, compounds 186-203, compound of formula IV, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is SC-795 or torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of either of them.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof. h certain embodiments, the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned pharmaceutical compositions, wherein said optically pure (S)-amlodipine is optically pure ( ⁇ S)-amlodipine malate, or a polymo ⁇ h, pseudopolymo ⁇ h or solvate thereof.
  • Another aspect of the present invention relates to a method of treating a patient suffering from a medical condition selected from the group consisting of hypertension, congestive heart failure, angina, hyperlipidemia, coronary artery disease, atherosclerosis, congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, arrhythmia, artheroscierosis, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic cardiac myopathy, renal insufficiency, peripheral vascular disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, cognitive dysfunction, stroke, and headache; comprising the step of: co-administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of optically pure ( ⁇ S)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor.
  • a medical condition selected from the group consisting of hypertension, congestive heart failure, angina, hyperlipidemia, coronary artery disease, atherosclerosis, congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, arrhythmia, artheroscierosis, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic cardiac my
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 500 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 250 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 100 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester fransfer protein.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 50 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 25 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC 50 less than about 10 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester fransfer protein.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A, CP 532623 , JTT-705, niceritrol, PD 140195, SC-744, SC- 794, SC-795, SC-364, SCH 58149, Synthetic Peptide A, torcetrapib, U-106305, wiedendiol-A, wiedendiol-B, WRMWY, SCH-50678, puupenhenone triacetate, puupenhenone, avarol, aureol, illimaquinone, spongiatriol, spongiadiol, sulfiricin, compounds 100-203, compound of formula I-XVIII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
  • said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, C
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is JTT-705, SC-795, torcetrapib, compounds 177-181, compounds 186-203, compound of formula IV, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is SC-795 or torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of either of them.
  • the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl fransfer protein inhibitor is torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
  • the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned methods, wherein said optically pure S)-amlodipine is optically pure (S)-amlodipine malate, or a polymo ⁇ h, pseudopolymo ⁇ h or solvate thereof.
  • the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned methods, wherein said medical condition is hypertension, congestive heart failure, angina, hyperlipidemia, coronary artery disease, atherosclerosis, or myocardial infarction.
  • the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned methods, wherein said medical condition is hypertension or hyperlipidemia. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned methods, wherein said medical condition is hypertension.
  • Immediate/Sustained Release Combination Therapy Dosase Forms The combination therapy may be formulated in an immediate release dosage form or a sustained release dosage form. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to immediate release dosage forms of the first and second therapeutic agents. An immediate release dosage form may be formulated as a tablet or multiparticulate which may be encapsulated. Other immediate release dosage forms known in the art can be employed. In certain embodiments, the combination of therapeutic agents may be formulated to provide for an increased duration (sustained release) of therapeutic action.
  • the combination therapy can be formulated to delivery the therapeutic agents at the same time or at separate times.
  • the first and second therapeutic agents are administered via an oral solid dosage form that mcludes a sustained release carrier causing the sustained release of the first therapeutic agent, or both the first therapeutic agent and the second therapeutic agent when the dosage form contacts gastrointestinal fluid.
  • the sustained release dosage form may comprise a plurality of substrates which include the drugs.
  • the subsfrates may comprise matrix spheroids or may comprise inert pharmaceutically acceptable beads which are coated with the drugs.
  • the coated beads are then preferably overcoated with a sustained release coating comprising the sustained release carrier.
  • the matrix spheroid may include the sustained release carrier in the matrix itself; or the matrix may comprise a normal release matrix containing the drugs, the matrix having a coating applied thereon which comprises the sustained release carrier.
  • the oral solid dosage form comprises a tablet core containing the drugs within a normal release matrix, with the tablet core being coated with a sustained release coating comprising the sustained release carrier.
  • the tablet contains the drugs within a sustained release matrix comprising the sustained release carrier, hi additional embodiments, the tablet contains the first therapeutic agent within a sustained release matrix and the second therapeutic agent coated into the tablet as an immediate release layer.
  • sustained release is defined for pu ⁇ oses of the present invention as the release of the therapeutic agent from the formulation at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations (levels) are maintained within the therapeutic range (above the minimum effective hypertensive or hyperlipidemic concenfration or "MEAC") but below toxic levels over a period of time of about 12 hours or longer.
  • the first and second therapeutic agents can be formulated as a controlled or sustained release oral formulation in any suitable tablet, coated tablet or multiparticulate formulation known to those skilled in the art.
  • the sustained release dosage form may optionally include a sustained released carrier which is inco ⁇ orated into a matrix along with the active agents, or which is applied as a sustained release coating.
  • the sustained release dosage form may include the first therapeutic agent in sustained release form and second therapeutic agent in the sustained release form or in immediate release form.
  • the first therapeutic agent may be inco ⁇ orated into the sustained release matrix along with the second therapeutic agent; inco ⁇ orated into the sustained release coating; inco ⁇ orated as a separated sustained release layer or immediate release layer; or may be inco ⁇ orated as a powder, granulation, etc., in a gelatin capsule with the substrates of the present invention.
  • the sustained release dosage form may have the first therapeutic agent in the sustained release form and the second therapeutic agent in the sustained release form or immediate release form.
  • An oral dosage form according to the invention may be provided as, for example, granules, spheroids, beads, pellets (hereinafter collectively referred to as "multiparticulates") and/or particles.
  • An amount of the multiparticulates which is effective to provide the desired dose of the therapeutic agents over time may be placed in a capsule or may be inco ⁇ orated in any other suitable oral solid form.
  • the sustained release dosage form comprises such particles containing or comprising the active ingredient, wherein the particles have diameter from about 0.1 mm to about 2.5 mm, preferably from about 0.5 mm to about 2 mm.
  • the particles comprise normal release matrixes containing the first therapeutic agent with the second therapeutic agent.
  • the first therapeutic agent may be included in separate normal release matrix particles, or may be co-administered in a different immediate release composition which is either enveloped within a gelatin capsule or is administered separately.
  • the particles comprise inert beads which are coated with the second therapeutic agent with the first therapeutic agents.
  • a coating comprising the sustained release carrier is applied onto the beads as an overcoat.
  • the particles are preferably film coated with a material that permits release of the active agents at a sustained rate in an aqueous medium. The film coat is chosen so as to achieve, in combination with the other stated properties, a desired in vitro release rate.
  • the sustained release coating formulations of the present invention should be capable of producing a strong, continuous film that is smooth and elegant, capable of supporting pigments and other coating additives, non-toxic, inert, and tack-free.
  • Coatings The dosage forms of the present invention may optionally be coated with one or more materials suitable for the regulation of release or for the protection of the formulation. In one embodiment, coatings are provided to permit either pH-dependent or pH- independent release, e.g., when exposed to gastrointestinal fluid.
  • a pH-dependent coating serves to release the first active agent, second active agent, or both in the desired areas of the gastro-intestinal (GI) tract, e.g., the stomach or small intestine, such that an abso ⁇ tion profile is provided which is capable of providing at least about twelve hours and preferably up to twenty-four hours of therapeutic benefit to a patient.
  • GI gastro-intestinal
  • the coating is designed to achieve optimal release regardless of pH-changes in the environmental fluid, e.g., the GI tract.
  • compositions wliich release a portion of the dose in one desired area of the GI tract, e.g., the stomach, and release the remainder of the dose in another area of the GI tract, e.g., the small intestine.
  • the first therapeutic agent is released in one area of the GI fract and the second therapeutic agent is released in a second area of the GI tract.
  • the first and second therapeutic agents are released in nearly equal amounts at the same location in the GI tract.
  • Formulations according to the invention that utilize pH-dependent coatings to obtain formulations may also impart a repeat-action effect whereby unprotected drug is coated over the enteric coat and is released in the stomach, while the remainder, being protected by the enteric coating, is released further down the gastrointestinal tract.
  • Coatings which are pH-dependent may be used in accordance with the present invention include shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP), polyvinyl acetate phthalate (PVAP), hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, and methacrylic acid ester copolymers, zein, and the like.
  • one aspect of the present invention relates to a formulation wherem the first therapeutic agent is coated over the enteric coat and released into the stomach while the second therapeutic agent is protected by the enteric coating and is released further down the GI fract.
  • one aspect of the present invention relates to a formulation wherein the second therapeutic agent is coated over the enteric coat and released into the stomach while the first therapeutic agent is protected by the enteric coating and is released further down the GI tract.
  • the substrate e.g., tablet core bead, matrix particle
  • the substrate containing the first therapeutic agent (with or without the second therapeutic agent) is coated with a hydrophobic material selected from (i) an alkylcellulose; (ii) an acrylic polymer; or (iii) mixtures thereof.
  • the coating may be applied in the form of an organic or aqueous solution or dispersion.
  • the coating may be applied to obtain a weight gain from about 2 to about 25% of the substrate in order to obtain a desired sustained release profile.
  • the invention relates to instances wherein the subsfrate (e.g., tablet core bead, matrix particle) containing the second therapeutic agent (with or without the first therapeutic agent) is coated with a hydrophobic material.
  • the subsfrate e.g., tablet core bead, matrix particle
  • the second therapeutic agent with or without the first therapeutic agent
  • Such formulations are described, e.g., in detail in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,273,760 and 5,286,493.
  • Other examples of sustained release formulations and coatings which may be used in accordance with the present invention include U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,324,351; 5,356,467, and 5,472,712.
  • Alkylcellulose Polymers Cellulosic materials and polymers, including alkylcelluloses, provide hydrophobic materials well suited for coating the formulations according to the invention.
  • one preferred alkylcellulosic polymer is ethylcellulose, although the artisan will appreciate that other cellulose and/or alkylcellulose polymers may be readily employed, singly or in any combination, as all or part of a hydrophobic coating.
  • One commercially-available aqueous dispersion of ethylcellulose is Aquacoat® (FMC Co ⁇ ., Philadelphia, Pa., U.S.A.).
  • Aquacoat® is prepared by dissolving the ethylcellulose in a water-immiscible organic solvent and then emulsifying the same in water in the presence of a surfactant and a stabilizer. After homogenization to generate submicron droplets, the organic solvent is evaporated under vacuum to form a pseudolatex. The plasticizer is not inco ⁇ orated in the pseudolatex during the manufacturing phase. Thus, prior to using the same as a coating, it is necessary to intimately mix the Aquacoat® with a suitable plasticizer prior to use.
  • Surelease® Colorcon, Inc., West Point, Pa., U.S.A.
  • This product is prepared by inco ⁇ orating plasticizer into the dispersion during the manufacturing process.
  • a hot melt of a polymer, plasticizer (dibutyl sebacate), and stabilizer (oleic acid) is prepared as a homogeneous mixture, which is then diluted with an alkaline solution to obtain an aqueous dispersion which can be applied directly onto substrates.
  • the hydrophobic material comprising the controlled release coating is a pharmaceutically acceptable acrylic polymer, including but not limited to acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxyethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), methacrylic acid alkylamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polymethacrylate, poly(methyl methacrylate) copolymer, polyacrylamide, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride), and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers.
  • acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers including but not limited to acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxyethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic
  • the acrylic polymer is comprised of one or more ammonio methacrylate copolymers.
  • Ammonio methacrylate copolymers are well known in the art, and are copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic acid esters with a low content of quaternary ammonium groups. In order to obtain a desirable dissolution profile, it may be necessary to inco ⁇ orate in a coating two or more ammonio methacrylate copolymers having differing physical properties, such as different molar ratios of the quaternary ammonium groups to the neutral (meth)acrylic esters. Certain methacrylic acid ester-type polymers are useful for preparing pH-dependent coatings which may be used in accordance with the present invention.
  • Eudragit® E is an example of a methacrylic acid copolymer which swells and dissolves in acidic media.
  • Eudragit® L is a methacrylic acid copolymer which does not swell at about pH ⁇ 5.7 and is soluble at about pH>6.
  • Eudragit® S does not swell at about pH ⁇ 6.5 and is soluble at about pH>7.
  • Eudragit® RL and Eudragit® RS are water swellable, and the amount of water absorbed by these polymers is pH-dependent, however, dosage forms coated with Eudragit® RL and RS are pH-independent.
  • the acrylic coating comprises a mixture of two acrylic resin lacquers commercially available from Rohm Pharma under the Tradenames Eudragit® RL30D and Eudragit® RS30D, respectively.
  • Eudragit® RL30D and Eudragit® RS30D are copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters with a low content of quaternary ammonium groups, the molar ratio of ammonium groups to the remaining neutral (meth)acrylic esters being 1 :20 in Eudragit® RL30D and 1 :40 in Eudragit® RS30D.
  • the mean molecular weight is about 150,000.
  • the code designations RL (high permeability) and RS (low permeability) refer to the permeability properties of these agents.
  • Eudragit® RL/RS mixtures are insoluble in water and in digestive fluids. However, coatings formed from the same are swellable and permeable in aqueous solutions and digestive fluids.
  • the Eudragit® RL/RS dispersions of the present invention may be mixed together in any desired ratio in order to ultimately obtain a sustained release formulation having a desirable dissolution profile. Desirable sustained release formulations may be obtained, for instance, from a retardant coating derived from 100% Eudragit® RL, 50% Eudragit® RL and 50% Eudragit® RS, and 10% Eudragit® RL:Eudragit® 90% RS. Of course, one skilled in the art will recognize that other acrylic polymers may also be used, such as, for example, Eudragit® L.
  • Plasticizers In embodiments of the present invention where the coating comprises an aqueous dispersion of a hydrophobic material, the inclusion of an effective amount of a plasticizer in the aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material will further improve the physical properties of the sustained release coating. For example, because ethylcellulose has a relatively high glass transition temperature and does not form flexible films under normal coating conditions, it is preferable to inco ⁇ orate a plasticizer into an ethylcellulose coating containing sustained release coating before using the same as a coating material. Generally, the amount of plasticizer included in a coating solution is based on the concentration of the film-former, e.g., most often from about 1 to about 50 percent by weight of the film-former.
  • plasticizers for ethylcellulose include water insoluble plasticizers such as dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate, and triacetin, although it is possible that other water-insoluble plasticizers (such as acetylated monoglycerides, phthalate esters, castor oil, etc.) maybe used.
  • Triethyl citrate is an especially preferred plasticizer for the aqueous dispersions of ethyl cellulose of the present invention.
  • plasticizers for the acrylic polymers of the present invention include, but are not limited to citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate NF XVI, tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, and possibly 1,2-propylene glycol.
  • Other plasticizers which have proved to be suitable for enhancing the elasticity of the films formed from acrylic films such as Eudragit® RL/RS lacquer solutions include polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil, and triacetin.
  • Triethyl citrate is an especially preferred plasticizer for the aqueous dispersions of ethyl cellulose of the present invention.
  • talc reduces the tendency of the aqueous dispersion to stick during processing, and acts as a polishing agent.
  • the stabilized controlled release bead formulations of the present invention slowly release the therapeutically active agent, e.g., when ingested and exposed to gastric fluids, and then to intestinal fluids.
  • the controlled release profile of the formulations of the invention can be altered, for example, by varying the amount of overcoating with the aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material, altering the manner in which the plasticizer is added to the aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material, by varying the amount of plasticizer relative to hydrophobic material, by the inclusion of additional ingredients or excipients, by altering the method of manufacture, etc.
  • the dissolution profile of the ultimate product may also be modified, for example, by increasing or decreasing the thickness of the retardant coating.
  • Spheroids or beads coated with a therapeutically active agent are prepared, e.g., by dissolving the therapeutically active agent in water and then spraying the solution onto a substrate, for example, nu pariel 18/20 beads, using a Wuster insert.
  • additional ingredients are also added prior to coating the beads in order to assist the binding of the active agents to the beads, and/or to color the solution, etc.
  • a product which includes hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, etc. with or without colorant e.g., Opadry , commercially available from Colorcon, Inc.
  • the resultant coated substrate in this example beads, may then be optionally overcoated with a barrier agent, to separate the therapeutically active agent from the hydrophobic controlled release coating.
  • a barrier agent is one which comprises hydroxypropylmethylcellulose.
  • any film-former known in the art may be used. It is preferred that the barrier agent does not affect the dissolution rate of the final product.
  • the beads may then be overcoated with an aqueous dispersion of the hydrophobic material.
  • the aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material preferably further includes an effective amount of plasticizer, e.g. triethyl citrate.
  • plasticizer e.g. triethyl citrate.
  • Pre-formulated aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose such as Aquacoat® or Surelease®, may be used.
  • Surelease® it is not necessary to separately add a plasticizer.
  • pre-fonnulated aqueous dispersions of acrylic polymers such as Eudragit® can be used.
  • the coating solutions of the present invention preferably contain, in addition to the film-former, plasticizer, and solvent system (i.e., water), a colorant to provide elegance and product distinction. Color may be added to the solution of the therapeutically active agent instead, or in addition to the aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material.
  • color be added to Aquacoat® via the use of alcohol or propylene glycol based color dispersions, milled aluminum lakes and opacifiers such as titanium dioxide by adding color with shear to water soluble polymer solution and then using low shear to the plasticized Aquacoat®.
  • any suitable method of providing color to the formulations of the present invention may be used.
  • Suitable ingredients for providing color to the formulation when an aqueous dispersion of an acrylic polymer is used include titanium dioxide and color pigments, such as iron oxide pigments. The inco ⁇ oration of pigments, may, however, increase the retard effect of the coating.
  • the plasticized aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material may be applied onto the substrate comprising the therapeutically active agent by spraying using any suitable spray equipment known in the art.
  • a Wurster fluidized-bed system is used in which an air jet, injected from underneath, fluidizes the core material and effects drying while the acrylic polymer coating is sprayed on.
  • a further overcoat of a film-former such as Opadry®, is optionally applied to the beads.
  • This overcoat is provided, if at all, in order to substantially reduce agglomeration of the beads.
  • the release of the therapeutically active agent from the controlled release formulation of the present invention can be further influenced, i.e., adjusted to a desired rate, by the addition of one or more release-modifying agents, or by providing one or more passageways through the coating.
  • the ratio of hydrophobic material to water soluble material is determined by, among other factors, the release rate required and the solubility characteristics of the materials selected.
  • the release-modifying agents which function as pore-formers may be organic or inorganic, and include materials that can be dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use.
  • the pore-formers may comprise one or more hydrophilic materials such as hydroxypropylmethylcellulose.
  • the sustained release coatings of the present invention can also include erosion- promoting agents such as starch and gums.
  • the sustained release coatings of the present invention can also include materials useful for making microporous lamina in the environment of use, such as polycarbonates comprised of linear polyesters of carbonic acid in which carbonate groups reoccur in the polymer chain.
  • the release-modifying agent may also comprise a semi-permeable polymer.
  • the release-modifying agent is selected from hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, lactose, metal stearates, and mixtures of any of the foregoing.
  • the sustained release coatings of the present invention may also include an exit means comprising at least one passageway, orifice, or the like.
  • the passageway may be formed by such methods as those disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,845,770; 3,916,889; 4,063,064; and 4,088,864.
  • the passageway can have any shape such as round, triangular, square, elliptical, irregular, etc.
  • Matrix Bead Formulations In other embodiments of the present invention, the controlled release formulation is achieved via a matrix having a controlled release coating as set forth above.
  • the present invention may also utilize a controlled release matrix that affords in-vitro dissolution rates of the active agent within the preferred ranges and that releases the active agent in a pH- dependent or pH-independent manner.
  • a controlled release matrix that affords in-vitro dissolution rates of the active agent within the preferred ranges and that releases the active agent in a pH- dependent or pH-independent manner.
  • the materials suitable for inclusion in a controlled release matrix will depend on the method used to form the matrix.
  • a matrix in addition to the first active agent and (optionally) the second active agent may include: (1) Hydrophilic and/or hydrophobic materials, such as gums, cellulose ethers, acrylic resins, protein derived materials; the list is not meant to be exclusive, and any pharmaceutically acceptable hydrophobic material or hydrophilic material which is capable of imparting controlled release of the active agent and which melts (or softens to the extent necessary to be extruded) may be used in accordance with the present invention.
  • Hydrophilic and/or hydrophobic materials such as gums, cellulose ethers, acrylic resins, protein derived materials; the list is not meant to be exclusive, and any pharmaceutically acceptable hydrophobic material or hydrophilic material which is capable of imparting controlled release of the active agent and which melts (or softens to the extent necessary to be extruded) may be used in accordance with the present invention.
  • the hydrophobic material is preferably selected from the group consisting of alkylcelluloses, acrylic and methacrylic acid polymers and copolymers, shellac, zein, hydrogenated castor oil, hydrogenated vegetable oil, or mixtures thereof.
  • the hydrophobic material is a pharmaceutically acceptable acrylic polymer, including but not limited to acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxyethyl methacrylates, cynaoethyl methacrylate, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), methacrylic acid alkylamine copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), poly(methacrylic acid)(anhydride), polymethacrylate, polyacrylamide, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride), and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers.
  • acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers including but not limited to acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxyethyl methacrylates, cynaoethyl methacryl
  • the hydrophobic material is selected from materials such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses such as hydroxypropylmethylcellulose and mixtures of the foregoing.
  • Prefe ⁇ ed hydrophobic materials are water-insoluble with more or less pronounced hydrophilic and/or hydrophobic frends.
  • the hydrophobic materials useful in the invention have a melting point from about 30 to about 200 C, preferably from about 45 to about 90 C.
  • the hydrophobic material may comprise natural or synthetic waxes, fatty alcohols (such as lauryl, myristyl, stearyl, cetyl or preferably cetostearyl alcohol), fatty acids, including but not limited to fatty acid esters, fatty acid glycerides (mono-, di-, and tri-glycerides), hydrogenated fats, hydrocarbons, normal waxes, stearic aid, stearyl alcohol and hydrophobic and hydrophilic materials having hydrocarbon backbones.
  • Suitable waxes include, for example, beeswax, glycowax, castor wax and camauba wax.
  • a wax-like substance is defined as any material which is normally solid at room temperature and has a melting point of from about 30 to about 100 C.
  • Suitable hydrophobic materials which may be used in accordance with the present invention include digestible, long chain (C 8 -C50, especially C 12 -C 40 ), substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as fatty acids, fatty alcohols, glyceryl esters of fatty acids, mineral and vegetable oils and natural and synthetic waxes. Hydrocarbons having a melting point of between 25 and 90 C. are preferred.
  • fatty (aliphatic) alcohols are prefe ⁇ ed in certain embodiments.
  • the oral dosage form may contain up to 60% (by weight) of at least one digestible, long chain hydrocarbon.
  • a combination of two or more hydrophobic materials are included in the matrix formulations. If an additional hydrophobic material is included, it may be selected from natural and synthetic waxes, fatty acids, fatty alcohols, and mixtures of the same. Examples include beeswax, camauba wax, stearic acid and stearyl alcohol. This list is not meant to be exclusive.
  • One particular suitable matrix comprises at least one water soluble hydroxyalkyl cellulose, at least one C 12 -C 36 , preferably 4 -C 22 , aliphatic alcohol and, optionally, at least one polyalkylene glycol.
  • the at least one hydroxyalkyl cellulose is preferably a hydroxy ( to C 6 ) alkyl cellulose, such as hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose and, especially, hydroxyethylcellulose.
  • the amount of the at least one hydroxyalkyl cellulose in the present oral dosage form will be determined, inter alia, by the precise rate of release desired for the therapeutic agent.
  • the at least one aliphatic alcohol may be, for example, lauryl alcohol, myristyl alcohol or stearyl alcohol. In certain embodiments of the present oral dosage form, however, the at least one aliphatic alcohol is cetyl alcohol or cetostearyl alcohol.
  • the amount of the at least one aliphatic alcohol in the present oral dosage form will be determined, as above, by the precise rate of release desired for the therapeutic agent. It will also depend on whether at least one polyalkylene glycol is present in or absent from the oral dosage form. In the absence of at least one polyalkylene glycol, the oral dosage form preferably contains between 20% and 50% (by wt) of the at least one aliphatic alcohol. When at least one polyalkylene glycol is present in the oral dosage form, then the combined weight of the at least one aliphatic alcohol and the at least one polyalkylene glycol preferably constitutes between 20% and 50% (by wt) of the total dosage.
  • the ratio of, e.g., the at least one hydroxyalkyl cellulose or acrylic resin to the at least one aliphatic alcohol/polyalkylene glycol determines, to a considerable extent, the release rate of the active agent from the formulation.
  • a ratio of the at least one hydroxyalkyl cellulose to the at least one aliphatic alcohol/polyalkylene glycol of between 1 :2 and 1 :4 is prefe ⁇ ed, with a ratio of between 1 :3 and 1 :4 being particularly prefe ⁇ ed.
  • the at least one polyalkylene glycol may be, for example, polypropylene glycol or, which is prefe ⁇ ed, polyethylene glycol.
  • the number average molecular weight of the at least one polyalkylene glycol is prefe ⁇ ed between 1,000 and 15,000 especially between 1,500 and 12,000.
  • Another suitable controlled release matrix would comprise an alkylcellulose (especially ethyl cellulose), a C 12 to C 36 aliphatic alcohol and, optionally, a polyalkylene glycol.
  • the matrix includes a pharmaceutically acceptable combination of at least two hydrophobic materials, h addition to the above ingredients, a controlled release matrix may also contain suitable quantities of other materials, e.g. diluents, lubricants, binders, granulating aids, colorants, flavorants and glidants that are conventional in the pharmaceutical art.
  • compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the compounds described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, e.g., those targeted for buccal, sublingual, and systemic abso ⁇ tion, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous or epidural injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension, or sustained-release formulation; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment, or a controlled-release patch or spray applied to the skin; (4) infravagi
  • terapéuticaally-effective amount means that amount of a compound, material, or composition comprising a compound of the present invention which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect in at least a sub-population of cells in an animal at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier means a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, manufacturing aid (e.g., lubricant, talc magnesium, calcium or zinc stearate, or steric acid), or solvent encapsulating material, involved in ca ⁇ ying or fransporting the subject compound from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body.
  • manufacturing aid e.g., lubricant, talc magnesium, calcium or zinc stearate, or steric acid
  • solvent encapsulating material involved in ca ⁇ ying or fransporting the subject compound from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body.
  • Each carrier must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient.
  • materials which can serve as pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as com starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, com oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum, such
  • certain embodiments of the present compounds may contain a basic functional group, such as amino or alkylamino, and are, thus, capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable acids.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable salts refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ in the administration vehicle or the dosage form manufacturing process, or by separately reacting a purified compound of the invention in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed during subsequent purification.
  • Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tarfrate, napthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, and laurylsulphonate salts and the like.
  • sulfate bisulfate
  • phosphate nitrate
  • acetate valerate
  • oleate palmitate
  • stearate laurate
  • benzoate lactate
  • phosphate tosylate
  • citrate maleate
  • fumarate succinate
  • tarfrate tarfrate
  • mesylate mesylate
  • glucoheptonate lactobionate
  • laurylsulphonate salts and the like See,
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the subject compounds include the conventional nontoxic salts or quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds, e.g., from non-toxic organic or inorganic acids.
  • such conventional nontoxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloride, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric, and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, palmitic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2- acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isothionic, and the like.
  • the compounds of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable bases.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable salts refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic base addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can likewise be prepared in situ in the administration vehicle or the dosage form manufacturing process, or by separately reacting the purified compound in its free acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine.
  • a suitable base such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine.
  • Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts and the like.
  • Representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al., supra) Wetting agents, emulsifiers and lubricants, such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
  • antioxidants examples include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • water soluble antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like
  • oil-soluble antioxidants such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), le
  • Formulations of the present invention include those suitable for oral, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal and/or parenteral administration.
  • the formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage fo ⁇ n and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy.
  • the amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration.
  • the amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect.
  • a formulation of the present invention comprises an excipient selected from the group consisting of cyclodextrins, celluloses, liposomes, micelle forming agents, e.g., bile acids, and polymeric carriers, e.g., polyesters and polyanhydrides; and a compound of the present invention.
  • an aforementioned formulation renders orally bioavailable a compound of the present invention.
  • Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association a compound of the present invention with the ca ⁇ ier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients.
  • the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a compound of the present invention with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
  • Formulations of the invention suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non- aqueous liquid, or as an oil-in- water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as an active ingredient.
  • lozenges using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth
  • a compound of the present invention may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
  • the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl py ⁇ olidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6)
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise buffering agents.
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-shelled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
  • a tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent.
  • Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • the tablets, and other solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention such as dragees, capsules, pills and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres.
  • compositions may be formulated for rapid release, e.g., freeze-dried. They may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by inco ⁇ orating sterilizing agents in the fo ⁇ n of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use. These compositions may also optionally contain opacifymg agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.
  • the active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral admimsfration of the compounds of the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs.
  • the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, com, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
  • inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol,
  • the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
  • Suspensions in addition to the active compounds, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
  • Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more compounds of the invention with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • Formulations of the present invention which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants.
  • the active compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.
  • the ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound of this invention, excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to a compound of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances.
  • Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
  • Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound of the present invention to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the compound in the proper medium. Abso ⁇ tion enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin.
  • the rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • Ophthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the like, are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
  • compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more compounds of the invention in combination with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain sugars, alcohols, antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.
  • aqueous and nonaqueous carriers examples include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate.
  • polyols such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like
  • vegetable oils such as olive oil
  • injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate.
  • Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
  • These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents.
  • antibacterial and antifungal agents for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions.
  • isotonic agents such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions.
  • prolonged abso ⁇ tion of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents wliich delay abso ⁇ tion such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • the therapeutic agent alone or on combination with other therapeutic agents can be employed in admixtures with conventional excipients, i.e., pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic carrier substances suitable for oral, parenteral, nasal, intravenous, subcutaneous, enteral, or any other suitable mode of administration, known to the art.
  • conventional excipients i.e., pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic carrier substances suitable for oral, parenteral, nasal, intravenous, subcutaneous, enteral, or any other suitable mode of administration, known to the art.
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include but are not limited to water, salt solutions, alcohols, gum arabic, vegetable oils, benzyl alcohols, polyethylene glycols, gelate, carbohydrates such as lactose, amylose or starch, magnesium stearate talc, silicic acid, viscous paraffin, perfume oil, fatty acid monoglycerides and diglycerides, pentaerythritol fatty acid esters, hydroxymethylcellulose, polyvinylpy ⁇ olidone, etc.
  • the pharmaceutical preparations can be sterilized and if desired mixed with auxiliary agents, e.g., lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifiers, salts for influencing osmotic pressure buffers, coloring, flavoring and/or aromatic substances and the like. They can also be combined where desired with other active agents, e.g., other analgesic agents.
  • auxiliary agents e.g., lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifiers, salts for influencing osmotic pressure buffers, coloring, flavoring and/or aromatic substances and the like.
  • auxiliary agents e.g., lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifiers, salts for influencing osmotic pressure buffers, coloring, flavoring and/or aromatic substances and the like.
  • other active agents e.g., other analgesic agents.
  • particularly suitable are oily or
  • compositions intended for oral use may be prepared according to any method known in the art and such compositions may contain one or more agents selected from the group consisting of inert, non-toxic pharmaceutically excipients which are suitable for the manufacture of tablets.
  • excipients include, for example an inert diluent such as lactose; granulating and disintegrating agents such as cornstarch; binding agents such as starch; and lubricating agents such as magnesium stearate.
  • the tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques for elegance or to delay release of the active ingredients.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert diluent.
  • Aqueous suspensions contain the above-identified combination of drugs and that mixture has one or more excipients suitable as suspending agents, for example pharmaceutically acceptable synthetic gums such as hydroxypropylmethylcellulose or natural gums.
  • Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the above-identified combination of drugs in a vegetable oil or mineral oil.
  • the oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax or cetyl alcohol.
  • a syrup, elixir, or the like can be used wherein a sweetened vehicle is employed.
  • Injectable suspensions may also be prepared, in which case appropriate liquid carriers, suspending agents and the like may be employed. It is also possible to freeze-dry the active compounds and use the obtained lyophilized compounds, for example, for the preparation of products for injection.
  • One aspect of combination therapy pertains to a method for providing effective therapeutic treatment in humans, comprising administering an effective or sub-therapeutic amount of a first therapeutic agent; and administering an effective amount of a second therapeutic agent in an amount effective to augment the therapeutic effect provided by said first therapeutic agent.
  • the second therapeutic agent can be admimstered before, simultaneously with, or after admimsfration of the first therapeutic agent, as long as the dosing interval of the second therapeutic agent overlaps with the dosing interval of the first therapeutic agent (or its therapeutic effect).
  • the second therapeutic agent need not be administered in the same dosage form or even by the same route of admimsfration as the first therapeutic agent.
  • the method is directed to the su ⁇ rising synergistic and/or additive benefits obtained in humans, when therapeutically effective levels of a first therapeutic agent have been administered to a human, and, prior to or during the dosage interval for the second therapeutic agent or while the human is experiencing the therapeutic effect, an effective amount of a second therapeutic agent to augment the therapeutic effect of the first therapeutic agent is administered. If the second therapeutic agent is administered prior to the administration of the first therapeutic agent, it is prefe ⁇ ed that the dosage intervals for the two drugs overlap, i.e., such that the therapeutic effect over at least a portion of the dosage interval of the first therapeutic agent is at least partly attributable to the second therapeutic agent.
  • the su ⁇ rising synergistic and/or additive benefits obtained in the patient are achieved when therapeutically effective levels of the second therapeutic agent have been administered to the patient, and, during the dosage interval for the second therapeutic agent or while the patient is experiencing the therapeutic effect by virtue of the administration of a second therapeutic agent, an effective amount of a first therapeutic agent to augment the therapeutic effect of the second therapeutic agent is administered.
  • Another aspect of combination therapy relates to an oral solid dosage form comprising an therapeutically effective amount of a first therapeutic agent together with an amount of a second therapeutic agent or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof which augments the effect of the first therapeutic agent.
  • delayed abso ⁇ tion of a parenterally-administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
  • injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the subject compounds in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissue.
  • the compounds of the present invention When the compounds of the present invention are admimstered as pharmaceuticals, to humans and animals, they can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1 to 99% (more preferably, 10 to 30%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the preparations of the present invention may be given orally, parenterally, topically, or rectally. They are of course given in forms suitable for each administration route. For example, they are admimstered in tablets or capsule form, by injection, inhalation, eye lotion, ointment, suppository, etc. administration by injection, infusion or inhalation; topical by lotion or ointment; and rectal by suppositories. Oral administrations are prefe ⁇ ed.
  • parenteral administration and “administered parenterally” as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, infrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, infraspinal and infrasternal injection and infusion.
  • systemic administration means the admimsfration of a compound, drug or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes, for example, subcutaneous administration.
  • These compounds may be administered to humans and other animals for therapy by any suitable route of administration, including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, infracisternally and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually.
  • the compounds of the present invention which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically-acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods known to those of skill in the art.
  • Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention maybe varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.
  • the selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the particular compound of the present invention employed, or the ester, salt or amide thereof, the route of administration, the time of adminisfration, the rate of excretion or metabolism of the particular compound being employed, the rate and extent of abso ⁇ tion, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compound employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts.
  • a physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition required.
  • a suitable daily dose of a compound of the invention will be that amount of the compound which is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect.
  • Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above.
  • oral, intravenous, intracerebro ventricular and subcutaneous doses of the compounds of this invention for a patient, when used for the indicated analgesic effects will range from about 0.0001 to about 100 mg per kilogram of body weight per day.
  • the effective daily dose of the active compound may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms. Prefe ⁇ ed dosing is one adminisfration per day. While it is possible for a compound of the present invention to be administered alone, it is preferable to administer the compound as a pharmaceutical formulation (composition).
  • the compounds according to the invention may be formulated for admimsfration in any convenient way for use in human or veterinary medicine, by analogy with other pharmaceuticals.
  • the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the subject compounds, as described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin, lungs, or mucous membranes; or (4) intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam; (5) sublingually or buccally; (6)
  • treatment is intended to encompass also prophylaxis, therapy and cure.
  • the patient receiving this freatment is any animal in need, including primates, in particular humans, and other mammals such as equines, cattle, swine and sheep; and poultry and pets in general.
  • the compound of the invention can be administered as such or in admixtures with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and can also be administered in conjunction with antimicrobial agents such as penicillins, cephalosporins, aminoglycosides and glycopeptides.
  • Conjunctive therapy thus includes sequential, simultaneous and separate admimsfration of the active compound in a way that the therapeutical effects of the first administered one is not entirely disappeared when the subsequent is administered.
  • the addition of the active compound of the invention to animal feed is preferably accomplished by preparing an appropriate feed premix containing the active compound in an effective amount and inco ⁇ orating the premix into the complete ration.
  • an intermediate concentrate or feed supplement containing the active ingredient can be blended into the feed.
  • the way in which such feed premixes and complete rations can be prepared and administered are described in reference books (such as "Applied Animal Nutrition", W.H. Freedman and CO., San Francisco, U.S.A., 1969 or “Livestock Feeds and Feeding" O and B books, Corvallis, Ore., U.S.A., 1977).
  • Micelles Recently, the pharmaceutical industry introduced microemulsification technology to improve bioavailability of some lipophilic (water insoluble) pharmaceutical agents.
  • microemulsification provides enhanced bioavailability by preferentially directing abso ⁇ tion to the lymphatic system instead of the circulatory system, which thereby bypasses the liver, and prevents destruction of the compounds in the hepatobiliary circulation.
  • the formulations contain micelles formed from a compound of the present invention and at least one amphiphilic carrier, in which the micelles have an average diameter of less than about 100 nm. More prefe ⁇ ed embodiments provide micelles having an average diameter less than about 50 mn, and even more prefe ⁇ ed embodiments provide micelles having an average diameter less than about 30 nm, or even less than about 20 nm.
  • amphiphilic carriers While all suitable amphiphilic carriers are contemplated, the presently prefe ⁇ ed carriers are generally those that have Generally-Recognized-as-Safe (GRAS) status, and that can both sofubilize the compound of the present invention and microemulsify it at a later stage when the solution comes into a contact with a complex water phase (such as one found in human gastro-intestinal tract).
  • GRAS Generally-Recognized-as-Safe
  • amphiphilic ingredients that satisfy these requirements have HLB (hydrophilic to lipophilic balance) values of 2-20, and their structures contain sfraight chain aliphatic radicals in the range of C-6 to C-20. Examples are polyethylene-glycolized fatty glycerides and polyethylene glycols.
  • Particularly prefe ⁇ ed amphiphilic carriers are saturated and monounsaturated polyethyleneglycolyzed fatty acid glycerides, such as those obtained from fully or partially hydrogenated various vegetable oils.
  • oils may advantageously consist of tri-. di- and mono-fatty acid glycerides and di- and mono-polyethyleneglycol esters of the conesponding fatty acids, with a particularly prefe ⁇ ed fatty acid composition including capric acid 4-10, capric acid 3-9, lauric acid 40-50, myristic acid 14-24, palmitic acid 4-14 and stearic acid 5-15%.
  • amphiphilic carriers include partially esterified sorbitan and/or sorbitol, with saturated or mono-unsaturated fatty acids (SPAN- series) or conesponding ethoxylated analogs (TWEEN-series).
  • Amphiphilic carriers are particularly contemplated, including Gelucire-series, Labrafil, Labrasol, or Lauroglycol (all manufactured and distributed by Gattefosse Co ⁇ oration, Saint Priest, France), PEG-mono-oleate, PEG-di- oleate, PEG-mono-laurate and di-laurate, Lecithin, Polysorbate 80, etc (produced and distributed by a number of companies in USA and worldwide).
  • Hydrophilic polymers suitable for use in the present invention are those which are readily water-soluble, can be covalently attached to a vesicle- forming lipid, and which are tolerated in vivo without toxic effects (i.e., are biocompatible).
  • Suitable polymers include polyethylene glycol (PEG), polylactic (also termed polylactide), polyglycolic acid (also termed polyglycolide), a polylactic-polyglycolic acid copolymer, and polyvinyl alcohol.
  • Prefe ⁇ ed polymers are those having a molecular weight of from about 100 or 120 daltons up to about 5,000 or 10,000 daltons, and more preferably from about 300 daltons to about 5,000 daltons.
  • the polymer is polyethyleneglycol having a molecular weight of from about 100 to about 5,000 daltons, and more preferably having a molecular weight of from about 300 to about 5,000 daltons.
  • the polymer is polyethyleneglycol of 750 daltons (PEG(750)).
  • Polymers may also be defined by the number of monomers therein; a prefe ⁇ ed embodiment of the present invention utilizes polymers of at least about three monomers, such PEG polymers consisting of three monomers (approximately 150 daltons).
  • hydrophilic polymers which may be suitable for use in the present invention include polyvinylpy ⁇ olidone, polymethoxazoline, polyethyloxazoline, polyhydroxypropyl methacrylamide, polymethacrylamide, polydimethylacrylamide, and derivatized celluloses such as hydroxymethylcellulose or hydroxyethylcellulose.
  • a formulation of the present invention comprises a biocompatible polymer selected from the group consisting of polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polyvinyl polymers, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes and co-polymers thereof, celluloses, polypropylene, polyethylenes, polystyrene, polymers of lactic acid and glycolic acid, polyanhydrides, poly(ortho)esters, poly(butic acid), poly(valeric acid), poly(lactide-co- caprolactone), polysaccharides, proteins, polyhyaluronic acids, polycyanoacrylates, and blends, mixtures, or copolymers thereof.
  • a biocompatible polymer selected from the group consisting of polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polyvinyl polymers, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes and
  • Cyclodextrins are cyclic oligosaccharides, consisting of 6, 7 or 8 glucose units, designated by the Greek letter ⁇ , ⁇ ,or ⁇ , respectively. Cyclodextrins with fewer than six glucose units are not known to exist. The glucose units are linked by alpha- 1,4-glucosidic bonds. As a consequence of the chair conformation of the sugar units, all secondary hydroxyl groups (at C-2, C-3) are located on one side of the ring, while all the primary hydroxyl groups at C-6 are situated on the other side. As a result, the external faces are hydrophilic, making the cyclodextrins water-soluble.
  • the cavities of the cyclodextrins are hydrophobic, since they are lined by the hydrogen of atoms C-3 and C-5, and by ether-like oxygens.
  • These matrices allow complexation with a variety of relatively hydrophobic compounds, including, for instance, steroid compounds such as 17. beta. - estradiol (see, e.g., van Uden et al. Plant Cell Tiss. Org. Cult. 38:1-3-113 (1994)).
  • the complexation takes place by Van der Waals interactions and by hydrogen bond fonnation.
  • the physico-chemical properties of the cyclodextrin derivatives depend strongly on the kind and the degree of substitution. For example, their solubility in water ranges from insoluble (e.g., triacetyl-beta-cyclodextrin) to 147% soluble (w/v) (G-2-beta-cyclodextrin). In addition, they are soluble in many organic solvents.
  • the properties of the cyclodextrins enable the confrol over solubility of various formulation components by increasing or decreasing their solubility. Numerous cyclodextrins and methods for their preparation have been described. For example, Parmeter (I), et al. (U.S. Pat.
  • cyclodextrin derivatives with anionic properties carboxylic acids, phosphorous acids, phosphinous acids, phosphonic acids, phosphoric acids, thiophosphonic acids, thiosulphinic acids, and sulfonic acids have been appended to the parent cyclodextrin [see, Parmeter (III), supra]. Furthermore, sulfoalkyl ether cyclodextrin derivatives have been described by Stella, et al. (U.S. Pat. No.
  • Liposomes consist of at least one lipid bilayer membrane enclosing an aqueous internal compartment. Liposomes may be characterized by membrane type and by size. Small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs) have a single membrane and typically range between 0.02 and 0.05 ⁇ m in diameter; large unilamellar vesicles (LUVS) are typically larger than 0.05 ⁇ m Oligolamellar large vesicles and multilamellar vesicles have multiple, usually concentric, membrane layers and are typically larger than 0.1 ⁇ m.
  • SUVs Small unilamellar vesicles
  • LUVS large unilamellar vesicles
  • Oligolamellar large vesicles and multilamellar vesicles have multiple, usually concentric, membrane layers and are typically larger than 0.1 ⁇ m.
  • Liposomes with several nonconcentric membranes i.e., several smaller vesicles contained within a larger vesicle, are termed multivesicular vesicles.
  • One aspect of the present invention relates to formulations comprising liposomes containing a compound of the present invention, where the liposome membrane is formulated to provide a liposome with increased ca ⁇ ying capacity.
  • the compound of the present invention may be contained within, or adsorbed onto, the liposome bilayer of the liposome.
  • the compound of the present invention may be aggregated with a lipid surfactant and carried within the liposome's internal space; in these cases, the liposome membrane is formulated to resist the disruptive effects of the active agent-surfactant aggregate.
  • the lipid bilayer of a liposome contains lipids derivatized with polyethylene glycol (PEG), such that the PEG chains extend from the inner surface of the lipid bilayer into the interior space encapsulated by the liposome, and extend from the exterior of the lipid bilayer into the surrounding environment.
  • Active agents contained within liposomes of the present invention are in solubilized form. Aggregates of surfactant and active agent (such as emulsions or micelles containing the active agent of interest) may be entrapped within the interior space of liposomes according to the present invention.
  • a surfactant acts to disperse and solubilize the active agent, and may be selected from any suitable aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or aromatic surfactant, including but not limited to biocompatible lysophosphatidylcholines (LPCs) of varying chain lengths (for example, from about C 14 to about C 20 ).
  • LPCs lysophosphatidylcholines
  • Polymer-derivatized lipids such as PEG-lipids may also be utilized for micelle formation as they will act to inhibit micelle/membrane fusion, and as the addition of a polymer to surfactant molecules decreases the CMC of the surfactant and aids in micelle formation.
  • Liposomes according to the present invention may be prepared by any of a variety of techniques that are known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No.
  • liposomes of the present invention may be prepared by diffusing a lipid derivatized with a hydrophilic polymer into preformed liposomes, such as by exposing preformed liposomes to micelles composed of lipid-grafted polymers, at lipid concentrations conesponding to the final mole percent of derivatized lipid which is desired in the liposome.
  • Liposomes containing a hydrophilic polymer can also be formed by homogenization, lipid-field hydration, or extrusion techniques, as are known in the art.
  • the active agent is first dispersed by sonication in a lysophosphatidylcholine or other low CMC surfactant (including polymer grafted lipids) that readily solubilizes hydrophobic molecules.
  • Thejesulting micellar suspension of active agent is then used to rehydrate a dried lipid sample that contains a suitable mole percent of polymer-grafted lipid, or cholesterol.
  • the liposomes are prepared to have substantially homogeneous sizes in a selected size range.
  • One effective sizing method involves extruding an aqueous suspension of the liposomes through a series of polycarbonate membranes having a selected uniform pore size; the pore size of the membrane will co ⁇ espond roughly with the largest sizes of liposomes produced by extrusion through that membrane. See e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,737,323 (Apr. 12, 1988).
  • release Modifiers The release characteristics of a formulation of the present invention depend on the encapsulating material, the concenfration of encapsulated drug, and the presence of release modifiers.
  • release can be manipulated to be pH dependent, for example, using a pH sensitive coating that releases only at a low pH, as in the stomach, or a higher pH, as in the intestine.
  • An enteric coating can be used to prevent release from occurring until after passage through the stomach.
  • Multiple coatings or mixtures of cyanamide encapsulated in different materials can be used to obtain an initial release in the stomach, followed by later release in the intestine.
  • Release can also be manipulated by inclusion of salts or pore forming agents, which can increase water uptake or release of drug by diffusion from the capsule.
  • Excipients which modify the solubility of the drug can also be used to control the release rate.
  • Agents which enhance degradation of the matrix or release from the matrix can also be inco ⁇ orated. They can be added to the drug, added as a separate phase (i.e., as particulates), or can be co-dissolved in the polymer phase depending on the compound. In all cases the amount should be between 0.1 and thirty percent (w/w polymer).
  • Types of degradation enhancers include inorganic salts such as ammonium sulfate and ammonium chloride, organic acids such as citric acid, benzoic acid, and ascorbic acid, inorganic bases such as sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, zinc carbonate, and zinc hydroxide, and organic bases such as protamine sulfate, spermine, choline, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine and surfactants such as Tween and Pluronic .
  • Pore forming agents which add microstructure to the matrices i.e., water soluble compounds such as inorganic salts and sugars
  • the range should be between one and thirty percent (w/w polymer).
  • Uptake can also be manipulated by altering residence time of the particles in the gut. This can be achieved, for example, by coating the particle with, or selecting as the encapsulating material, a mucosal adhesive polymer.
  • a mucosal adhesive polymer examples include most polymers with free carboxyl groups, such as chitosan, celluloses, and especially polyacrylates (as used herein, polyacrylates refers to polymers including acrylate groups and modified acrylate groups such as cyanoacrylates and methacrylates).
  • Processes for Preparing Matrix— Based Beads In order to facilitate the preparation of a solid, controlled release, oral dosage form according to this invention, any method of preparing a matrix formulation known to those skilled in the art may be used.
  • inco ⁇ oration in the matrix may be effected, for example, by (a) forming granules comprising at least one water soluble hydroxyalkyl cellulose and the active agent; (b) mixing the hydroxyalkyl cellulose containing granules with at least one C 12 -C 36 aliphatic alcohol; and (c) optionally, compressing and shaping the granules.
  • the granules are formed by wet granulating the hydroxyalkyl cellulose/active agent with water.
  • the amount of water added during tie wet granulation step is preferably between 1.5 and 5 times, especially between 1.75 and 3.5 times, the dry weight of the active agent.
  • a spheronizing agent together with the active ingredient can be spheronized to form spheroids.
  • Microcrystalline cellulose is prefe ⁇ ed.
  • a suitable microcrystalline cellulose is, for example, the material sold as Avicel PH 101 (Trade Mark, FMC Co ⁇ oration).
  • the spheroids may also contain a binder. Suitable binders, such as low viscosity, water soluble polymers, will be well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical art. However, water soluble hydroxy lower alkyl cellulose, such as hydroxypropylcellulose, are prefe ⁇ ed.
  • the spheroids may contain a water insoluble polymer, especially an acrylic polymer, an acrylic copolymer, such as a methacrylic acid-ethyl acrylate copolymer, or ethyl cellulose.
  • the sustained release coating will generally include a hydrophobic material such as (a) a wax, either alone or in admixture with a fatty alcohol; or (b) shellac or zein.
  • Melt Extrusion Matrix Sustained release matrices can also be prepared via melt-granulation or melt- extrusion techniques. Generally, melt-granulation techniques involve melting a normally solid hydrophobic material, e.g.
  • sustained release dosage form a wax, and inco ⁇ orating a powdered drug therein.
  • an additional hydrophobic substance e.g. ethylcellulose or a water-insoluble acrylic polymer
  • sustained release formulations prepared via melt-granulation techniques are found in U.S. Pat. No. 4,861,598.
  • the additional hydrophobic material may comprise one or more water-insoluble wax-like thermoplastic substances possibly mixed with one or more wax-like thermoplastic substances being less hydrophobic than said one or more water-insoluble wax-like substances, rn order to achieve constant release, the individual wax-like substances in the formulation should be substantially non-degradable and insoluble in gastrointestinal fluids during the initial release phases.
  • Useful water-insoluble wax-like substances may be those with a water-solubility that is lower than about 1 :5,000 (w/w).
  • a sustained release matrix may also contain suitable quantities of other materials, e.g., diluents, lubricants, binders, granulating aids, colorants, flavorants and glidants that are conventional in the pharmaceutical art. The quantities of these additional materials will be sufficient to provide the desired effect to the desired formulation.
  • a sustained release matrix inco ⁇ orating melt-extruded multiparticulates may also contain suitable quantities of other materials, e.g. diluents, lubricants, binders, granulating aids, colorants, flavorants and glidants that are conventional in the pharmaceutical art in amounts up to about 50% by weight of the particulate if desired.
  • melt Extrusion Multiparticulates The preparation of a suitable melt-extruded matrix according to the present invention may, for example, include the steps of blending the active agent, together with at least one hydrophobic material and preferably the additional hydrophobic material to obtain a homogeneous mixture. The homogeneous mixture is then heated to a temperature sufficient to at least soften the mixture sufficiently to extrude the same. The resulting homogeneous mixture is then extruded to form strands. The extrudate is preferably cooled and cut into multiparticulates by any means known in the art.
  • the strands are cooled and cut into multiparticulates.
  • the multiparticulates are then divided into unit doses.
  • the extrudate preferably has a diameter of from about 0.1 to about 5 mm and provides sustained release of the therapeutically active agent for a time period of from about 8 to about 24 hours.
  • An optional process for preparing the melt extrusions of the present invention includes directly metering into an extruder a hydrophobic material, a therapeutically active agent, and an optional binder; heating the homogenous mixture; extruding the homogenous mixture to thereby form strands; cooling the strands containing the homogeneous mixture; cutting the strands into particles having a size from about 0.1 mm to about 12 mm; and dividing said particles into unit doses, hi this aspect of the invention, a relatively continuous manufacturing procedure is realized.
  • the diameter of the extruder aperture or exit port can also be adjusted to vary the thickness of the extraded strands.
  • the exit part of the extrader need not be round; it can be oblong, rectangular, etc.
  • the exiting strands can be reduced to particles using a hot wire cutter, guillotine, etc.
  • the melt extraded multiparticulate system can be, for example, in the form of granules, spheroids or pellets depending upon the extruder exit orifice.
  • the terms "melt-extruded multiparticulate(s)” and “melt-extruded multiparticulate system(s)” and “melt-extruded particles” shall refer to a plurality of units, preferably within a range of similar size and/or shape and containing one or more active agents and one or more excipients, preferably including a hydrophobic material as described herein.
  • the melt-extruded multiparticulates will be of a range of from about 0.1 to about 12 mm in length and have a diameter of from about 0.1 to about 5 mm.
  • the melt-extruded multiparticulates can be any geometrical shape within this size range.
  • the extradate may simply be cut into desired lengths and divided into unit doses of the therapeutically active agent without the need of a spheronization step.
  • oral dosage forms are prepared to include an effective amount of melt-extruded multiparticulates within a capsule.
  • a plurality of the melt-extruded multiparticulates may be placed in a gelatin capsule in an amount sufficient to provide an effective sustained release dose when ingested and contacted by gastric fluid.
  • a suitable amount of the multiparticulate extrudate is compressed into an oral tablet using conventional tableting equipment using standard techniques. Techniques and compositions for making tablets (compressed and molded), capsules (hard and soft gelatin) and pills are also described in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, (Arthur Osol, editor), 1553-1593 (1980).
  • the extrudate can be shaped into tablets as set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 4,957,681 (Klimesch, et.
  • the sustained release melt-extruded multiparticulate systems or tablets can be coated, or the gelatin capsule can be further coated, with a sustained release coating such as the sustained release coatings described above.
  • a sustained release coating such as the sustained release coatings described above.
  • Such coatings preferably include a sufficient amount of hydrophobic material to obtain a weight gain level from about 2 to about 30 percent, although the overcoat maybe greater depending upon the physical properties of the particular active agent utilized and the desired release rate, among other things.
  • the melt-extruded unit dosage forms of the present invention may further include combinations of melt-extruded multiparticulates containing one or more of the therapeutically active agents disclosed above before being encapsulated.
  • the unit dosage forms can also include an amount of an immediate release therapeutically active agent for prompt therapeutic effect.
  • the immediate release therapeutically active agent may be inco ⁇ orated, e.g., as separate pellets within a gelatin capsule, or may be coated on the surface of the multiparticulates after preparation of the dosage forms (e.g., controlled release coating or matrix-based).
  • the unit dosage forms of the present invention may also contain a combination of controlled release beads and matrix multiparticulates to achieve a desired effect.
  • the sustained release formulations of the present invention preferably slowly release the therapeutically active agent, e.g., when ingested and exposed to gastric fluids, and then to intestinal fluids.
  • the sustained release profile of the melt-extruded formulations of the invention can be altered, for example, by varying the amount of retardant, i.e., hydrophobic material, by varying the amount of plasticizer relative to hydrophobic material, by the inclusion of additional ingredients or excipients, by altering the method of manufacture, etc.
  • the melt extraded material is prepared without the inclusion of the therapeutically active agent, which is added thereafter to the extradate.
  • Such formulations typically will have the therapeutically active agent blended together with the extraded matrix material, and then the mixture would be tableted in order to provide a slow release formulation.
  • Such formulations may be advantageous, for example, when the therapeutically active agent included in the formulation is sensitive to temperatures needed for softening the hydrophobic material and/ or the retardant material.
  • pharmaceutically active agent included in the formulation is sensitive to temperatures needed for softening the hydrophobic material and/ or the retardant material.
  • optically pure means that an active ingredient (e.g., (S)- amlodipine) for use in the compositions or methods of the present invention contains a significantly greater proportion of the specified enantiomer in relation to the non-specified enantiomer.
  • an active ingredient e.g., (S)- amlodipine
  • optically pure (S)-amlodipine contains a significantly greater proportion of the (S)-enantiomer in relation to the (R)-enantiomer.
  • compositions including the optically pure active ingredients contain at least 90% by weight of the specified enantiomer and 10% by weight or less of the non-specified enantiomer.
  • compositions contain at least 95% by weight of the specified enantiomer and 5% by weight or less of the non-specified enantiomer. Even more preferably, such compositions contain at least 99% by weight of the specified enantiomer and 1% by weight or less of the non-specified enantiomer. These percentages are based upon the total amount of the active ingredient.
  • patient refers to a mammal in need of a particular treatment. In a prefe ⁇ ed embodiment, a patient is a primate, canine, feline, or equine. In another prefe ⁇ ed embodiment, a patient is a human.
  • solvate refers to a pharmaceutically acceptable fonn of a specified compound, with one or more solvent molecules, that retains the biological effectiveness of such compound.
  • solvates include compounds of the invention in combination with solvents such, for example, water (to form the hydrate), isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, ethanolamine, or acetone.
  • solvents such as water (to form the hydrate), isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, ethanolamine, or acetone.
  • formulations of solvate mixtures such as a compound of the invention in combination with two or more solvents.
  • heteroatom as used herein means an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen.
  • Prefe ⁇ ed heteroatoms are boron, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, sulfur and selenium.
  • alkyl refers to the radical of saturated aliphatic groups, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups.
  • a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C1-C30 for sfraight chain, C3-C30 for branched chain), and more preferably 20 or fewer.
  • prefened cycloalkyls have from 3-10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and more preferably have 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure.
  • lower alkyl as used herein means an alkyl group, as defined above, but having from one to ten carbons, more preferably from one to six carbon atoms in its backbone structure.
  • lower alkenyl and “lower alkynyl” have similar chain lengths.
  • Prefe ⁇ ed alkyl groups are lower alkyls. In prefe ⁇ ed embodiments, a substituent designated herein as alkyl is a lower alkyl.
  • alkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group (e.g., an aromatic or heteroaromatic group).
  • alkenyl and alkynyl refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.
  • aryl as used herein includes 5-, 6- and 7-membered single-ring aromatic groups that may include from zero to four heteroatoms, for example, benzene, anthracene, naphthalene, pyrene, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like.
  • aryl groups having heteroatoms in the ring structure may also be refe ⁇ ed to as "aryl heterocycles" or "heteroaromati.es.”
  • the aromatic ring can be substituted at one or more ring positions with such substituents as described above, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aromatic or heteroaromatic moieties, -CF3, -CN, or the like.
  • aryl also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoimng rings (the rings are "fused rings") wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls.
  • ortho, meta andpara apply to 1,2-, 1,3- and 1,4-disubstituted benzenes, respectively.
  • the names 1,2-dimethylbenzene and ortA -dimethylbenzene are synonymous.
  • heterocyclyl or “heterocyclic group” refer to 3- to 10-membered ring structures, more preferably 3- to 7-membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms. Heterocycles can also be polycycles.
  • Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, thiophene, thianthrene, furan, pyran, isobenzofuran, chromene, xanthene, phenoxathiin, py ⁇ ole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, pyrimidine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phenarsazine, phenothiazine, furazan, phenoxazine, py ⁇ o
  • the heterocyclic ring can be substituted at one or more positions with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, -CF3, -CN, or the like.
  • substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl,
  • polycyclyl or “polycyclic group” refer to two or more rings (e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls) in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are "fused rings". Rings that are joined through non-adjacent atoms are termed "bridged" rings.
  • Each of the rings of the polycycle can be substituted with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, - CF 3 , -CN, or the like.
  • substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl,
  • nitro means -NO2; the term “halogen” designates -F, -Cl, -Br or -I; the term “sulfhydryl” means -SH; the term “hydroxyl” means -OH; and the term “sulfonyl” means -SO2--
  • amine and “amino” are art-recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines, e.g., a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: ⁇ ⁇ 10 / 10 I + -N or -N- R 10 9 R 9 wherein R9, RI Q and R' ⁇ o each independently represent a group permitted by the rules of valence.
  • acylamino is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
  • R 9 is as defined above, and R' ⁇ represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or -(CH2) m -R8, where m and Rg are as defined above.
  • the term "amido" is art recognized as an amino-substituted carbonyl and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
  • alkylthio refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfur radical attached thereto.
  • the "alkylthio" moiety is represented by one of -S-alkyl, -S-alkenyl, -S-alkynyl, and -S-(CH2) m -Rg, wherein m and Rg are defined above.
  • Representative alkylthio groups include methylthio, ethyl thio, and the like.
  • carbonyl is art recognized and includes such moieties as can be represented by the general formula: O O U XR ⁇ i or — X— U — R' ⁇ wherein X is a bond or represents an oxygen or a sulfur, and Rj ⁇ represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, -(CH2)m"R-8 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, R' ⁇ represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or -(CH2) m -Rg, where m and Rg are as defined above.
  • alkoxyl groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, tert-butoxy and the like.
  • An "ether" is two hydrocarbons covalently linked by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an alkyl that renders that alkyl an ether is or resembles an alkoxyl, such as can be represented by one of -O-alkyl, -O- alkenyl, -O-alkynyl, -O-(CH2) m -Rg, where m and Rg are described above.
  • sulfonate is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O II S-OR 41 II x O in which R41 is an electron pair, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or aryl.
  • R41 is an electron pair, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or aryl.
  • triflyl, tosyl, mesyl, and nonaflyl are art-recognized and refer to trifluoromethanesulfonyl, j ⁇ -toluenesulfonyl, methanesulfonyl, and nonafluorobutanesulfonyl groups, respectively.
  • triflate, tosylate, mesylate, and nonaflate are art-recognized and refer to trifluoromethanesulfonate ester, j>-toluenesulfonate ester, methanesulfonate ester, and nonafluorobutanesulfonate ester functional groups and molecules that contain said groups, respectively.
  • Me, Et, Ph, Tf, Nf, Ts, Ms represent methyl, ethyl, phenyl, trifluoromethanesulfonyl, nonafluorobutanesulfonyl, jt?-toluenesulfonyl and methanesulfonyl, respectively.
  • a more comprehensive list of the abbreviations utilized by organic chemists of ordinary skill in the art appears in the first issue of each volume of the Journal of Organic Chemistry; this list is typically presented in a table entitled Standard List of Abbreviations. The abbreviations contained in said list, and all abbreviations utilized by organic chemists of ordinary skill in the art are hereby inco ⁇ orated by reference.
  • sulfate is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O II O— S— 0R 41 II o in which R4 is as defined above.
  • sulfonylamino is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O II N— S-R I I o II R
  • sulfamoyl is art-recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
  • sulfonyl refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O II S R 4 II o in which R44 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl.
  • sulfoxido refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: 0 I I — s-R 44 in which R44 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, or aryl.
  • a “selenoalkyl” refers to an alkyl group having a substituted seleno group attached thereto.
  • Exemplary “selenoethers” which may be substituted on the alkyl are selected from one of -Se-alkyl, -Se-alkenyl, -Se-alkynyl, and -Se-(CH2) m -R7, m and R ⁇ being defined above.
  • Analogous substitutions can be made to alkenyl and alkynyl groups to produce, for example, aminoalkenyls, aminoalkynyls, amidoalkenyls, amidoalkynyls, iminoalkenyls, iminoalkynyls, thioalkenyls, thioalkynyls, carbonyl-substituted alkenyls or alkynyls.
  • the definition of each expression e.g. alkyl, m, n, etc., when it occurs more than once in any structure, is intended to be independent of its definition elsewhere in the same structure.
  • substitution or “substituted with” includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo fransformation such as by rea ⁇ angement, cyclization, elimination, etc.
  • substituted is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds.
  • the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds.
  • Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described herein above.
  • the permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds.
  • the heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms.
  • This invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds.
  • protecting group as used herein means temporary substituents which protect a potentially reactive functional group from undesired chemical transformations. Examples of such protecting groups include esters of carboxylic acids, silyl ethers of alcohols, and acetals and ketals of aldehydes and ketones, respectively.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in particular geometric or stereoisomeric forms.
  • the present invention contemplates all such compounds, including cis- and trans-isom rs, R- and S-enantiomers, diastereomers, (D)-isomers, (L)-isomers, the racemic mixtures thereof, and other mixtures thereof, as falling within the scope of the invention.
  • Additional asymmetric carbon atoms may be present in a substituent such as an alkyl group.
  • diastereomeric salts are formed with an appropriate optically-active acid or base, followed by resolution of the diastereomers thus formed by fractional crystallization or chromatographic means well known in the art, and subsequent recovery of the pure enantiomers.
  • Contemplated equivalents of the compounds described above include compounds which otherwise co ⁇ espond thereto, and which have the same general properties thereof (e.g., functioning as analgesics), wherein one or more simple variations of substituents are made which do not adversely affect the efficacy of the compound in binding to sigma receptors, hi general, the compounds of the present invention may be prepared by the methods illustrated in the general reaction schemes as, for example, described below, or by modifications thereof, using readily available starting materials, reagents and conventional synthesis procedures. In these reactions, it is also possible to make use of variants which are in themselves known, but are not mentioned here.
  • the term "patient” refers to a mammal in need of a particular freatment.
  • a patient is a primate, canine, feline, or equine
  • a patient is a human.
  • solvate refers to a pharmaceutically acceptable form of a specified compound, with one or more solvent molecules, that retains the biological effectiveness of such compound.
  • examples of solvates include compounds of the invention in combination with solvents such, for example, water (to form the hydrate), isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, ethanolamine, or acetone.
  • solvents such as water (to form the hydrate), isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, ethanolamine, or acetone.
  • formulations of solvate mixtures such as a compound of the invention in combination with two or more solvents.
  • Example 1 Fonnation of (S Amlodpine-hemi-D-Tarfrate DMAC solvate from (RS)- Amlodipine free base
  • DMAC N,N-Dimethylacetamide
  • the resulting slu ⁇ y is then cooled with agitation to about 22 °C over 2.5 to 3 hours with a linear cooling profile at about 0.30 °C/min.
  • the slurry is held with agitation at about 22 °C for about 0.5 h.
  • the solid is isolated by filtration, washed by re-slurrying with DMAC followed by a displacement wash with MTBE.
  • the wet cake is dried at about 45 °C in vacuo to produce (S Amlodipine-hemi-D-Tartrate-DMAC solvate (13.92 kg, 24.37 moles, 40.0 % yield).
  • D-Tartaric acid 13.88 kg was charged slowly to T-l 10A. 3. The solution in T- 110A was mixed and held for use later in the batch. 4. ( ⁇ -Amlodipine besylate (49.81 kg) was charged to a 200 gal reactor (R-120), followed by methyl t-butyl ether (MTBE) (239.3 kg). 5. Aqueous sodium hydroxide (1 ⁇ ) (137.2 kg) was added to R-120. 6. The contents of R-120 were agitated for 20-30 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 15 minutes. 7. The bottom aqueous layer was removed and USP water (66.0 kg) was charged to R- 120. 8.
  • R- 120 The contents of R- 120 were agitated for a minimum of 20 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 15 minutes. 9. The bottom aqueous layer was removed and USP water (66.0 kg) was charged to R- 120. 10. The contents of R-120 were agitated for a minimum of 20 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 15 minutes. 11. The bottom aqueous layer was removed from R-120. 12. The contents of R-120 were polish filtered through a 3 ⁇ m cartridge filter to R- 110 A, followed by a reactor and line rinse with MTBE (49.9 kg). 13. The contents of R-110A were concentrated under vacuum (maximum 50°C) to a calculated volume (109 L). 14.
  • DMAC (152.8 kg) was charged to the contents of R-110A. 15. The contents of R-110A were again concenfrated under vacuum, this time until the batch temperature reached 45-55°C. The final volume was 208 L. 16. R-110A contents were cooled to 20 to 25°C, followed by the addition of the previously prepared D-tartaric acid solution (166.0 kg) at 20-25°C over 20 to 30 minutes. 17. The mixture was heated to 68-72°C over 55 to 65 minutes, and held at this temperature for 55 to 65 minutes. 18. The reaction mixture was cooled to 21 to 23 °C over 2 to 3 hours using a linear cooling profile and agitated at this temperature for 30 to 40 minutes. 19.
  • Amlodipine Hemi-D-Tartrate DMAC solvate salt as an input.
  • (S)- Amlodipine Hemi-D-Tartrate DMAC solvate (29.99 kg) was charged to a 200 gal reactor (R-120), followed by MTBE (245.4 kg).
  • the batch temperature was adjusted to 20-25°C, followed by the addition of IN sodium hydroxide (85.6 kg) while maintaining a temperature of 20-25°C.
  • the contents of R-120 were agitated for 20-30 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 10 minutes. 4.
  • the bottom aqueous layer was removed and USP water (81.8 kg) was charged to R-120. 5.
  • R-120 The contents of R-120 were agitated for 20-30 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 10 minutes. 6. The bottom aqueous layer was removed and USP water (82.5 kg) was charged to R-120. 7. The contents of R-120 were agitated for 20-30 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 10 minutes. 8. The bottom aqueous layer was removed. 9. The volume of R-120 was recorded and the solution was transfe ⁇ ed to a 100 gal reactor (R-110A) through a 3 ⁇ m polishing filter, followed by a reactor and line rinse of MTBE (45.0 kg) 10. The solution was distilled to a calculated volume (87 L) under vacuum at a maximum jacket temperature of 40°C. 11.
  • Example 5 Detailed Process Description for (S)-Amlodipine L-Malate (form A) The following is a typical batch description for the process using the (S)- Amlodipine free base as an input.
  • L-Malic acid (6.68 kg), USP Water (5.73 kg) and IPA (17.0 kg) were charged to a suitable mixing vessel and mixed until a solution was obtained.
  • the L-Malic acid solution was drained through a 5 ⁇ polish filter into a HDPE drum, and TK-7 and the lines were rinsed forward to the drum with IPA (8.45 kg). This solution was held for later use. 3.
  • Example 8 Preparation of ( ⁇ -Amlodipine-L-Malate (form A) Tablets Drug substance and excipients were screened and blended using typical manufacturing equipment. A conventional tablet machine was used to compress this blend into tablets weighing nominally 200 mg each.
  • Tablets were packaged in HDPE bottles with C/R cap with no desiccant, and stored at ICH storage conditions of 25°C / 60% RH, 30°C / 60%) RH, and 40°C / 75% RH. Tablets have been assayed at initial time and after 1, 2, 3 and 6 months storage. Stability results are given in Figures 5 and 6. Note that * indicates that 1 mg of ( ⁇ S)-Amlodipine is equivalent tol.328 mg of (S)-An lodi ⁇ ine-L-Malate (Table 3). Table 3. Preparation of (S)-Amlodipine L-Malate Tablets
  • Example 9 Relative Bioavailability The pharmacokinetic parameters AUC and C max from three multiple-dose studies in male and female dogs were compared. The 28-day pharmacokinetic assessments were compared. Male and female dogs were administered an oral capsule once daily containing one of two different salts of (S)-amlodipine. One study used only the maleate salt form of (S)-amlodipine and two studies used only the malate salt form of (S)-amlodipine (form A). All doses were adjusted for salt form so all doses are in terms of mg base/kg. Table 4. Mean Dose-Normalized AUC and C max Parameters for (S)- Amlodipine Maleate and Malate Salts Following 28-Days of Oral Capsule Dosing in Dogs
  • the malate salt has also shown greater bioavailability than the maleate salt in both dogs (animal model) and humans.
  • the commercially marketed salt for racemic amlodipine is the besylate and it has been shown that the besylate and maleate have equivalent bioavailabilities.
  • Example 11 Method for Determination of (S)-Amlodipine in Human Plasma by LC/MS/MS An aliquot of each unknown, standard and control sample was analyzed on a high performance liquid chromatographic system equipped with a Positive-Ion mass spectrometer detector (condition tabled below in Table 7). Table 7. Conditions for the determination of (S)- Amlodipine in Human Plasma by LC/MS/MS
  • Example 12 Polymo ⁇ hs and Solvates of (S)- Amlodipine L-Malate (S)-Amlodipine L-malate has several polymo ⁇ hic and solvated forms. They were formed through crystallization and mechanical techniques. Characterization of crystal forms were performed using X-ray powder diffraction (XRPD), differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), thermogravimetry (TG), hot stage microscopy, moisture balance, solution proton NMR specfroscopy, thermogravimetry-mfrared spectroscopy (TG-LR), infrared (LR) and Raman specfroscopy. 1.
  • XRPD X-ray powder diffraction
  • DSC differential scanning calorimetry
  • TG thermogravimetry
  • TG-LR thermogravimetry-mfrared spectroscopy
  • LR infrared
  • Raman specfroscopy 1.
  • Form A was found to lose approximately 0.1% up to 150 °C indicating an unsolvated material.
  • the DSC curve for form A shows an endotherm at 164 °C. This was attributed to a melt based on hotstage data.
  • Form A showed an increase in weight of 0.5% when equilibrated at 95% RH. The sample then lost this weight upon equilibrating back to 5% RH.
  • XRPD data collected on the sample after the moisture balance experiment indicated that the sample form remained unchanged. Hygroscopicity studies shown that upon equilibrium at 31, 75, 84 and 95% relative humidity for approximately one week, form A remained unchanged.
  • a cryogrinder was also used to make amo ⁇ hous material.
  • Solution 1H NMR data indicated that the (S)-amlodipine L-malate molecule was intact.
  • the LR and Raman spectra of the amo ⁇ hous form are virtually identical to those for form A.
  • the DSC curve for the amo ⁇ hous form shows an exotherm at 81°C and an endotherm at 162 °C. This may be due to the crystallization to form A followed by the fo ⁇ n A melt.
  • a glass transition was measured around 54 °C. 3.
  • Form B was obtained from water evaporation, slow evaporation from dioxane, fast and slow evaporations from EtOH, and a fast evaporation from JJPA.
  • Solution 1H NMR indicated that the (S)-amlodipine molecule was intact.
  • the IR and Raman for form B are virtually identical.
  • the DSC curve for form B shows endotherms at ⁇ 91 , ⁇ 152, and ⁇ 190 °C.
  • Moisture balance data showed an increase in weight of 17.2% when equilibrated at 95% RH. The sample then lost this weight upon equilibrating back to 5% RH.
  • Form B was found to lose 1.3% volatiles up to 150 °C.
  • Karl Fischer water analysis esulted in 4.75% water.
  • TG-LR analysis confirmed the Karl Fischer water analysis.
  • Form B appears to be a hydrate because is was predominately crystallized from experiments involving water and the Karl Fischer data (1.5 moles of water) suggests more water than what can be attributed to just surface water.
  • Form B was also crystallized from dioxane, PA and EtOH without the presence of water, however these solvents may have contained water sorbed from the atmosphere.
  • Form D was obtained from crystalization from ethanol: ethanol (2 mL) was added to
  • Form E was only formed in 1,2-propanediol with high cooling rates and it is a solvated form with 1,2-propanediol.
  • Form F was obtained as single phase and is strongly conelated with DMF as crystallization solvent, which indicate that it is a solvated form with DMF.
  • the XRPD patterns of forms F and G are different, indicating that a different packing of the (S)- amlodipine molecules occurs in the two forms. It should be noticed that form F occu ⁇ ed in mixtures with form A also in other solvents, indicating that it is also a channel hydrate/solvate, but with a different crystal structure than form G.
  • form F can inco ⁇ orate DMF, methanol and mixtures water:acetone (10:90), water:THF (80:20) and water:2-pro ⁇ anol (20:80).
  • the TGA analysis of form F shows above 150 °C a high mass loss characteristic to a decomposition process occu ⁇ ed.
  • the DSC shows a melting endothermic peak at 106.6 °C after which it recrystallizes and melts at 149.3 °C.
  • Form G is a pyridine solvate.
  • the XRPD patterns of form G obtained in these different solvents are the same, indicating that different solvent molecules can be inco ⁇ orated in certain cavities present in the crystal structure (structures called channel hydrates/solvates) without leading to modifications in the XRPD patterns.
  • form G is likely to be such a channel hydrate/solvate structure.
  • form G can inco ⁇ orate pyridine, water and DMF:water (wet DMF).
  • the TGA analysis shows a 4.85 % mass loss in the 91-125 °C T interval after which a high mass loss characteristic to a decomposition process occuned.
  • the DSC shows a melting endothermic peak at 150.9 °C and a wide decomposition endothermic peak at 192.2 °C.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)

Abstract

One aspect of the present invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising optically pure (S)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor. In certain embodiments, the cholesteryl ester transfer protein is torcetrapib, JTT-705, or SC-795. In a preferred embodiment, the cholesteryl ester transfer protein is torcetrapib. In certain embodiments, said optically pure (S)-amlodipine is optically pure (S)-amlodipine malate, or a polymorph, pseudopolymorph or solvate thereof. Another aspect of the present invention relates to a method of treating a patient suffering from hypertension, hyperlipidemia, or a cardiac disorder, comprising co-administering a therapeutically effective amount of optically pure (S)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor. In certain embodiments, said optically pure (S)-amlodipine is optically pure (S)­amlodipine malate, or a polymorph, pseudopolymorph or solvate thereof.

Description

COMBINATIONS COMPRISING (S)-AMLODLPINE AND A CHOLESTERYL ESTER TRANSFER PROTEIN INHIBITOR, AND METHODS FOR REDUCING HYPERTENSION Related Applications This application claims the benefit of priority to United States Provisional Patent Application serial number 60/570,182, filed May 12, 2004; and United States Provisional Patent Application serial number 60/649,635, filed February 3, 2005; both of which are incoφorated by reference. Background of the Invention Treatments for cardiovascular disease have evolved rapidly over the last few decades from the early diuretics and natural products, such as rauwolfia serpentina, to newer agents, such as cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors and calcium-channel blockers (CCB). In efforts to achieve improved treatments for hypertension, hyperlipidemia, and related cardiovascular diseases, a number of agents in each of these classes have been developed. Some of the conditions for which cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors or calcium-channel blockers have been used or are believed useful include hypertension, angina, hyperlipidemia, arteriosclerosis, coronary artery disease, myocardial infarction, arrhythmia, congestive heart failure, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic cardiac myopafhy, renal insufficiency, peripheral vascular disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, cognitive dysfunction, stroke, and headache. Plasma cholesterol levels have been positively correlated with the incidence of clinical events associated with coronary heart disease. The regulation of whole-body cholesterol homeostasis in humans and animals involves modulation of cholesterol biosynthesis, bile acid biosynthesis, and the catabolism of cholesterol-containing plasma lipoproteins. The liver is the major organ responsible for cholesterol biosynthesis and catabolism. In addition, the liver is the site of synthesis and secretion of very low density lipoproteins (VLDL) which are subsequently metabolized to low density lipoproteins (LDL) in the circulation. LDL are the predominant cholesterol-carrying lipoproteins in the plasma and an increase in their concentration is correlated with increased atherosclerosis. The relative abundance of high density lipoprotein and low density lipoprotein is controlled in part by cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP). CETP is a plasma protein that facilitates the movement of cholesteryl esters and triglycerides between various lipoproteins in the blood. See Tall J. Lipid Res. 1993, 34, 1255-74. The transfer of cholesteryl ester from HDL to LDL by CETP has the effect of lowering HDL cholesterol. Therefore, one way of increasing the relative amount of high density lipoprotein, the "good" lipoprotein, is to inhibit cholesteryl ester transfer protein mediated conversion of HDL to LDL. Inhibition of cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP) has been shown to elevate plasma HDL-cholesterol and lower plasma LDL-cholesterol, thereby providing a therapeutically beneficial plasma lipid profile. This phenomenon was first demonstrated by Swenson et al., (J. Biol. Chem., 264, 14318 (1989)) with the use of a monoclonal antibody that specifically inhibits CETP. In rabbits, the antibody caused an elevation of the plasma HDL-cholesterol and a decrease in LDL-cholesterol. Additional evidence that inhibition of cholesteryl ester transfer protein leads to increased HDL levels and reduced LDL levels is presented in McCarthy, Medicinal Res. Revs. 1993, 13, 139-59 and Sitori Pharmac. Ther. 1995, 7,"443-47. Calcium-channel blockers are a chemically diverse class of compounds having important therapeutic value in the control of a variety of diseases including several cardiovascular disorders, such as hypertension, angina, and cardiac arrhythmias. See Fleckenstein in Experimental Facts and Therapeutic Prospects, John Wiley, New York (1983); and D. McCall Curr. Pract. Cardiol 1985, 10, 1-11. Calcium-channel blockers prevent or slow the entry of calcium into cells by regulating cellular calcium channels.
(Remington, The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Nineteenth Edition, Mack Publishing Company, Eaton, Pa., p. 963 (1995)). The regulation of calcium entry into the cells of the cardiovascular system is of paramount importance to the proper functioning of this system. Cardiac and vascular smooth muscle cells have calcium channels within the cell membrane. Calcium influx through these channels initiates a process of electromechanical coupling which ultimately leads to muscle contraction. The ability to regulate the entry of calcium into cardiac and vascular smooth muscle cells is a powerful therapeutic approach in the treatment of angina and hypertension, respectively. Likewise, blocking calcium influx into cardiac tissues and conduction systems provides a useful approach to control certain types of arrhythmia. Calcium-channel blockers are also believed to be useful in the treatment of other disorders in which the regulation of calcium plays a role in normal hemostasis. Such disorders include, for example, pulmonary hypertension, peripheral vascular disease, mild congestive heart failure, hypertrophic subaortic stenosis, protection against ischemic injury, stroke, migraine, tumor resistance to anti-neoplastic drugs, achalasia, esophageal spasms, bronchial asthma, premature labor, dysmenorrhea, and enhancement of success in renal transplantation. (Remington, The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Nineteenth Edition, Mack Publishing Company, Eaton, Pa., p. 963 (1995)). Cellular calcium flux is regulated by receptor-operated and voltage-dependent channels, which are sensitive to inhibition by calcium entry blockers. The term "calcium antagonist" was introduced by Fleckenstein when two drugs, prenylamine and verapamil, originally found as coronary dilators in the LANGENDORFF-experiment, were shown to mimic the cardiac effects of simple Ca2+- withdrawal, diminishing Ca2+-dependent high energy phosphate utilization, contractile force, and oxygen requirement of the beating heart without impairing the Na+-dependent action potential parameters. These effects were clearly distinguishable from β-receptor blockade and could promptly be neutralized by elevated Ca2+, β-adrenergic catecholamines, or cardiac glycosides, measures that restore the Ca2+ supply to the contractile system. In the following years many Ca2+-antagonists were introduced to therapy. Specific Ca2+-antagonists interfere with the uptake of Ca2+ into the myocardium and prevent myocardial necrotization arising from deleterious intracellular Ca2+ overload. They act basically as specific inhibitors of the slow transsarcolemnal Ca2+ influx, but do not or only slightly affect the fast Na+ current that initiates normal myocardial excitation. Amlodipine is a dihydropyridine calcium-channel blocker that is used to treat hypertension. Racemic amlodipine consists of two chiral forms, (S)-amlodipine and (R)- amlodipine. The S-enantiomer is known to be much more active than the i?-enantiomer. Importantly, administration of only (ιS)-amlodipine avoids the adverse effects, including headache and edema, dizziness, flushing, palpitation, fatigue, nausea, abdominal pain and somnolence, associated with administration of racemic amlodipine. (S)- Amlodipine is useful in treating cerebral ischemia, cerebral disorders, arrhythmias, cardiac hypertrophy, heart failure, coronary vasospasm, myocardial infarction, renal impairment, viral infection, thrombosis, atherosclerosis, peripheral vascular disease, migraine headache, restenosis following vascular surgery or injury and acute renal failure while avoiding the above- described adverse effects associated with the administration of the racemic mixture of amlodipine. More effective treatments are needed for hypertension, hyperlipidemia, and related cardiovascular disorders. In particular, new therapeutic treatments are needed which cause a more substantial reduction in blood pressure while minimizing the negative side effects associated with taking such agents. Therapeutic compositions comprising optically pure (»S)-amιodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor fulfill this need and provide other related advantages. Summary of the Invention One aspect of the present invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising optically pure (S)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor. hi certain embodiments, the cholesteryl ester transfer protein is torcetrapib, JTT-705, or SC-795. hi a preferred embodiment, the cholesteryl ester transfer protein is torcetrapib. In certain embodiments, said optically pure (<S)-amlodipine is optically pure (5)-amlodipine malate, or a polymoφh, pseudopolymoφh or solvate thereof. Another aspect of the present invention relates to a method of treating a patient suffering from hypertension, hyperlipidemia, or a cardiac disorder, comprising co-administering a therapeutically effective amount of optically pure (5)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, h certain embodiments, said optically pure (S)-amlodipine is optically pure (S)- amlodipine malate, or a polymoφh, pseudopolymoφh or solvate thereof. Brief Description of Figures Figure 1 depicts a procedure for the preparation of (S)-amlodipine-L-malate (form A). Note: If the free base of (S)-amlodipine is used as the starting material, then the first step (NaOH/MTBE) may be eliminated. Figure 2 depicts a procedure for the preparation of (S)-amlodipine hemi-D-tartrate DMAC solvate. Figure 3 depicts a procedure for the preparation of (S)-amlodipine free base from (^-amlodipine hemi-D-tartrate DMAC solvate. Figure 4 depicts a procedure for the preparation of (S)-amlodipine-L-malate (form A) from (<S)-amlodipine free base. Figure 5 depicts solid state stability data for (S)-amlodipine L-malate (form A). Figure 6 depicts solid state stability data for (jS)-amlodipine L-malate (form A). Figure 7 depicts representative plasma concentration-time relationship after a single oral dose of a hypothetical drug. Area under the plasma concentration-time curve is indicated by shading. Detailed Description of the Invention The present invention relates generally to pharmaceutical compositions containing two or more active agents that when taken together reduce hypertension. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising optically pure (S)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor. A large number of cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors are known in the art and are amenable to the present invention. In certain embodiments, the cholesteryl ester transfer protein is torcetrapib, JTT-705, or SC-795. In a preferred embodiment, the cholesteryl ester transfer protein is torcetrapib. The pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are useful for treating a patient suffering from hypertension, hyperlipidemia, or related cardiac disorders. (S) -Amlodipine Amlodipine is a dihydropyridine calcium antagonist (calcium ion antagonist or slow channel blocker) that inhibits the transmembrane influx of calcium ions into vascular smooth muscle and cardiac muscle. Amlodipine is known to exist in two chiral forms designated (S)-amlodipine and (R)-amlodipine. The S-enantiomer is known to be much more active than the R-enantiomer. Methods of treatment using (S)-amlodiρine are described in U.S. Patent 6,476,058. See Burges et al. Cardiovas Drug Dev. 1990, 8, 25-44 for a review of amlodipine. Amlodipine, its pharmaceutically acceptable salts, routes of administration, dosages, and formulations are described in U.S. Patents 4,572,909 and 4,879,303. The chemical name of (S)-amlodipme is (S)-3-Ethyl-5-l-methyl-2-(2- aminoethoxymethyl)-4-(2-chlorophenyl)-l,4-dihydro- 6-methyl-3,5-pyridinedicarboxylate and the structure is presented below.
Figure imgf000006_0001
(<S)-Amlodipine can be prepared by separation of the R- and S-enantiomers via fractional crystallization of diastereomeric mixtures formed by basic resolving agents and racemic carboxylic-acid-containing precursors of amlodipine. See T. Shibanuma et al. Chem. Pharm. Bull. 1980, 5(9), 2809-2812 and M. Eltze et al. Chirality 1990, 2, 233-240. In particular, (S)-amlodipine may be obtained by resolution of the corresponding racemic 4- aryl- 1 -ethoxymethyl- 1 ,4-dihydro-5 -methoxycarbonyl-2,6-dimethylpyridine-3 -carboxylic acids followed by subsequent alkylation and esterification as described in WO 88/07524 and WO 88/07525. Optically pure cinchonine and cinchonidine salts are basic resolving agents that have proven useful in the resolution of amlodipine. In fact, a technique for separation of the (S)-amlodipine isomer from the racemic mixture has been illustrated schematically by J. E. Arrowsmith in EP 0331 315. See also U.S. Published Patent Application 2002/0010200. Procedures for synthesis of racemic amlodipine can be found in Arrowsmith, J. E. et al., J. Med. Chem. 1986, 29, 1696; and U.S. Patents 4,572,909 and 5,438,145. Amlodipine inhibits calcium ion influx across cell membranes selectively, with a greater effect on vascular smooth muscle cells than on cardiac muscle cells. Experimental data suggest that amlodipine binds to both dihydropyridine and nondihydropyridine binding sites. The contractile processes of cardiac muscle and vascular smooth muscle are dependent upon the movement of extracellular calcium ions into these cells through specific ion channels. The (S) isomer has been reported to be more active than the (R) isomer. Negative inotropic effects can be detected in vitro but such effects have not been seen in intact animals at therapeutic doses. Serum calcium concentration is not affected by amlodipine. Within the physiologic pH range, amlodipine is an ionized compound
(pKa=8.6), and its kinetic interaction with the calcium channel receptor is characterized by a gradual rate of association and dissociation with the receptor binding site, resulting in a gradual onset of effect. The metabolites of amlodipine apparently do not possess significant calcium- channel blocking activity, while the parent drug offers a biological half-life of some 35-40 hours, prompting a once-daily dosage regimen (Lorimer, A. R., et al., J. Hum. Hypertens. 1989, 3, 191-96; Glasser, S. F. et al., A.J.H. 1989, 2, 154-57). Its ability to block calcium channels in smooth muscle produces peripheral vasodilation resulting in decreases in both systolic and diastolic blood pressure. Several standard tests can be used to assess antihypertensive or cardiovascular activity of a pharmaceutical agent. The Spontaneously Hypertensive Rat (SHR) assay is an accepted test for determining antihypertensive activity. See J. Roba et al. Arch. Int. Pharmacodyn. 1972, 200, 182. Alternatively, ultrasonic two-dimensional echocardiography and anesthetized dog assays can be used to assess the cardiovascular effects of a pharmaceutical agent on a subject. See P. Gueret et al. Circulation 1980, 62, 1308 and M. Tripp American J. of Physiology 1977, 232, H173. After oral administration of therapeutic doses of racemic amlodipine, absoφtion produces peak plasma concentrations between 6 and 12 hours. Absolute bioavailability has been estimated to be between 64 and 90%. The bioavailability of amlodipine is not altered by the presence of food. Amlodipine is extensively (about 90%) converted to inactive metabolites via hepatic metabolism with 10% of the parent compound and 60% of the metabolites excreted in the urine. Ex vivo studies have shown that approximately 93% of the circulating drug is bound to plasma proteins in hypertensive patients. Elimination from the plasma is biphasic with a terminal elimination half-life of about 30-50 hours. Steady state plasma levels of amlodipine are reached after 7 to 8 days of consecutive daily dosing. The pharmacokinetics of amlodipine are not significantly influenced by renal impairment. Patients with renal failure may therefore receive the usual initial dose. Elderly patients and patients with hepatic insufficiency have decreased clearance of amlodipine with a resulting increase in AUC of approximately 40-60%, and a lower initial dose may be required. Following administration of therapeutic doses to patients with hypertension, racemic amlodipine produces vasodilation resulting in a reduction of supine and standing blood pressures. These decreases in blood pressure are not accompanied by a significant change in heart rate or plasma catecholamine levels with chronic dosing. Although the acute intravenous administration of amlodipine decreases arterial blood pressure and increases heart rate in hemodynamic studies of patients with chronic stable angina, chronic administration of oral amlodipine in clinical trials did not lead to clinically significant changes in heart rate or blood pressures in normotensive patients with angina. With chronic once daily oral administration of racemic amlodipine, antihypertensive effectiveness is maintained for at least 24 hours. Plasma concentrations correlate with effect in both young and elderly patients. The magnitude of reduction in blood pressure with amlodipine is also correlated with the height of pretreatment elevation; thus, individuals with moderate hypertension (diastolic pressure 105-114 mm Hg) had about a 50% greater response than patients with mild hypertension (diastolic pressure 90-104 mm Hg). Normotensive subjects experienced no clinically significant change in blood pressures (+1/-2 mm Hg). As with other calcium-channel blockers, hemodynamic measurements of cardiac function at rest and during exercise (or pacing) in patients with normal ventricular function treated with amlodipine have generally demonstrated a small increase in cardiac index without significant influence on dP/dt or on left ventricular end diastolic pressure or volume. In hemodynamic studies, amlodipine has not been associated with a negative inotropic effect when administered in the therapeutic dose range to intact animals and man, even when co- admimstered with beta-blockers to-man. Similar findings, however, have been observed in normals or well-compensated patients with heart failure with agents possessing significant negative inotropic effects, hi a double-blind, placebo-controlled clinical trial involving 118 patients with well compensated heart failure (NYHA Class II and Class III), treatment with racemic amlodipine did not lead to worsened heart failure, based on measures of exercise tolerance, left ventricular ejection fraction and clinical symptomatology. Studies in patients with NYHA Class TV heart failure have not been performed and, in general, all calcium- channel blockers should be used with caution in any patient with heart failure. In hypertensive patients with normal renal function, therapeutic doses of amlodipine resulted in a decrease in renal vascular resistance and an increase in glomerular filtration rate and effective renal plasma flow without change in filtration fraction or proteinuria. The size of a prophylactic or therapeutic dose of (ιS)-amlodipine, or one of its salts, in the acute or chronic management of disease will vary with the severity of the condition to be treated and the route of administration. The dose, and perhaps the dose frequency, will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient, h general, the total daily dose ranges, for the conditions described herein, is from about 0.5 mg to about 50 mg. Preferably, a daily dose range should be between about 1 mg to about 25 mg. Most preferably, a daily dose range should be between about 1 mg to about 10 mg. In certain embodiments, the daily dose range should be about 2, 4, 6, or 8 mg. In managing the patient, the therapy may be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 0.05 mg to about 1 mg and increased up to about 5 mg or higher depending-on the patient's global response. (S)- Amlodipine may be useful in the treatment of cerebral ischemia. Cerebral ischemia, often the result of atherosclerotic disease or hypertension, results from insufficient cerebral circulation. Under normal circumstances, an extensive collateral circulation ensures adequate blood flow. However, cerebral ischemia may result from either an intra- or extracranial interruption of arterial blood flow. If interruption is transient, the cerebral tissues recover, and neurologic symptoms disappear. If the ischemia lasts for a somewhat more extended period, infarction results and the resulting neurologic damage is permanent. In the case of extended ischemia resulting in infarction, treatment is directed to the underlying vascular disease, to blood platelet aggregation inhibitors, and anticoagulant therapy. Because of its activity as a calcium channel antagonist, (>S)-amlodipine may also be useful in treating cardiac arrhythmias. Cardiac arrhythmias represent a broad, complex group of electrophysiologic disorders that affect the mechanical properties of the heart and vasculature, altering normal cardiac rhythm, function and output. Normal cardiac rhythm originates with the sinoatrial node, which possesses high intrinsic automaticity. Adequate automaticity and conduction lead to activation of atrial and ventricular fibers, producing in sequence the elements of normal functional heart beat. Calcium antagonists may be of value in conditions where calcium-related changes in membrane potential and conduction alter normal rhythm. In the absence of treatment, symptoms vary with individual arrhythmias, but are often the consequence of inadequate cardiac filling and output and often include fatigue, decreased exercise tolerance, syncope, shortness of breath, nausea, lightheadedness and the like. (ιS)-Amlodipine may be useful to treat cardiac hypertrophy. Cardiac hypertrophy can result from excessive workload either due to an obstruction to outflow, termed systolic overload, or to excessive volumes presented to the heart in diastole, termed diastolic overload. Systolic overload results in concentric ventricular hypertrophy, in which there is an increased thickness in the walls of the heart not associated with increased volume. Diastolic overload causes dilation and hypertrophy with an increased blood volume. An inadequate cardiac output results from the heart's failure in systolic or diastolic overload, leading to fatigue, shortness of breath, pulmonary congestion, edema and the like. Calcium channel antagonists effect workload and, as such, may be useful in treating cardiac hypertrophy due to the effect of the calcium antagonist on cardiac and vascular smooth muscle in reducing blood pressure. (<S)-Amlodipine could be used to treat coronary arterial spasm. Coronary arterial spasm can occur in the absence of significant coronary atherosclerosis and is thought to be an initiating event in variant angina and in myocardial infarction. Coronary spasm may occur without the patient feeling any significant discomfort. In an electrically unstable heart, diverse neural impulses to the heart may provoke coronary vascular spasm. This may result in enhanced myocardial ischemia and arrhythmia, which in turn may culminate in ventricular fibrillation and sudden cardiac death. As in variant or vasospastic angina, the calcium channel antagonists maybe of particular usefulness due to their effect on cardiac and vascular smooth muscle. (S)-Amlodiρine may be useful in the treatment of myocardial infarction, ischemic myocardial necrosis, and ischemia reperfusion injury. Myocardial infarction or ischemic myocardial necrosis generally results from the abrupt reduction of coronary blood flow to a portion of the myocardium. The condition likely originates from atherosclerosis of the coronary arteries. Either coronary artery vasospasm or acute coronary thrombosis precipitates the condition, although the etiology is the subject of continuing research. Myocardial infarction is predominantly a disease of the left ventricle. Precordial pain and left ventricular dysfunction characterize the disease. The pain, which can be severe aching or pressure, leads to apprehension. Symptoms include left ventricular heart failure, pulmonary edema, shock or significant cardiac arrhythmia. Calcium channel antagonists may find utility in the management of myocardial infarction patients due to their effects on coronary artery vasospasm, blood pressure or other effects on cardiac function or vascular smooth muscle. S)-Amlodipine may be used to treat congestive heart failure. Congestive heart failure can be caused by hypertension, cardiomyopathy, coronary artery disease or valvular heart disease. Congestive failure results in poor cardiac output and elevated left-ventricular diastolic pressure, leading to dyspnea, fatigue, peripheral edema, and coughing. The ability of some calcium antagonists to lower afterload by dilating peripheral arteries without having a significant inotropic effect may increase their use in treating congestive heart failure. (S)- Amlodipine maybe of use in treating migraine. Classic migraine typically begins with visual auras followed by severe headaches, often accompanied by nausea and vomiting. Common migraine has similar symptoms without the preceding visual aura. The causes of migraine have been studied intensely, and are still a matter of debate. The most generally accepted cause is hypoxia due to reduced cerebral blood flow. Calcium channel antagonists have been used for migraine prophylaxis since they can increase cerebral blood flow. (ιS)-Amlodipine may be useful for treating Raynaud's phenomenon, which is characterized by vascular spasm of the extremities. These vasospasms can be caused by cold or stress. A pallor or cyanosis is usually present due to severe constriction of the digital arteries. The phenomenon is often seen as a secondary disorder with arterial diseases or connective tissue diseases such as scleroderma, arthritis or lupus erythematosus. Calcium channel antagonists have been shown to be effective in treating Raynaud's phenomenon. Interestingly, (S)- Amlodipine L-malate has been found to be unexpectedly bioavailable in mammals (in particular humans). Analysis of plasma levels (AUC is Area Under the Curve and indicates the total amount of the drug in plasma over a period of time; see discussion below) of humans dosed with (S)-amlodipine-malate showed increased levels of (5)-amlodipine compared to humans dosed with equivalent amounts of (S)- amlodipine maleate. This increased bioavailability increases the effectiveness of the drug without increasing the dosage. This allows an improved effectiveness for the compound with an equivalent dose or the use of a lower dose to achieve the same efficacy. Cholesteryl Ester Transfer Protein Inhibitors (CETP Inhibitors) Cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors (CETP Inhibitors) are a class of compounds that selectively inhibit cholesteryl ester transfer protein. CETP inhibitors are effective agents for increasing HDL levels in a variety of animal models, and results from advanced-stage clinical trials indicate that CETP inhibitors can be used to treat a variety of cardiac disorders. A large number of CETP inhibitors are known and are amenable to the present invention. Representative CETP inhibitors are described below. In general, the cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors used in the present invention can be characterized by their CETP inhibition properties. One method of evaluating the ability of a compound to inhibit CETP is by measuring the IC50- value of the compound using procedures known in the art. Representative examples of procedures to determine the IC50, Kj, and ED50 can be found in E. J. Reinhard et al. J. Med. Chem. 2003, 46(11), 2152-68; P. D. Bonin J. Pept. Res. 1998, 51(3), 216-25; R. W. Clark et al. Arterioscler. Thromb. Vase. Biol. 2004, 24(3), 490-7; and references therein. The IC50- values of several promising CETP inhibitors are as follows: torcetrapib (50 nM), SC-795 (20 nM), JTT-705 (9 μM), and CGS 25159 (<10 μM). See R. W. Clark et al. Arterioscler Thromb. Vase. Biol. 2004, 24(3), 490-7; D. T. Connolly et al. Biochemistry, 2000, 39(45), 13870-9; H. Shinkai et al. J. Med. Chem. 2000, 43(19), 3566-72; and H.V. Kothari et al. Atherosclerosis 1997, 128(1), 59-66. In certain instances, the compounds of the present invention have an ICso-value of less than about 50 μM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain instances, the compounds of the present invention have an IC50- value of less than about 1 μM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein, hi certain instances, the compounds of the present invention have an IC50-value of less than about 750 nM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain instances, the compounds of the present invention have an IC50- value of less than about 500 nM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein. Preferably, the compounds of the present invention have an IC5o-value of less than about 200 nM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein. Even more preferably, the compounds of the present invention have an IC5o- value of less than about 100 nM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein, h a most preferred embodiment, the compounds of the present invention have an IC5o-value of less than about 50, 25, 10, or 5 nM against cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In general, a dose of the cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof suitable for administration to a human will be in the range of 0.01 to 50 mg per kilogram body weight of the recipient per day, preferably in the range of 0.1 to 3 mg per kilogram body weight per day. Unless otherwise stated all weights of active ingredients are calculated in terms of drug per se. In certain embodiments, the desired dose is presented as two, three, four, five or more sub-doses administered at appropriate intervals throughout the day. These sub-doses may be administered in unit dosage forms, for example, containing about 5 to 50 mg. In a preferred embodiment, the total daily dose ranges, for the conditions described herein, is from about 0.5 mg to about 4 g. More preferably, a daily dose range should be between about 1 mg to about 500 mg. Most preferably, a daily dose range should be between about 1 mg to about 250 mg. In certain embodiments, the daily dose range should be about 10, 50, 100, 150, or 200 mg. In managing the patient, the therapy may be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 5 mg to about 15 mg and increased up to about 25 mg or higher depending on the patient's global response. In addition to the IC50- value of a compound, a variety of assays are known in the art for evaluating the therapeutic potential of cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors, e.g., measurement of serum cholesterol levels (HDL, TGI, and VLDL+LDL) and cholesteryl ester transfer protein activity. A variety of assays are described below for evaluating the therapeutic potential of cholesteryl ester transfer proteins. See also U.S. Patent 6,462,091. Measurement of Hepatic Cholesterol Concentration (HEPATIC CHOL) Liver tissue is to be weighed and homogenized in chloroforrmmethanol (2:1). After homogenization and centrifugation the supernatant is separated and dried under nitrogen. The residue is to be dissolved in isopropanol and the cholesterol content will be measured enzymatically, using a combination of cholesterol oxidase and peroxidase as described by C. A. Allain et al. Clin. Chem. 1974, 20, 470.
Determination of Serum Cholesterol (SER.CHOL, HDL-CHOL, TGI and VLDL+LDL) Total serum cholesterol (SER. CHOL) are to be measured enzymatically using a commercial kit from Wako Fine Chemicals (Richmond, Va.); Cholesterol Cl 1 , Catalog No. 276-64909. HDL cholesterol (HDL-CHOL) will be assayed using this same kit after precipitation of VLDL and LDL with Sigma Chemical Co. HDL Cholesterol reagent, Catalog No. 352-3 (dextran sulfate method). Total serum triglycerides (blanked) (TGI) will be assayed enzymatically with Sigma Chemical Co. GPO-Trinder, Catalog No. 337-B. VLDL and LDL (VLDL+LDL) cholesterol concentrations will be calculated as the difference between total and HDL cholesterol. Dog Model for Evaluating Drugs that Alter Lipid Levels Male beagle dogs, obtained from a vendor such as Marshall farms and weighing 6- 12 kg are fed once a day for two hours and given water ad libitum. Dogs may be randomly assigned to a dosing groups consisting of 6 to 12 dogs each, such as: vehicle, i.g.; 1 mg/kg, i.g.; 2 mg/kg, i.q.; 4 mg/kg, i.g.; 2 mg/kg, p.o. (powder in capsule). Intra-gastric dosing of a therapeutic material dissolved in aqueous solution (for example, 0.2% Tween 80 solution [polyoxyethylene mono-oleate, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, Mo.]) may be done using a gavage tube. Prior to initiating dosing, blood samples may be drawn from the cephalic vein in the morning before feeding in order to evaluate serum cholesterol (total and HDL) and triglycerides. For several consecutive days animals are dosed in the morning, prior to feeding. Animals are to be allowed 2 hours to eat before any remaining food is removed. Feces are to be collected over a two-day period at the end of the study and may be analyzed for bile acid or lipid content. Blood samples are also to be taken, at the end of the treatment period, for comparison with pre-study serum lipid levels. Statistical significance will be determined using the standard student's T-test with p<0.05. Dog Serum Lipid Measurement Blood is to be collected from the cephalic vein of fasted dogs in serum separator tubes (Vacutainer SST, Becton Dickinson and Co., Franklin Lakes, N.J.). The blood is centrifuged at 2000 φm for 20 minutes and the serum decanted. Total cholesterol may be measured in a 96-well format using a Wako enzymatic diagnostic kit (Cholesterol CII) (Wako Chemicals, Richmond, Va.), utilizing the cholesterol oxidase reaction to produce hydrogen peroxide which is measured calorimetrically. A standard curve from 0.5 to 10 μg cholesterol is to be prepared in the first 2 columns of the plate. The serum samples (20-40 μL, depending on the expected lipid concentration) or known serum control samples are added to separate wells in duplicate. Water is added to bring the volume to 100 μL in each well. A 100 μL aliquot of color reagent is added to each well and the plates will be read at 500 nm after a 15 minute incubation at 37 degrees centigrade. HDL cholesterol may be assayed using Sigma kit No. 352-3 (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, Mo.) which utilizes dextran sulfate and Mg ions to selectively precipitate LDL and VLDL. A volume of 150 μL of each serum sample is to be added to individual microfuge tubes, followed by 15 μL of HDL cholesterol reagent (Sigma 352-3). Samples are to be mixed and centrifuged at 5000 φm for 5 minutes. A 50 μL aliquot of the supernatant is to be then mixed with 200 μL of saline and assayed using the same procedure as for total cholesterol measurement. Triglycerides are to be measured using Sigma kit No. 337 in a 96-well plate format. This procedure will measure glycerol, following its release by reaction of triglycerides with lipoprotein lipase. Standard solutions of glycerol (Sigma 339-11) ranging from 1 to 24 μg are to be used to generate the standard curve. Serum samples (20-40 μL, depending on the expected lipid concentration) are added to wells in duplicate. Water is added to bring the volume to 100 μL in each well and 100 μL of color reagent is also added to each well. After mixing and a 15 minute incubation, the plates will be read at 540 nm and the triglyceride values calculated from the standard curve. A replicate plate is also to be run using a blank enzyme reagent to correct for any endogenous glycerol in the serum samples. Dog Fecal Bile Acid Measurement Fecal samples may be collected to determine the fecal bile acid (FBA) concentration for each animal. Fecal collections may be made during the final 48 hours of the study, for two consecutive 24 hour periods between 9:00 am and 10:00 am each day, prior to dosing and feeding. The separate two-day collections from each animal are to be weighed, combined and homogenized with distilled water in a processor (Cuisinart) to generate a homogeneous slurry. About 1.4 g of the homogenate is to be extracted in a final concentration of 50% tertiary butanol/distilled water (2:0.6) for 45 minutes in a 37 °C water bath and centrifuged for 13 minutes at 2000 x g. The concentration of bile acids
(mmoles/day) may be determined using a 96-well enzymatic assay system. A 20 μL aliquot of the fecal extract is to be added to two sets each of triplicate wells in a 96-well assay plate. A standardized sodium taurocholate solution and a standardized fecal extract solution (previously made from pooled samples and characterized for its bile acid concentration) will also analyzed for assay quality control. Twenty-microliter aliquots of sodium taurocholate, serially diluted to generate a standard curve are similarly to be added to two sets of triplicate wells. A 230 μL reaction mixture containing 1 M hydrazine hydrate, 0.1 M pyrophosphate and 0.46 mg/ml NAD is to be added to each well. A 50 μL aliquot of 3a- hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase enzyme (HSD; 0.8 units/ml) or assay buffer (0.1 M sodium pyrophosphate) are then added to one of the two sets of triplicates. All reagents may be obtained from Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, Mo. Following 60 minutes of incubation at room temperature, the optical density at 340 nm will be measured and the mean of each set of triplicate samples will be calculated. The difference in optical density HSD enzyme is to be used to determine the bile acid concentration (mM) of each sample based on the sodium taurocholate standard curve. The bile acid concentration of the extract, the weight of the fecal homogenate (grams) and the body weight of the animal are to be used to calculate the corresponding FBA concentration in mmoles/kg/day for each animal. The mean FBA concentration (mmoles/kg/day) of the vehicle group is to be subtracted from the FBA concentration of each treatment group to determine the increase (delta value) in FBA concentration as a result of the treatment. Plasma Lipids Assay in Rabbits Plasma lipids can be assayed using standard methods as reported by J. R. Schuh et al., J. Clin. Invest., 91, 1453-1458 (1993). Groups of male, New Zealand white rabbits are placed on a standard diet (100 g/day) supplemented with 0.3% cholesterol and 2% corn oil (Zeigler Bothers, Inc., Gardners, Pa.). Water is available ad lib. Groups of control and treated animals are killed after 1 and 3 months of treatment. Tissues are removed for characterization of atherosclerotic lesions. Blood samples are taken for determination of plasma lipid concentrations.
Plasma Lipids Plasma for lipid analysis is obtained by withdrawing blood from the ear vein into EDTA-containing tubes (Vacutainer; Becton Dickenson & Co., Rutherford, N.J.), followed by centrifugal separation of the cells. Total cholesterol is determined enzymatically, using the cholesterol oxidase reaction. See C. A. Allain et al. Clin. Chem. 1974, 20, 470-475. HDL cholesterol is also measured enzymatically, after selective precipitation of LDL and VLDL by dextran sulfate with magnesium. See G. R. Warnick et al. Clin. Chem. 1982, 28, 1379-1388. Plasma triglyceride levels are determined by measuring the amount of glycerol released by lipoprotein lipase through an enzyme-linked assay. See G. Bucolo et al. Clin. Chem. 1973, 19, 476-482. Atherosclerosis Animals are killed by pentobarbital injection. Thoracic aortas are rapidly removed, immersion fixed in 10% neutral buffered formalin, and stained with oil red O (0.3w). After a single longitudinal incision along the wall opposite the arterial ostia, the vessels are pinned open for evaluation of the plaque area. The percent plaque coverage is determined from the values for the total area examined and the stained area, by threshold analysis using a true color image analyzer (Videometric 150; American rnnovision, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) interfaced to a color camera (Toshiba 3CCD) mounted on a dissecting microscope. Tissue cholesterol will be measured enzymatically as described, after extraction with a chloroform/methanol mixture (2:1) according to the method of Folch et al. (J Biol. Chem., 226, 497-509 (1957)).
In Vitro Vascular Response The abdominal aortas are rapidly excised, after injection of sodium pentobarbital, and placed in oxygenated Krebs-bicarbonate buffer. After removal of peri vascular tissue, 3 mm ring segments are cut, placed in a 37 °C muscle bath containing Krebs-bicarbonate solution, and suspended between two stainless steel wires, one of which is attached to a force transducer (Grass Instrument Co., Quincy, Mass.). Force changes in response to angiotensin II added to the bath will be recorded on a chart recorder. CETP Activity Assay in Human Plasma (Tritiated cholesteryl ester) Blood is to be obtained from healthy volunteers. Blood is collected in tubes containing EDTA (EDTA plasma pool). The EDTA human plasma pool previously stored at -20 °C is to be thawed at room temperature, and centrifuged for 5 minutes to remove any particulate matter. Tritiated HDL, radiolabeled in the cholesteryl ester moiety ([3H]CE- HDL) as described by Morton and Zilversmit (J. Biol. Chem., 256, 11992-95 (1981)), is to be added to the plasma to a final concentration of (25 μg/ml cholesterol). Inhibitor compounds are to be added to the plasma as follows: Equal volumes of the plasma containing the [3H]CE-HDL (396 μL) are added by pipette into micro tubes (Titertube®, Bio-Rad laboratories, Hercules, Calif). Compounds, usually dissolved as 20-50 mM stock solutions in DMSO, are to be serially diluted in DMSO (or an alternative solvent in some cases, such as dimethylformamide or ethanol). Four μL of each of the serial dilutions of inhibitor compounds or DMSO alone are then added to each of the plasma tubes. The tubes are immediately mixed. Triplicate aliquots (100 μL) from each plasma tube are then transferred to wells of 96-well round-bottomed polystyrene microtiter plates (Corning, Corning, N.Y.). Plates are sealed with plastic film and incubated at 37 °C for 4 hours. Test wells are to contain plasma with dilutions of inhibitor compounds. Control wells are to contain plasma with DMSO alone. Blank wells are to contain plasma with DMSO alone that are left in the micro tubes at 4 °C for the 4 hour incubation and are added to the microtiter wells at the end of the incubation period. VLDL and LDL are precipitated by the addition of 10 μL of precipitating reagent (1% (w/v) dextran sulfate (Dextralip50)/0.5 M magnesium chloride, pH 7.4) to all wells. The wells are mixed on a plate mixer and then incubated at ambient temperature for 10 min. The plates are then centrifuged at 1000 xg for 30 min at 10 °C. The supernatants (50 μL) from each well are then transferred to Picoplate™ 96 plate wells (Packard, Meriden, Conn.) containing 250:1 Microscint™-40 (Packard, Meriden, Conn.). The plates are heat-sealed (TopSeal™-P, Packard, Meriden, Conn.) according to the manufacturer's directions and mixed for 30 min. Radioactivity will be measured on a microplate scintillation counter (TopCount, Packard, Meriden, Conn.). IC50 values will be determined as the concentration of inhibitor compound inhibiting transfer of [3H]CE from the supernatant [3H]CE-HDL to the precipitated VLDL and LDL by 50% compared to the transfer obtained in the control wells. The maximum percentage transfer (in the control wells) will be determined using the following equation: % Transfer = [dpmb|ank - dpmcontr0|] * 100 dpm |ank
The percentage of control transfer determined in the wells containing inhibitor compounds is determined as follows: % Control = [dpmb|ank - dpmtestl x 100 dpm iank " mtest IC50 values will be calculated from plots of % control versus concentration of inhibitor compound. CETP Activity In Vitro The ability of compounds to inhibit CETP activity are assessed using an in vitro assay that measures the rate of transfer of radiolabeled cholesteryl ester ([3H]CE) from HDL donor particles to LDL acceptor particles. Details of the assay are provided by Glenn et al. (Glenn and Melton, "Quantification of Cholesteryl Ester Transfer Protein (CETP): A) CETP Activity and B) Immunochemical Assay of CETP Protein," Meth. Enzymol., 263, 339-351 (1996)). CETP can be obtained from the serum-free conditioned medium of CHO cells transfected with a cDNA for CETP (Wang, S. et al. J. Biol. Chem. 267, 17487-17490 (1992)). To measure CETP activity, [3H]CE-labeled HDL, LDL, CETP and assay buffer (50 mM tris(hydroxymethyl) aminomethane, pH 7.4; 150 mM sodium chloride; 2 mM ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid; 1% bovine serum albumin) are incubated in a volume of 200 μL, for 2 hours at 37 °C in 96-well plates. LDL is differentially precipitated by the addition of 50 μL of 1% (w/v) dextran sulfate/0.5 M magnesium chloride, mixed by vortex, and incubated at room temperature for 10 minutes. The solution (200 μL) is transferred to a filter plate (Millipore). After filtration, the radioactivity present in the precipitated LDL is measured by liquid scintillation counting. Correction for non-specific transfer or precipitation is made by including samples that do not contain CETP. The rate of [3H]CE transfer using this assay is linear with respect to time and CETP concentration, up to 25- 30% of [3H]CE transferred. The potency of test compounds can be determined by performing the above described assay in the presence of varying concentrations of the test compounds and determining the concentration required for 50% inhibition of transfer of [3H]CE from HDL to LDL. This value is defined as the IC50. The IC50 values determined from this assay will be accurate when the IC50 is greater than 10 nM. In the case where compounds have greater inhibitory potency, accurate measurements of IC50 may be determined using longer incubation times (up to 18 hours) and lower final concentrations of CETP (<50 nM). Inhibition of CETP Activity In Vivo Inhibition of CETP activity by a test compound can be determined by administering the compound to an animal by intravenous injection or oral gavage, measuring the amount of transfer of tritium-labeled cholesteryl ester ([3H]CE) from HDL to VLDL and LDL particles, and comparing this amount of transfer with the amount of transfer observed in control animals. Male golden Syrian hamsters are to be maintained on a diet of chow containing
0.24%) cholesterol for at least two weeks prior to the study. For animals receiving intravenous dosing, immediately before the experiment, animals are anesthetized with pentobarbital. Anesthesia is maintained throughout the experiment. In-dwelling catheters are to be inserted into the jugular vein and carotid artery. At the start of the experiment all animals will receive 0.2 mL of a solution containing [3H]CE-HDL into the jugular vein. [3H]CE-HDL is a preparation of human HDL containing tritium-labeled cholesteryl ester, and is prepared according to the method of Glenn et al. (Meth. Enzymol., 263, 339-351 (1996)). Test compound is dissolved as a 80 mM stock solution in vehicle (2% ethanol: 98% PEG 400, Sigma Chemical Company, St. Louis, Mo., USA) and administered either by bolus injection or by continuous infusion. Two minutes after the [3H]CE-HDL dose is administered, animals are to receive 0.1 mL of the test solution injected into the jugular vein. Control animals are to receive 0.1 mL of the intravenous vehicle solution without test compound. After 5 minutes, the first blood samples (0.5 mL) are taken from the carotid artery and collected in standard microtainer tubes containing ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid. Saline (0.5 mL) is injected to flush the catheter and replace blood volume. Subsequent blood samples are to be taken at two hours and four hours by the same method. Blood samples are mixed well and kept on ice until the completion of the experiment. Plasma is obtained by centrifugation of the blood samples at 4 °C. The plasma (50 μL) is treated with 5 μL of precipitating reagent (dextran sulfate, 10 g/L; 0.5 M magnesium chloride) to remove VLDL/LDL. After centrifugation, the resulting supernatant (25 μL) containing the HDL will be analyzed for radioactivity using a liquid scintillation counter. The percentage [3H]CE transferred from HDL to LDL and VLDL (% transfer) will be calculated based on the total radioactivity in equivalent plasma samples before precipitation. Typically, the amount of transfer from HDL to LDL and VLDL in control animals will be 20% to 35% after 4 hours. Alternatively, conscious, non-anesthetized animals can receive an oral gavage dose of test compound as a suspension in 0.1% methyl cellulose in water. At a time determined for each compound at which plasma levels of the test substance reach their peak (Cmax) after oral dosing, the animals are to be anesthetized with pentobarbital and then dosed with 0.2 mL of a solution containing [3H]CE-HDL into the jugular vein as described above. Control animals are to receive 0.25 mL of the vehicle solution without test compound by oral gavage. After 4 hours, the animals are to be sacrificed, blood samples are collected, and the percentage [3H]CE transferred from HDL to LDL and VLDL (% transfer) is assayed as described above. Alternatively, inhibition of CETP activity by a test compound can be determined by administering the compound to mice that have been selected for expression of human CETP (hCETP) by transgenic manipulation (hCETP mice). Test compounds can be administered by intravenous injection, or oral gavage and the amount of transfer of tritium-labeled cholesteryl ester ([3H]CE) from HDL to VLDL and LDL particles is determined, and compared to the amount of transfer observed in control animals. C57B1/6 mice that are homozygous for the hCETP gene are to be maintained on a high fat chow diet, such as TD 88051 , as described by Nishina et al. (J Lipid Res., 31 , 859-869 (1990)) for at least two weeks prior to the study. Mice are to receive an oral gavage dose of test compound as a suspension in 0.1% methyl cellulose in water or an intravenous bolus injection of test compound in 10% ethanol and 90% polyethylene glycol. Control animals are to receive the vehicle solution without test compound by oral gavage or by an intravenous bolus injection. At the start of the experiment all animals will receive 0.05 mL of a solution containing [3H]CE-HDL into the tail vein. [3H]CE-HDL will be a preparation of human HDL containing tritium-labeled cholesteryl ester, and is prepared according to the method of Glenn et al. (Meth. Enzymol., 263, 339-351 (1996)). After 30 minutes, the animals are exsanguinated and blood collected in standard microtainer tubes containing ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid. Blood samples are mixed well and kept on ice until the completion of the experiment. Plasma will be obtained by centrifugation of the blood samples at 4 °C. The plasma is separated and analyzed by gel filtration chromatography and the relative proportion of [3H]CE in the VLDL, LDL and HDL regions will be determined. The percentage [3H]CE transferred from HDL to LDL and VLDL (% transfer) will be calculated based on the total radioactivity in equivalent plasma samples before precipitation. Typically, the amount of transfer from HDL to LDL and VLDL in control animals will be 20% to 35% after 30 min. Cholesteryl Ester Transfer Protein Inhibitors A large number of CETP Inhibitors are known and are amenable to the present invention. For example, one of the first CETP inhibitors was a monoclonal antibody reported by Swenson and coworkers that specifically inhibits CETP. See Swenson et al., (J. Biol. Chem., 264, 14318 (1989)). Other CETP inhibitors include proteins from human plasma described in Son et al. (Biochim. Biophys. Acta, 795, 743-480 (1984)). U.S. Pat. No. 5,519,001, describes a 36 amino acid peptide derived from baboon apo C-1 that inhibits CETP activity. Cho et al. (Biochim. Biophys. Acta 1391, 133-144 (1998)) describe a peptide from hog plasma that inhibits human CETP. Bonin et al. (J. Peptide Res., 51, 216- 225 (1998)) disclose a decapeptide inhibitor of CETP. A depspeptide fungal metabolite is disclosed as a CETP inhibitor by Hedge et al. in Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 8, 1277-80 (1998). Importantly, all of the patents and publications cited herein are incoφorated by reference. There have been several reports of non-peptidic compounds that act as CETP inhibitors. Barrett et al. (J. Am. Chem. Soc, 188, 7863-63 (1996)) describe cyclopropane- containing CETP inhibitors. Cyclopropane-containing CETP inhibitors are also described by Kuo et al. (J. Am. Chem. Soc, 117, 10629-34 (1995)). Pietzonka et al. (Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 6, 1951-54 (1996)) describe phosphonate-containing analogs of cholesteryl ester as CETP inhibitors. Coval et al. (Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 5, 605-610 (1995)) describe Wiedendiol-A and -B, and related sesquiteφene compounds as CETP inhibitors. Lee et al. (J. Antibiotics, 49, 693-96 (1996)) describe CETP inhibitors derived from an insect, fungus. Busch et al. (Lipids, 25, 216-220, (1990)) describe cholesteryl acetyl bromide as a CETP inhibitor. Morton and Zilversmit (J. Lipid Res., 35, 836-47 (1982)) describe that p-chloromercuriphenyl sulfonate, p-hydroxymercuribenzoate and ethyl mercurithiosalicylate inhibit CETP. Connolly et al. (Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm., 223, 42-47 (1996)) describe other cysteine modification reagents as CETP inhibitors. Xia et al. describe 1,3,5-triazines as CETP inhibitors (Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 6, 919-22 (1996)). Bisgaier et al. (Lipids, 29, 811-8 (1994)) describe 4-ρhenyl-5-tridecyl-4H-l,2,4-triazole- thiol as a CETP inhibitor. Additional triazole CETP inhibitors are described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/153,360. Sikorski et al. disclosed further novel CETP inhibitors in PCT Patent Application No. WO 99/14204. Substituted 2-mercaptoaniline amide compounds can be used as CETP inhibitors and such therapeutic compounds are described by H. Shinkai et al. in PCT Patent Application No. WO 98/35937. Some substituted heteroalkylamine compounds are known as CETP inhibitors. In European Patent Application No. 796846, Schmidt et al. describe 2-aryl-substituted pyridines as cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors useful as cardiovascular agents. One substituent at C3 of the pyridine ring can be an hydroxyalkyl group. In European Patent Application No. 801060, Dow and Wright describe heterocyclic derivatives substituted with an aldehyde addition product of an alkylamine to afford 1 -hydroxy- 1 -amines. These are reported to be β-3- adrenergic receptor agonists useful for treating diabetes and other disorders, hi Great
Britain Patent Application No. 2305665, Fisher et al. disclose 3-agonist secondary amino alcohol substituted pyridine derivatives useful for treating several disorders including cholesterol levels and atherosclerotic diseases. In European Patent Application No. 818448, Schmidt et al. describe tetrahydroquinoline derivatives as cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors. European Patent Application No. 818197, Schmek et al. describe pyridines with fused heterocycles as cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors. Brandes et al. in German Patent Application No. 19627430 describe bicyclic condensed pyridine derivatives as cholesterol ester transfer protein inhibitors, hi PCT Patent Application No. WO 9839299, Muller-Gliemann et al. describe quinoline derivatives as cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors. Polycyclic compounds that are useful as CETP inhibitors are disclosed by A. Oomura et al. in Japanese Patent No. 10287662. Cycloalkylpyridines useful as CETP inhibitors are disclosed by Schmidt et al. in European Patent No. EP 818448. Substituted tefrahydronaphthalene compounds useful as CETP inhibitors are described in PCT Patent Application No. WO 99/14174. Specifically described in that disclosure as a useful CETP inhibitor is (85)-3-cyclopentyl-l-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-[(S)-fluoro(4-trifluoromethylpheny l)methyl]-8-hydroxy-6-spirocclobutyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydronaphthalene. Some 4-heteroaryl- tetrahydroquinolines useful as CETP inhibitors are described in PCT Patent Application No. WO 9914215. For example, that disclosure describes 3-(4-trifluoromethylbenzoyl)- 5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinolin-5-one as a useful CETP inhibitor. Importantly, all of the patents and publications cited herein are incoφorated by reference. CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are also described in U.S. 5,932,587; DE 19741400 Al; DE 19741399 Al; WO 9914215 Al; WO 9914174; DE 19709125 Al; DE 19704244 Al; DE 19704243 Al; EP 818448 Al; WO 9804528 A2; DE 19627431 Al; DE 19627430 Al; DE 19627419 Al; EP 796846 Al; DE 19832159; DE 818197; DE 19741051; WO 9941237 Al; WO 9914204 Al; WO 9835937 Al; JP 11049743; WO 200018721; WO 200018723; WO 200018724; WO 200017164; WO 200017165; WO 200017166; EP 992496; and EP 987251, all of which are hereby incoφorated by reference. CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are also described in the following U.S. published patent applications and issued patents 2004/0058908, 2004/0039018, 2004/0028644, 2003/0203892, 2003/0198674, 2003/0186952, 2003/0166720, 2003/0166712, 2003/0109558, 2002/0103225; 6,569,905; 6,489,366; 6,462,091; 6,458,851; 6,458,850; 5,519,001; and 5,512,548, all of which are hereby incoφorated by reference. CGS 25159 CGS 25159 is a isoflavan derivative investigated by researches at CIBA Coφoration. Oral administration of CGS 25159 to normolipidemic hamsters increased the amount of HDL-cholesterol increased by 10% and reduced the amount of VLDL and LDL cholesterol by 22%. CGS 25159 has an IC50 value of <10 μM against CETP. The biological activity of CGS 25159 is described in H.V. Kothari et al. Atherosclerosis 1997, 128(1), 59-66. CGS 25159 has the chemical name 3-(3-fluoroρhenyl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-l- benzopyran-6,7-diol and the structure is presented below.
Figure imgf000024_0001
Chloropuupehenone Chloropuupehenone is a sesquiteφene derivative described by B. N. Ravi and workers inJ. PureAppl Chem. 1979, 51, 1893. Chloropuupehenone inhibits CETP and has an IC5o of 0.3 μM. See Coval et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1995, 5, 605-610. The structure of chloropuupehenone is presented below.
Figure imgf000024_0002
CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A was isolated from fungal cultures of Cytospora. The isolation and biological activity are described in J. C. Lee et al. J. Antibiotics 1996, 49, 693. CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A has IC of 40 μM against CETP and the structure is presented below.
Figure imgf000024_0003
CP 532623 CP 532623 is a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor being developed by Pfizer for the treatment of atherosclerosis. JTT-705 JTT-705 is an oral cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor being developed by Japan Tobacco for the treatment of hyperlipidemia and prevention of heart disease in low HDL patients. A phase I clinical trial is underway in Japan, and the results from a phase II clinical trial in the Netherlands have been reported. JTT-705 has the chemical name 2- methylpropanethioic acid, S-[2-[[[l-(2-ethylbutyl)cyclohexyl]carbonyl]amino]phenyl]ester. Admimsfration of JTT-705 to rabbits increased the absolute concentration of high-density lypoprotein. See J. Kobayashi et al. Atherosclerosis 2002, 162, 131-5. In randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial, administration of a 300 mg, 600 mg, or 900 mg dose to healthy human subjects with mild hyperlipidemia resulted in a 34% increase in HDL cholesterol and a 7%> decrease in LDL cholesterol. See G. J. de Grooth et al. Circulation 2002, 105(18), 2159. Additional information regarding the biological activity of JTT-705 has been described in Nature 2000, 406, 203. The size of a prophylactic or therapeutic dose of JTT-705, or one of its salts, in the acute or chronic management of disease will vary with the severity of the condition to be treated and the route of administration. The dose, and perhaps the dose frequency, will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient, hi general, the total daily dose ranges, for the conditions described herein, is from about 1 mg to about 2000 mg. Preferably, a daily dose range should be between about 150 mg to about 1500 mg. Most preferably, a daily dose range should be between about 200 mg to about 1000 mg. In certain embodiments, the daily dose range should be about 350, 500, 750, or 900 mg. hi managing the patient, the therapy may be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 100 mg to about 200 mg and increased up to about 400 mg or higher depending-on the patient's global response. Niceritrol Niceritrol is an antihyperlipoproteinemic agent that has recently been shown to inhibit cholesteryl ester transfer protein. See J. Sasaki et al. Int. J. Clin. Pharmacol. Ther. 1995, 33(7), 420-6. Procedures for the synthesis of niceritrol are described in British patents 1,022,880 and 1,053,689. Toxicity data is presented in T. Sugawara et al. Oyo Yakuri 1977, 14, 741. Niceritrol has the chemical name 3-pyridinecarboxylic acid 2,2- bis[[(3-pyridinylcarbonyl)oxy]methyl]-l,3-propanediyl ester and the structure is presented below.
Figure imgf000026_0001
The size of a prophylactic or therapeutic dose of niceritrol, or one of its salts, in the acute or chronic management of disease will vary with the severity of the condition to be treated and the route of administration. The dose, and perhaps the dose frequency, will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient. In general, the total daily dose ranges, for the conditions described herein, is from about 1 mg to about 2000 mg. Preferably, a daily dose range should be between about 250 mg to about 1500 mg. Most preferably, a daily dose range should be between about 500 mg to about 1000 mg. In certain embodiments, the daily dose range should be about 600, 700, 800, or 900 mg. In managing the patient, the therapy may be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 100 mg to about 200 mg and increased up to about 400 mg or higher depending-on the patient's global response. PD 140195 PD 140195 is a triazole derivative that inhibits cholesteryl ester transfer protein in vitro. PD 140195 has the chemical name 4-phenyl-5-tridecyl-4H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thiol. The biological activity of has been described in C. L. Bisgaier et al. Lipids 1994, 29(12), 811. SC-744. SC-794. SC-795. & SC-364 SC-744, SC-794, SC-795, & SC-364 are l,l,l-trifluoro-3-amino-2-propanol derivatives that bind to CETP. It is believed that SC-744, SC-794, and SC-795 do not affect lipoprotein structure or CETP-lipoprotein recognition. These trifluoroamino- propanol derivatives inhibit CETP by reversibly binding to CETP. Interestingly, SC-795 binds to CETP with approximately 5000 times higher affinity than cholesterol which is the natural ligand for CETP. The synthesis and biological activity of SC-744, SC-794, SC-795, and SC-364 are described in Durley et al. J. Med. Chem. 2000, 43, 4575 and D. T. Connolly et al. Biochemistry 2000, 39, 13870. SC-744 has an IC50 value of 200 nM in a buffer solution using purified CETP and lipoprotein. The IC5o value of SC-744 in plasma was 6 μM. The Λ-enantiomer, SC-795, has an IC50 value of 20 nM in a buffer solution using purified CETP and lipoprotein. In contrast, the S-enantiomer, SC-794, is thought to have little CETP inhibitory activity. One report indicates that IC50 value of SC-794 is >0.8 μM in a buffer solution using purified CETP and lipoprotein. The chemical name of SC-794 is (25)-3 -[(3 -phenoxyphenyl) [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol and the structure is presented below. The chemical name of SC-795 is (2i?)-3-[(3-phenoxyphenyl)[[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol and the structure is presented below. The chemical name of SC-364 is l,l'-[dithiobis[4,l-phenylene[[[3-(l,l,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]imino]]]bis[3,3,3-trifluoro-2-propanol] and the structure is presented below. SC-744 is a racemic mixture of SC-794 and SC-795.
Figure imgf000027_0001
SC-744 SC-794
Figure imgf000027_0002
SCH 58149 SCH 58149 is a depsipeptide isolated from an organic extract of a fungal fermentation broth. SCH 58149 inhibits cholesteryl ester transfer protein and has an IC50 of
50 μM. The isolation and biological activity of SCH 58149 are described in V.R. Hegde et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1998, 8(11), 1277-80.
Synthetic Peptide A Synthetic Peptide A is a thirty-eight amino acid synthetic peptide that inhibits cholesteryl ester transfer protein in vitro. Synthetic Peptide A was discovered during selective breeding experiments conducted on baboons. The preparation and biological activity of Synthetic Peptide A is described in R.S. Kushwaha J. Lipid Res. 1993, 34(8),
1285-97. Torcetrapib Torcetrapib is a tetrahydroquinoline derivative being developed by Pfizer for treatment of atherosclerosis and heart disease. Brousseau and coworkers report that once- daily administration of a 120 mg dose of torcefrapid to patients resulted in a 46 percent increase in HDL-cholesterol. A twice-daily administration of a 120 mg dose of torcefrapid to patients resulted in a 106 percent increase in HDL-cholesterol. See Brousseau, M.E. et al. N. Engl. J. Med. 2004, 350(15), 1505-15. For addition discussions of the biological activity of torcetrapib see R. W. Clark et al. Arterioscler. Thromb. Vase. Biol. 2004, 24(3), 490-7 and Bays, H.; Stein, E.A. Exp. Opin. Pharmacother. 2003, 4(11), 1901-38. Procedures for the synthesis of torecefrapib are described in U.S. Patents 6,197,786 and 6,313,142. Torcetrapib has the chemical name ethyl (2R,4S)-4-[[3,5- bis(trifluoromethyl)benzyl](methoxycarbonyl)amino]-2-ethyl-6-(trifluoromethyl)-3,4- dihydroquinoline-l(2H)-carboxylate and the structure is presented below.
Figure imgf000028_0001
The size of a prophylactic or therapeutic dose of torcetrapib, or one of its salts, in the acute or chronic management of disease will vary with the severity of the condition to be treated and the route of administration. The dose, and perhaps the dose frequency, will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient, hi general, the total daily dose ranges, for the conditions described herein, is from about 1 mg to about 1000 mg. Preferably, a daily dose range should be between about 25 mg to about 500 mg. Most preferably, a daily dose range should be between about 75 mg to about 300 mg. In certain embodiments, the daily dose range should be about 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, or 275 mg. hi managing the patient, the therapy may be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 40 mg to about 50 mg and increased up to about 90 mg or higher depending- on the patient's global response. U-l 06305 U- 106305 is a polycyclopropane derivate that has CETP inhibitory activity. U- 106305 was discovered from the fermentation broth of a culture of UC 11136. Procedures for the preparation of U-106305 are described in A.G. M. Barrett et al. J Am. Chem. Soc. 1996, 118, 7863 and M. S. Kuo et al. J Am. Chem. Soc. 1995, 117, 10629. U-106305 inhibited CETP by 50% when the concentration of U-106305 was 25 μM. The structure of U-106305 is presented below.
Figure imgf000029_0001
Wiedendiol-A Wiedendiol-A is a sesquiteφene-hydroquinone isolated from the marine sponge Xestospongia wedenmayeri. The isolation and structure elucidation of Wiedendiol-A is reported in Coval et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1995, 5, 605-610. Wiedendiol-A inhibits CETP and has an IC50 of 5 μM. The structure of Wiedendiol-A is presented below.
Figure imgf000029_0002
Wiedendiol-B Wiedendiol-B is a sesquiteφene-hydroquinone isolated from the marine sponge
Xestospongia wedenmayeri. The isolation and structure elucidation of Wiedendiol-B is reported in Coval et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1995, 5, 605-610. Wiedendiol-B inhibits
CETP and has an IC5Q of 5 μM. The structure of Wiedendiol-B is presented below.
Figure imgf000029_0003
WRMWY WRMWY is a pentapeptide identified in a bacteriophage assay. WRMWY inhibits cholesteryl ester transfer protein and has a Ki of 164 μM. The isolation and biological activity of WRMWY are described in P. D. Bonin et al. J. Pept. Res. 1998, 51(3), 216. SCH-50678 & Related Marine Products SCH-50678 and a series of structurally similar marine products that inhibit CETP are reported in S. J. Coval et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. 1995, 5, 605-610. SCH-50678 has an IC50 value of 46 μM and the structure is presented below. Puupenhenone triacetate has an IC50 value of 46 μM and is described in B. N. Ravi J. Pure Appl. Chem. 1979, 51, 1893. Puupenhenone has an IC50 value of 6 μM and is described in B. N. Ravi J. Pure Appl. Chem. 1979, 51, 1893._Avarol has an IC50 value of 25 μM and is described in L. Minale et al. Tetrahedron Lett. 1974, 3401. Aureol has an IC50 value of 22 μM and is described in P. Djura et al. J. Org. Chem. 1980, 45, 1435. Illimaquinone has an IC50 value of 100 μM and is described in R. T. Luibrand Tetrahedron 1979, 35, 609. Spongiatriol has an IC50 value of 103 μM and is described in R. Kazlauskas et al. Aust. J. Chem. 1979, 32, 867. Spongiadiol has an IC5Q value of 196 μM and is described in R. T. Luibrand Tetrahedron 1979, 35, 609. Sulfiricin has an IC50 value of >190 μM and is described in A. E. Wright J. Org. Chem. 1989, 54, 3472.
Figure imgf000030_0001
Cholesteryl Phosphate Analogs A variety of cholesteryl phosphate analogs are known to inhibit CETP. The synthesis of 100-108 has been described by Pietzonka et al. in Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett.
1996, 6, 1951-54. The IC50 values for CETP inhibition are 4 μM (100), 5 μM (101), 2 μM (102), 30 μM (103), 24 μM (104), 15 μM (105), 6 μM (106), 30 μM (107), and 14 μM
(108). The structures of 100-108 are presented below.
Figure imgf000031_0001
100 101 102
Figure imgf000031_0002
103 104 105
Figure imgf000031_0003
1,3, 5 -Triazine Compounds A series of 1,3,5-triazine compounds have been reported by Xia coworkers which inhibit CETP. The synthesis and CETP inhibitory activity of 109-119 is described in Xia et al. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 1996, 6, 919-22. The IC50 value for CETP inhibition and the structure of the compound is presented below.
Figure imgf000031_0004
Figure imgf000031_0005
Figure imgf000032_0002
Xia and coworkers also describe several other 1,3,5-triazine compounds and the percent inhibition of CETP wherein the concentration of the triazine was 50 μM. The percent inhibition and the structure of the compound are presented below.
Figure imgf000032_0001
Figure imgf000032_0003
Phenoxyphenyl Substituted Trifluoro-3-Amino-2-Propanols A large number of substituted phenoxyphenyl trifluoro-3-amino-2-propanols are known to inhibit CETP and are amenable to the present invention. Durley and coworkers report that substitution of the phenoxy group at the 3-, 4-, or 5- positions increases the CETP binding affinity of the compound. The synthesis and biological activity of a large number of substituted trifluoro-3-amino-2-propanols has been reported by Durley and coworkers inJ. Med. Chem. 2003, 46, 2152-68. The structures and IC50 values of compounds 126-185 are presented below.
Figure imgf000033_0001
Figure imgf000033_0002
Figure imgf000034_0002
Note: ND indicates that no data was collected
Figure imgf000034_0001
Figure imgf000034_0003
Figure imgf000035_0002
Figure imgf000035_0001
Figure imgf000035_0003
Note: a) Data represents the mean SEM (n=3-5). b) Standard buffer conditions, c) Assayed with lower [CETP] (<1 nM) and 18 assay time. For additional details see Durley and coworkers inJ Med. Chem. 2003, 46, 2152-68. Additional CETP Inhibitors Described in U.S. Patent 6.569.905 Additional CETP inhibitors that are amenable to the present invention are described in U.S. Patent 6,569,905, which is hereby incoφorated by reference. The structures of compounds 186-203 described in U.S. Patent 6,569,905 are presented below.
Figure imgf000036_0001
186 187 188
Figure imgf000036_0002
192 193 194
Figure imgf000036_0003
195 196 197
Figure imgf000037_0001
198 199 200
Figure imgf000037_0002
201 202 203 Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are oxy-substituted 4- carboxyamino-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolines represented by formula I:
Figure imgf000037_0003
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, or stereoisomers thereof; wherein Ri.i is hydrogen, Yi, W1-X1, or W1-Y1; Wi is carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, sulfmyl, or sulfonyl; Xi is -O-Yi, -S-Yl5 -N(H)-Yι, or -N-(Yι)2; Yi represents independently for each occurrence Zi or a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to ten membered straight or branched carbon chain; wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono-, or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Zi; Zi is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to eight membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; or Zi is a bicyclic ring consisting of two, fused partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said Zi substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (CrC6) alkyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (Cι-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxyl, (d-C^alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(Cι- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C^alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo, hydroxy, ( -C^alkoxy, (CrC^alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxyl, (Cι-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(C1-
C6)alkylamino; and said (Ci-C6)alkyl substituent is also optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; R1-3 is hydrogen or Oj; Qi is a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono-, or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Vi; Vi is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to eight membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; or Vi is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said Vi substituent is optionally mono-, di-, tri-, or tefra-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)aikyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, hydroxy, (Cι-C6)alkoxy, (d- C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carbamoyl, mono-N- or di-N,N-(d-C6) alkylcarbamoyl, carboxyl, (C1-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl or (C2-C6)alkenyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxyl, (d-C^alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(d- C6)alkylamino; and said (d-C6)alkyl or (C2-C6)alkenyl substituents are also optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; Ri-4 is QM OΓ VM; QH is a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono-, or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with VM; Vi-i is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered ring optionally having one to two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; wherein said VM substituent is optionally mono-, di-, tri-, or tefra-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (d-C6)alkoxy, amino, nitro, cyano, (d- C6)alkyloxyca- rbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(C1-C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d- C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; and said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; wherein either Rι_3 must contain Vi, or Rι-4 must contain VM; and Rι-5, Rι-6, R1- , and Rι-8 are each independently hydrogen, hydroxy, or oxy; wherein said oxy is substituted with Ti or a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated one to twelve membered straight or branched carbon chain wherein the carbons; carbon atoms other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono- substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Ti; Ti is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to eight membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; or Ti is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated,or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; and wherein said Ti substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (d-C^alkyl, (C -C6)alkenyl, hydroxy(d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C )alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (C]-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (C1-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(C1-C6)alkylamino; and said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is also optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms. Procedures for the preparation of compounds of formula I are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,140,342; U.S. Pat. No. 6,362,198; and European Patent publication 987251, all of which are hereby incoφorated by reference. hi a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula I selected from the group consisting of [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-dichloro-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]- 6,7-dimethoxy-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-dinitro-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6,7-dimethoxy-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H- quinoline-1 -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(2,6-dichloro-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6,7-dimethoxy-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6,7- dimethoxy-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4- [(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6-methoxy-2-methyl-3,4- dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl- benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-7-methoxy-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l- carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl- amino]-6,7-dimethoxy-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-ethoxycarbonyl-amino]-6,7-dimethoxy- 2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis- trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6,7-dimethoxy-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro- 2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid 2,2,2-trifluoro-ethylester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis- trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6,7-dimethoxy-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro- 2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid propyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6,7-dimethoxy-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]- 2-methyl-6-trifluoromethoxy-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] (3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-(l-butyryl-6,7-dimethoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4- tetrahydro-quinolin-4-yl)-carbamic acid methyl ester; [2R,4S] (3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl- benzyl)-(l-butyl-6,7-dimethoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydro-quinolin-4-yl)-carbamic acid methyl ester; and [2R,4S] (3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-[l-(2-ethyl-butyl)-6,7- dimethoxy-2-methyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydro-quinolin-4-yl]-carbamic acid methyl ester, hydrochloride. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are 4-carboxyamino-2- methyl-l,2,3,4,-tetrahydroquinolines represented by formula II:
Figure imgf000041_0001
π and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, or stereoisomers thereof; wherein Rπ-i is hydrogen, Yπ, Wi-Xπ, or Wπ-YπJ Wπ is carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, sulfinyl, or sulfonyl; Xπ is -O-Yπ, -S-Yπ-N(H)-Yπ or -N-(Y„)2; YII represents independently for each occurrence Zπ or a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to ten membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono- substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono-, or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Zπ; Zπ is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to twelve membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nifrogen; or Zπ is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said Zπ substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (d-C6)alkyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (Cι-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (C.sub.l-C.sub.4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(Cι- C6)alkylamino; and said (d-C6)alkyl is optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; Rπ-3 is hydrogen or Qπ; Qπ is a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Vπ; Vii is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to twelve membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; or Vπ is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said Vπ substituent is optionally mono-, di-, tri-, or tefra-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (C21-C6)alkenyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (Ci- C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxamoyl, mono-N- or di-N,N(Cι-C6) alkylcarboxamoyl, carboxy, (C1-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl or (C2-C6)alkenyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with hydroxy, (d-C^alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C^alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(d- C6)alkylamino; or said (C1-C6)alkyl or (C2-C6)alkenyl substituents are optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms;
Figure imgf000043_0001
Qπ-i a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nifrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with VIM ; VIM is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered ring optionally having one to two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; wherein said VIM substituent is optionally mono-, di-, tri-, or tefra-substituted independently with halo, (C1-C6)alkyl, ((d-C6)alkoxy, amino, nitro, cyano, (d-
C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, mono-N- or di-N,N(C1-C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-substituted with oxo, and said (C1-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; wherein either Rπ-3 must contain Vi, or Rπ-4 must contain VIM; and Rn-5, Rπ-6, Rπ-7, and Rn-8 are each independently hydrogen, a bond, nitro or halo; wherein said bond is substituted with Tn or a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated (d-C12) straight or branched carbon chain; wherein said carbon may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; wherein said carbon atoms are optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di- substituted with oxo; said nifrogen is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with Tn; Tn is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to twelve membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; or Tn is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nifrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said Tn substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C^alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)aιkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(CrC6)alkylamino; and said (d-C^alkyl substituent is also optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; and provided that at least one of substituents Rπ-5, Rπ-6, Rπ- and Rπ-8 is not hydrogen, and is not linked to the quinoline moiety through oxy. Procedures for the preparation of compounds of formula II are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,147,090; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/671,400; and PCT Publication No. WO00/17166, all of which are hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula II selected from the group consisting of [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl- amino]-2-methyl-7-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-7-chloro-2-methyl- 3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis- trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoχycarbonyl-amino]-6-chloro-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H- quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2,6,7-trimethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-berιzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6,7-diefhyl-2- methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis- trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6-ethyl-2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H- quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-methyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l- carboxylic acid ethyl ester; and [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-methyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l- carboxylic acid isopropyl ester. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are 4-carboxyamino-2- methyl-l,2,3,4,-tetrahydroquinolines represented by formula III:
Figure imgf000045_0001
in and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, or stereoisomers thereof; wherein RUM is hydrogen, Yπι, Wm-Xm, or Wm-Ym; Wπi is carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, sulfinyl, or sulfonyl; Xm is -O-Yiπ, -S-Ym, -N(H)-Yιπ, or -N-(Ym)2; Yin represents independently for each occurrence Zm or a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to ten membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or fri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono- substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono-, or di-substituted with oxo;and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Zm; Z is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to twelve membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; or Zm is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nifrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said Zm substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (d-C6)alkyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C )alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (CrC6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (Cι-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C^alkyloxycarbonyl, mono-N- or di-N,N(Cι- C6)alkylamino; and said (d-C6)alkyl is optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; Rιπ-3 is hydrogen or Qra; Qm is a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo said nitrogen is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Vm; Vm is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to twelve membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; or Vm is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nifrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said Vm substituent is optionally mono-, di-, tri-, or tefra-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d- C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxamoyl, mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylcarboxamoyl, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl or (C2-C6)alkenyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C )alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(C1- C6)alkylamino; or said (d-C6)alkyl or (C2-C6)alkenyl are optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; Rπι-4 is QπM θr VπM; QΠM is a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo said sulfur is optionally mono- or di- substituted with oxo said nitrogen is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Vnι-ι; VΠM is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered ring optionally having one to two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; wherein said VΠ substituent is optionally mono-, di-, tri-, or tefra-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (d-C6)alkoxy, amino, nitro, cyano, (d- C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(C1-C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; and said (C1-C6)alkyl substituent optionally having one to nine fluorine atoms; wherein either Rm-3 must contain Vm, or Rm-4 must contain Vm-i; and Rm-s and Rm- β, or Rπι-6 and Rm-7, and/or Rm. and Rm-8 are taken together and form at least one four to eight membered ring that is partially saturated or fully unsaturated optionally having one to three heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said ring or rings formed by Rm-5 and Rm-6, or Rm-6 and Rm-7, and/or Rm-7 and Rm-8 are optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (d-C )aιkylsulfonyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C^alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(C1-C6)allcylamino; and said (d-C6)alkyl substituent optionally having one to nine fluorine atoms; and provided that the Rm-5, Rm-6, Rπι-7 and/or Rm-8, as the case may be, that do not form at least one ring are each independently hydrogen, halo, (C1-C6)alkoxy or (d-C6)alkyl, said (d-C6)aιkyl optionally having one to nine fluorine atoms. Procedures for the preparation of compounds of formula III are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,147,089; U.S. Pat. No. 6,310,075; and European Patent Application No. 99307240.4, all of which are hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula III selected from the group consisting of [2R, 4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-methyl-2,3,4,6,7,8-hexahydro-cyclopenta[g]quinoline-l- carboxylic acid ethyl ester;
[6R, 8S] 8-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6-methyl-3,6,7,8- tefrahydro-lH-2-thia-5-aza-cyclopenta[b]naphthalene-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [6R, 8S] 8-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6-methyl-3,6,7,8- tetrahydro-2H-furo[2,3-g]quinoline-5-carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis- trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-ammo]-2-methyl-3,4,6,8-tefrahydro-2H-furo[3,4- g]quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-methyl-3,4,6,7,8,9-hexahydro-2H-benzo[g]quinoline-l- carboxylic acid propyl ester; [7R,9S] 9-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl- amino]-7-methyl-l,2,3,7,8,9-hexahydro-6-aza-cyclopenta[a]naphthalene-6-carboxylic acid ethyl ester; and [6S,8R] 6-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-8- methyl-l,2,3,6,7,8-hexahydro-9-aza-cyclopenta[a]naphthalene-9-carboxylic acid ethyl ester. Other CETP inliibitors amenable to the present invention are 4-carboxyamino-2- substituted-l,2,3,4,-tetrahydroquinolines represented by formula IV:
Figure imgf000048_0001
IV and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, or stereoisomers thereof; wherein Riv-i is hydrogen, Yr , Wrv-Xrv, or Wrv-Yrv; Wrv is carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, sulfinyl or sulfonyl; Xrv is -O-Yiv, -S-Yrv, -N(H)-Yrv, or -N-(Yrv)2; Yrv represents independently for each occurrence Zrv or a fully saturated, partially unsaturated or fully unsaturated one to ten membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono- substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono-, or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Zrv; Zrv s a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to eight membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; or Zrv is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nifrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said Zrv substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (d-C6)alkyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C^alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (Cι-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(Cι- C6)alkylamino; said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is also optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; Rrv-2 is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; wherein said carbon atoms are optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; or said Rrv-2 is a partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to seven membered ring optionally having one to two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; wherein said Rrv-2 ring is optionally attached through (d-C4)alkyl; wherein said Rrv-2 ring is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (Cι-C6)alkyl, hydroxy, (Cι-C6)alkoxy, (Cι-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(C1-C6)alkylamino; and said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, oxo or (d-C^alkyloxycarbonyl; provided that Rrv-2 is not methyl; Rrv-3 is hydrogen or Qrv; Qrv is a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di- substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Vrv; Vrv is a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to eight membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nifrogen; or Vrv is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said Vrv substituent is optionally mono-, di-, tri-, or tefra-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (C -C6)alkenyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d- C4)alkylthio, amino, nifro, cyano, oxo, carboxamoyl, mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylcarboxamoyl, carboxy, (Cι-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl or (C2-C6)alkenyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with hydroxy, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (Cι-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylamino; and said (d-C6)alkyl or (C1-C6)alkenyl substituents are optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms;
Figure imgf000051_0001
Qrv-i a fully saturated, partially unsaturated, or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Vrv-i; Vrv-i is a partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to six membered ring optionally having one to two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nifrogen; wherein said Vrv-i substituent is optionally mono-, di-, tri-, or tefra-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (d-C6)alkoxy, amino, nifro, cyano, (d- C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d-C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; and said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; wherein either Rrv-3 must contain Vrv, or Rrv-4 must contain Vrv-i ; Rrv-5, Rrv-6, Rrv-7, and Rrv-8 are each independently hydrogen, a bond, nifro or halo; wherein said bond is substituted with Ty or a partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated (Cι-C12)straight or branched carbon chain; wherein carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; wherein said carbon atoms are optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with Tr ; Tr is a partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to eight membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nifrogen; or Trv is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated, or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said Trv substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (Cι-C4)alkylthio, amino, nifro, cyano, oxo, carboxy,
Figure imgf000052_0001
or mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C^alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d-C6)alkylamino; and said (Cι-C6)alkyl substituent is also optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; R v-5 and Rrv-6, or Rrv-6 and Rrv-7, and/or Rrv-7 and Rrv-8 may be taken together and can form at least one four to eight membered ring that is partially saturated or fully unsaturated optionally having one to three heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said ring or rings formed by Rrv-5 and Rrv-6, or Rrv-6 and Rrv-7, and/or Rrv- and Rrv-8 are optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (d-C4)alkylsulfonyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylfhio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (C1-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(C1-C6)alkylamino; and said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is also optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; and provided that when Rrv-2 is carboxyl or (d-C4)alkylcarboxyl, then Rrv-i is not hydrogen. Procedures for preparation of the compounds of formula IV are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,197,786; U.S. application Ser. No. 09/685; and WO 00/17164, all of which are hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula IV selected from the group consisting of [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-isopropyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l- carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino]-6-chloro-2-cyclopropyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2S,4S] 2-cyclopropyl-4-[(3,5-dichloro-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl- amino]-6-frifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6- trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester; [2R,4R] 4- [(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6- trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinaline-l -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2S,4S] 4- [(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6- trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2S,4S] 4- [(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-cyclobutyl-6-trifluoromethyl- 3, 4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis- trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro- 2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl- benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-methoxymethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H- quinoline-1 -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)- methoxycarbonyl-amino] -2-ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3 ,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid 2-hydroxy-ethyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl- amino] -2-cyclopropyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3 ,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-ethyl-6- trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6- trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid propyl ester; and [2 R,4S] 4- [(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-berizyl)-methoxycarbonyl-amino]-2-ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4- dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid propyl ester. Additional procedures for the preparation of compounds of formula IV are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,197,786 and 6,313,142; WO 01/40190A1; WO 02/088085A2; and WO 02/088069A2, all of which are hereby incoφorated by reference. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are 4-amino substituted-2- substituted-l,2,3,4-tefrahydroquinolines represented by formula V:
Figure imgf000053_0001
V and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, or stereoisomers thereof; wherein Rv-i is Yv, Wv-Xv, or Wv-Yv; Wv is a carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, sulfinyl, or sulfonyl; Xv is -O-Yv, -S-Yv, -N(H)-YV, or -N-(YV)2; Yy represents independently for each occurrence Zy or a fully saturated, partially unsaturated or fully unsaturated one to ten membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nifrogen is optionally mono-, or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Zy; Zy is a partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to eight membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen; or Zy is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, and oxygen; wherein said Zv substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (d-C6)alkyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C )alkylthio, amino, nifro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d-C6)al- kylamino; wherein said (d-C )alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nifro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (Cι-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(C1-C6)alkylamino; and said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is also optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; Rv-2 is a partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nifrogen; wherein said carbon atoms are optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono- substituted with oxo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nifrogen is optionally mono- or di- substituted with oxo; or said Rγ-2 is a partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to seven membered ring optionally having one to two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen; wherein said Rγ-2 ring is optionally attached through (d-C4)alkyl; wherein said Rv-2 ring is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (d-C6)alkyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C^alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(C1-C6)alkylamino; wherein said (C1-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, oxo or (d- C6)alkyloxycarbonyl; RV-3 is hydrogen or Qv; Qv is a fully saturated, partially unsaturated or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain, wherein the carbons, other than the connecting carbon, may optionally be replaced with one heteroatom selected from oxygen, sulfur, and nifrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo, said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nifrogen is optionally mono-, or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Vv; Vy is a partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to eight membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen; or Vv is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen; wherein said Vv substituent is optionally mono-, di-, tri-, or tefra-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, hydroxy, (CrC6)alkoxy, (d- C4)alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxamoyl, mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylcarboxamoyl, carboxy, (d-C6)aikyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl or (C2-C6)alkenyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with hydroxy, (Cι-C6)alkoxy, (d-C )alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylamino; and said (d-C6)alkyl or (C2-C6)alkenyl substituents are also optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; RV-4 is cyano, formyl, WV-ιQv-ι, WV-ιVV-ι, (Cι-C )alkyleneVv-ι, or Vv-2; Wv-i is carbonyl, thiocarbonyl, SO, or SO2, Qv-i a fully saturated, partially unsaturated or fully unsaturated one to six membered straight or branched carbon chain wherein the carbons may optionally be replaced with one heteroatom selected from oxygen, sulfur, and nifrogen; said carbon is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono-, or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Vγ-ι; Vv-i is a partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to six membered ring optionally having one to two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen; or Vv-i is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen; wherein said Vv-i substituent is optionally mono-, di-, tri-, or tetra-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (d-C6)alkoxy, hydroxy, oxo, amino, nifro, cyano, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N-(C1-C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d- C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; and said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally substituted with one to nine fluorine atoms; Vv-2 is a partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated five to seven membered ring containing one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen; wherein said Vv-2 substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (Cι-C2)alkyl, (d-C2)alkoxy, hydroxy, or oxo; wherein said (d- C2)alkyl optionally has from one to five fluorines; wherein Rv^ does not include oxycarbonyl linked directly to the C4 nitrogen; wherein either Rv-3 must contain Vv or Rv-4 must contain Vγ-ι ; Rv-5, Rv-6, Rv-7 and Rv-8 are independently hydrogen, a bond, nitro or halo wherein said bond is substituted with Tv or a partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated (d-C12) straight or branched carbon chain, wherein carbon may optionally be replaced with one or two heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen; wherein said carbon atoms are optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with hydroxy; said carbon is optionally mono-substituted with oxo; said sulfur is optionally mono- or di- substituted with oxo; said nitrogen is optionally mono- or di-substituted with oxo; and said carbon chain is optionally mono-substituted with Tv; Tv is a partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to twelve membered ring optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nifrogen; or Tv is a bicyclic ring consisting of two fused partially saturated, fully saturated or fully unsaturated three to six membered rings, taken independently, optionally having one to four heteroatoms selected independently from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen; wherein said Tv substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C )alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (Cι-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(d- C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri- substituted independently with hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C4)alkylthio, amino, nifro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C^alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(C1-C6)alkylamino; and said (d-C6)alkyl substituent also optionally has one to nine fluorine atoms; Rv-5 and Rv-6, or Rv-6 and Rv-7, and/or Rγ-7 and Rv-8 may also be taken together and can form at least one ring that is a partially saturated or fully unsaturated four to eight membered ring optionally having one to three heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen; and wherein said rings formed by Rv-5 and Rv.6, or Rv-6 and Rv-7, and/or Rv-7 and RV-8 are optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with halo, (d-C6)alkyl, (d- C4)alkylsulfonyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, hydroxy, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (d-C^alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C6)alkyloxycarbonyl, or mono-N- or di-N,N(C1-C6)alkylamino; wherein said (d-C6)alkyl substituent is optionally mono-, di- or tri-substituted independently with hydroxy, (d-C6)alkoxy, (d-C^alkylthio, amino, nitro, cyano, oxo, carboxy, (d-C^alkyloxycarbonyl, mono-N- or di-N,N(C1-C6)alkylamino; and said (d- C6)alkyl substituent optionally has one to nine fluorine atoms. Procedures for the preparation of the compounds of formula V are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,140,343; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/671,; and WO 00/17165, all of which are hereby incoφorated by reference. hi a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula V selected from the group consisting of [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-formyl-amino]-2- cyclopropyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-formyl-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6- trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid propyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[acetyl- (3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H- quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[acetyl-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl- benzyl)-amino]-2-ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[acetyl-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-amino]-2-methyl-6- trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[l-(3,5- bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-ureido]-2-cyclopropyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H- quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2 R,4S] 4-[acetyl-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl- benzyl)-amino]-2-ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[acetyl-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-amino]-2-methoxy-methyl-6- trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2S,4S] 4- [acetyl-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4- dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid propyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[acetyl-(3,5-bis- trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6-frifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-formyl-amino]-2- ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-frifluoromethyl-benzyl)-formyl-amino]-2-methyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4- dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[acetyl-(3,5-bis- trifluoromethyl-berizyl)-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-formyl- amino]-2-ethyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2S,4S] 4-[(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-formyl-amino]-2-cyclopropyl-6- trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l -carboxylic acid ethyl ester; [2R,4S] 4-[(3,5- bis-trifluoromethyl-benzyl)-formyl-amino]-2-methyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H- quinoline- 1 -carboxylic acid isopropyl ester; and [2R,4S] 4-[acetyl-(3,5-bis-trifluoromethyl- benzyl)-amino]-2-methyl-6-trifluoromethyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-quinoline-l-carboxylic acid isopropyl ester. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are cycloalkano-pyridines represented by formula VI:
Figure imgf000059_0001
VI and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, or stereoisomers thereof; wherein Avi is aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted with up to five identical or different substituents in the form of a halogen, nitro, hydroxyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, or a straight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, hydroxyalkyl, or alkoxy containing up to 7 carbon atoms each, or in the form of a group according to the formula -BNRvι-3Rv-4; Rvι-3 and Rvι-4 each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen, phenyl or a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms; Dviis aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted with a phenyl, nitro, halogen, trifluoromethyl or trifluoromethoxy, or a radical according to the formula RVι-5-Lvι-, -C(RVι-6)(Rvι-7)(Rvι-6), or Rvι-9-TVι-Vv-Xvι; Rvι-5, Rvι-6 and Rvι-9 each represent independently for each occurrence cycloalkyl containing 3 to 6 carbon atoms, or an aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atom, or a 5- to 7- membered, optionally benzo-condensed, saturated or unsaturated, mono-, bi- or tricyclic heterocycle containing up to 4 heteroatoms from the series of S, N and/or O, wherein the rings are optionally substituted, in the case of the nitrogen-containing rings also via the N function, with up to five identical or different substituents in the form of a halogen, trifluoromethyl, nifro, hydroxyl, cyano, carboxyl, trifluoromethoxy, a straight-chain or branched acyl, alkyl, alkylthio, alkylalkoxy, alkoxy or alkoxycarbonyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms each, an aryl or trifluoromethyl-substituted aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atoms each, or an optionally benzo-condensed, aromatic 5-to 7-membered heterocycle containing up to 3 heteoatoms from the series of S, N and/or O, and/or in the form of a group according to the formula BORvi-io, -SRvi-n, -SO2RVι-i2 or BNRVM3RVI-14; or Rvι-5 and or Rvι-6 are a radical represented by
Figure imgf000060_0001
RVMO, Rvi-ii and Rvι-12 each represent independently for each occurrence aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is in turn substituted with up to two identical or different substituents in the form of a phenyl, halogen or a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms; Rvi-i3 and Rvι-14 are identical or different and have the meaning of Rvι-3 and Rγι- given above; Rvι-7 is hydrogen or halogen; Rvi-s is a hydrogen, halogen, azido, trifluoromethyl, hydroxyl, trifluoromethoxy, a sfraight-chain or branched alkoxy or alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms each, or -NRvi- ι5Rvι-ι6; RVM5 and Rvι-i6 are identical or different and have the meaning of RVι-3 and Rvι-4 given above, or Rvι-7 and Rvι-8 together form a radical according to the formula =O or =NRvι-7; Rvi-17 is hydrogen or a straight-chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy or acyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms each; Lvi is a straight-chain or branched alkylene or alkenylene chain containing up to 8 carbon atoms each, which is optionally substituted with up to two hydroxyl groups; Tvi and Xγι are identical or different and are a straight-chain or branched alkylene chain containing up to 8 carbon atoms, or Tvi or Xyi is a bond; Vγι is oxygen, sulfur, or BNRVMS; RVMS is hydrogen or a sfraight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms or a phenyl; Eγι is cycloalkyl containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms, or a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 8 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted with a cycloalkyl containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms or a hydroxyl, or a phenyl, which is optionally substituted with a halogen or trifluoromethyl; Rvi-i and Rγι-2 together form a straight-chain or branched alkylene chain containing up to 7 carbon atoms substituted with a carbonyl group and optionally substituted by the
Figure imgf000061_0001
wherein a and b represent independently 1, 2 or 3; Rvι-i9 is hydrogen, a cycloalkyl containing 3 to 7 carbon atoms, a straight-chain or branched silylalkyl containing up to 8 carbon atoms, or a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 8 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted with a hydroxyl, a straight- chain or a branched alkoxy containing up to 6 carbon atoms or a phenyl, which may in turn be substituted with a halogen, nifro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy or phenyl or tefrazole-substituted phenyl, and an alkyl that is optionally substituted with a group according to the formula BORγι-22; wherein Rvι-22 is a straight-chain or branched acyl containing up to 4 carbon atoms or benzyl; or Rvι-i9 is a straight-chain or branched acyl containing up to 20 carbon atoms or benzoyl, which is optionally substituted with a halogen, trifluoromethyl, nitro or trifluoromethoxy, or a straight-chain or branched fluoroacyl containing up to 8 carbon atoms; Rvι-20 and Rvι-2i represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen, phenyl or a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms; or Rvι-20 and Rvι-21 together form a 3- to 6-membered carbocyclic ring, and the carbocyclic ring formed is optionally substituted, optionally also geminally, with up to six identical or different substituents in the form of trifluoromethyl, hydroxyl, nitrile, halogen, carboxyl, nifro, azido, cyano, cycloalkyl or cycloalkyloxy containing 3 to 7 carbon atoms each, a straight-chain or branched alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxy or alkylthio containing up to 6 carbon atoms each, or a sfraight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms, which is in turn substituted with up to two identical or different substituents in the form of a hydroxyl, benzyloxy, trifluoromethyl, benzoyl, a sfraight-chain or branched alkoxy, oxyacyl or carboxyl containing up to 4 carbon atoms each and/or a phenyl, which may in turn be substituted with a halogen, trifluoromethyl or trifluoromethoxy, and/or the carbocyclic ring formed is optionally substituted, also geminally, with up to five identical or different substituents in the form of a phenyl, benzoyl, thiophenyl or sulfonylbenzyl, which in turn are optionally substituted with a halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy or nitro, and/or
optionally in the form of a radical of 1,2
Figure imgf000062_0001
; -SO2Ph; -C(O)dNRvι-23Rvι-24; or =O; wherein c is 1, 2, 3 or 4; d is O or l; Rvι-23 and Rvι-24 each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen, cycloalkyl containing 3 to 6 carbon atoms, a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms, benzyl or phenyl, which is optionally substituted with up to two identical or different substituents in the form of halogen, trifluoromethyl, cyano, phenyl or nifro, and/or the carbocyclic rings formed are optionally substituted with a spiro-linked radical represented by formula
Figure imgf000062_0002
Wvi is oxygen or sulfur; Yvi and Yvi together form a 2- to 6-membered sfraight-chain or branched alkylene chain; e is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7; fis 1 or 2; Rvi-25, Rvi-26, Rvι-27, Rvi-28, Rvi-29, Rvi-30 and Rvi-3i each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen, trifluoromethyl, phenyl, halogen or a straight-chain or branched alkyl or alkoxy containing up to 6 carbon atoms each; or Rvi-25 and Rvi-26, or Rvι-27 and Rvi- 28 each together are a sfraight-chain or branched alkyl chain containing up to 6 carbon atoms; or Rvi-25 and Rvi-26, or Rvι-27 and Rvi-28 each together form a radical of
Figure imgf000062_0003
Wvi has the meaning given above; g is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7; Rvi-32 and Rvι- 33 together form a 3- to 7-membered heterocycle, which contains an oxygen, sulfur, SO, SO2 or BNRvι-34; and Rvι-3 is a hydrogen atom, a phenyl, benzyl, or a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 4 carbon atoms, and salts and N oxides thereof, with the exception of 5(6H)-quinolones, 3-benzoyl-7,8-dihydro-2,7,7-frimethyl-4-phenyl. Procedures for preparation of compounds of formula VI are described in European Patent Application No. EP 818448 Al; U.S. 6,207,671; and U.S. 6,069,148, all of which are hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula VI selected from the group consisting of 2-cyclopentyl-4-(4-fluorophenyl)-7,7-dimethyl-3-(4- trifluoromethylbenzoyl)-4,6,7,8-tetrahydro-lH-quinolin-5-one; 2-cyclopentyl-4-(4- fluorophenyl)-7,7-dimethyl-3-(4-tri.fluoromethylbenzoyl)-7,8-dihydro-6H-quinolin-5-one; [2-cyclopentyl-4-(4-fluorophenyl)-5-hydroxy-7,7-dimethyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinolin-3- yl]-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-methanone; [5-(t-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)-2-cyclopentyl-4- (4-fluorophenyl)-7,7-dimethyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinolin-3-yl]-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)- methanone; [5-(t-butyldimethylsilanyloxy)-2-cyclopentyl-4-(4-fluorophenyl)-7,7-dimethyl- 5,6,7,8-tefrahydroquinolin-3-yl]-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-methanol; 5-(t- butyldimethylsilanyloxy)-2-cyclopentyl-4-(4-fluorophenyl)-3-[fluoro-(4- trifluoromethylphenyl)-methyl]-7,7-dimethyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinoline; and 2- cyclopentyl-4-(4-fluorophenyl)-3-[fluoro-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)methyl]-7,7-dimethyl- 5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinolin-5-ol. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are substituted-pyridines of formula VII:
Figure imgf000063_0001
vπ and a pharmaceutically acceptable salts or tautomers thereof; wherein Rvπ-2 and Rvn-6 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, fluorinated alkyl, fluorinated aralkyl, chlorofluorinated alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, and alkoxycarbonyl; provided that at least one of Rvπ-2 and Rvn-6 is fluorinated alkyl, chlorofluorinated alkyl or alkoxyalkyl; Rvιι-3 is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, amido, arylcarbonyl, heteroarylcarbonyl, hydroxymethyl, -CHO, and -CO2Rvn-7; Rvπ-7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and cyanoalkyl; and-
CH(Rvπ-15a)(RviI-16a); Rvπ-i5a is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, hydrogen, halogen, alkylthio, alkenylthio, alkynylthio, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy and heterocyclyloxy; Rvπ-i6a is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, haloalkyl, alkenyl, haloalkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, arylalkoxy, and trialkylsilyloxy; Rvπ-4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenylalkyl, aralkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, cycloalkylalkenyl, cycloalkenylalkenyl, aralkenyl, hetereoarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, alkanoyloxy, alkenoyloxy, alkynoyloxy, aryloyloxy, heteroaroyloxy, heterocyclyloyloxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkenoxycarbonyl, alkynoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, heteroaryloxycarbonyl, heterocyclyloxycarbonyl, thio, alkylthio, alkenylthio, alkynylthio, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, cycloalkylthio, cycloalkenylthio, alkylthioalkyl, alkenylthioalkyl, alkynylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, heteroarylthioalkyl, heterocyclylthioalkyl, alkylthioalkenyl, alkenylthioalkenyl, alkynylthioalkenyl, arylthioalkenyl, heteroarylthioalkenyl, heterocyclythioalkenyl, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, heterocyclylamino, aryldialkylamino, diarylamino, diheteroarylamino, alkylarylamino, alkylheteroarylamino, arylheteroarylamino, trialkylsilyl, trialkenylsilyl, triarylsilyl, and -CO(O)N(Rvιι-8aRvιπ-8b); Rvn-8a and Rvn-sb are independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, and -SO2Rvπ-9; Rvιι-9 is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl, and -OP(O)(ORvn-ιoa)(ORvιι-ιob); Rvn-ioa and Rvπ-iob are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl, and -OP(S) (ORviMla) (ORvii-iib); Rvπ-iia and Rvn-iib are independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl; Rvii-5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl, alkenylcarbonyloxyalkyl, alkynylcarbonyloxyalkyl, arylcarbonyloxyalkyl, heteroarylcarbonyloxyalkyl, heterocyclylcarbonyloxyalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenylalkyl, aralkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, cycloalkylalkenyl, cycloalkenylalkenyl, aralkenyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, alkylthioalkyl, cycloalkylthioalkyl, alkenylthioalkyl, alkynylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, heteroarylthioalkyl, heterocyclylthioalkyl, alkylthioalkenyl, alkenylthioalkenyl, alkynylthioalkenyl, arylthioalkenyl, heteroarylthioalkenyl, heterocyclylthioalkenyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkenoxyalkyl, alkynoxylalkyl, aryloxyalkyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, heterocyclyloxyalkyl, alkoxyalkenyl, alkenoxyalkenyl, alkynoxyalkenyl, aryloxyalkenyl, heteroaryloxyalkenyl, heterocyclyloxyalkenyl, cyano, hydroxymethyl, -CO2RviM4, -CH(Rvιι-ι5a)(Rvπ-ι6a), -CH2SC(S)N(RVπ-i7)(Rvιι-i8), - C(O)Rvπ-i9, -C(O)NRvii-24, -C(CN)=RVιι-25, -CH2N(RVιι-26)(Rvπ-27), -C(S)NH2, -
C(O)C(S)NH2, -CH2SC(S)N(Rvπ-28)(Rvπ-29), -C(O)P(O)(RVπ-30)(Rvιι-3i), -C(=NRVn- 32)SRvπ-33, -CH=NOH, -C≡CSi(Rvιι-36)3, -N(Rvπ-37)(Rvπ-38),
Figure imgf000065_0001
-N(Rvπ- 42)C(O)Rvπ- 2, -NHC(O)NH RVn-44, -N=S=O, -NOS, -N=C=O, -N3, -SRVιι-45, -SCH(RVn- 48)(Rvn-49), -SC(O)Rvιι-50, -S(O)Rvπ-5i, and -SO2RVH-SI; Rvιι-i4 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl; Rvπ-i5b is selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, hydrogen, halogen, alkylthio, alkenylthio, alkynylthio, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, aroyloxy, and alkylsulfonyloxy, and Rvπ-iβb is selected form the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, arylalkoxy, and trialkylsilyloxy; Rvπ-i7 and Rvπ-i8 are independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl; Rvπ-i9 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, -SRvπ-20, -ORvn-21, and BRvn-22CO2Rvπ-23; Rvπ-2Q is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, aminoalkyl, aminoalkenyl, aminoalkynyl, aminoaryl, aminoheteroaryl, aminoheterocyclyl, alkylheteroarylamino, and arylheteroarylamino; Rvιι-2i is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl; Rvπ-22 is selected from the group consisting of alkylene or arylene; Rvιι-23 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl; Rvn-24 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aralkenyl, and aralkynyl; Rvπ-25 is heterocyclylidenyl; Rvπ-2δ and Rvπ-27 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl; Rvu-28 and Rvn-29 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl; Rvπ-30 and Rvn-31 are independently alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, and heterocyclyloxy; Rvπ-32 and Rvπ-33 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl; Rvιι-36 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl; Rvπ-37 and Rvπ-38 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl; Rvπ-39 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, alkylthio, alkenylthio, alkynylthio, arylthio, heteroarylthio and heterocyclylthio; Rvn-4o is selected from the group consisting of haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, haloaryl, haloheteroaryl, haloheterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclylalkoxy, heterocyclylalkenoxy, heterocyclylalkynoxy, alkylthio, alkenylthio, alkynylthio, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, and -N=Rvιι-4i» Rvπ-4i is heterocyclylidenyl; Rvπ-42 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl; Rvπ-43 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, haloaryl, haloheteroaryl, and haloheterocyclyl; Rvπ-44 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl; Rvπ-45 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, haloaryl, haloheteroaryl, haloheterocyclyl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenylalkyl, aralkyl, heteroarylalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl, cycloalkylalkenyl, cycloalkenylalkenyl, aralkenyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, alkylthioalkyl, alkenylthioalkyl, alkynylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, heteroarylthioalkyl, heterocyclylthioalkyl, alkylthioalkenyl, alkenylthioalkenyl, alkynylthioalkenyl, arylthioalkenyl, heteroarylthioalkenyl, heterocyclylthioalkenyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, aminocarbonylalkenyl, aminocarbonylalkynyl, aminocarbonylaryl, aminocarbonylheteroaryl, aminocarbonylheterocyclyl-, -SRvn-46, and -CH2RVii.47; Rvπ-46 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl; Rvπ-47 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl; Rvπ-48 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl; Rvπ-49 is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, haloaryl, haloheteroaryl, and haloheterocyclyl; Rvπ-50 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, and heterocyclyloxy; Rvπ-5i is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, haloaryl, haloheteroaryl, and haloheterocyclyl; Rvπ-53 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl; provided that when Rvπ-s is selected from the group consisting of heterocyclylalkyl and heterocyclylalkenyl, the heterocyclyl radical of the corresponding heterocyclylalkyl or heterocyclylalkenyl is other than δ-lactone; and provided that when Rvιι-4 is aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl, and one of RVn-2 and Rvπ-6 is trifluoromethyl, then the other of Rγn-2 and Rvπ-6 is difluoromethyl. Procedures for the preparation of compounds of formula VII are described in WO 9941237-A1, which is hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor of formula VII is dimethyl 5,5- dithiobis[2-difluoromethyl-4-(2-methylpropyl)-6-(trifluoromethyl)-3-pyridine-carboxylate]. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are substituted biphenyls represented by formula VIII:
Figure imgf000068_0001
vm and pharmaceutically acceptable salt, enantiomers, or stereoisomers thereof; wherein Avm is aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted up to 3 times in an identical manner or differently by halogen, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, or by straight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, or alkoxy with up to 7 carbon atoms each, or -NRVΠMRVΠI-2; RVIIM and Rvm-2 each represent independently hydrogen, phenyl, or straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms; Dvm is a straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, which is substituted by hydroxy; Evm and Lvffl each represent independently straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted by cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms; or is a cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms; or Evm has the above-mentioned meaning and Lvm is aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted up to 3 times in an identical manner or differently by halogen, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, or by sfraight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, or alkoxy with up to 7 carbon atoms each, or - NRvπι-3Rvm-4; wherein Rvm-3 and Rγπ-4 are identical or different and have the meaning given above for RVIM and Rvm-2; or Evm is a straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, or stands for aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted up to 3 times in an identical manner or differently by halogen, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, or by straight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, or alkoxy with up to 7 carbon atoms each, or -NRvπi-sRvm-δ; wherein Rγm-5 and Rvιπ-6 are identical or different and have the meaning given above for RVHH and Rvπι-2; or Lvπi is a straight-chain or branched alkoxy with up to 8 carbon atoms or for cycloalkyloxy with 3 to 8 carbon atoms; Tviπ is radical of Rvra-7 -Xvm or -C(RVm-8) (Rvπι-9) (RVIIMQ); Rvin-7 and Rvιπ-8 each represent independently cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms, or aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms, or denote a 5- to 7-member aromatic, optionally benzo- condensed, heterocyclic compound with up to 3 heteroatoms from the series S, N and/or O, which are optionally substituted up to 3 times in an identical manner or differently by trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, halogen, hydroxy, carboxyl, by straight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, alkoxy, or alkoxycarbonyl with up to 6 carbon atoms each, or by phenyl, phenoxy, or thiophenyl, which can in turn be substituted by halogen, trifluoromethyl, or trifluoromethoxy, and/or the rings are substituted by -NRvm-ιιRvm-12; Rvπi-ii and Rvπι-12 are identical or different and have the meaning given above for
Figure imgf000069_0001
Xvπis a straight or branched alkyl chain or alkenyl chain with 2 to 10 carbon atoms each, which are optionally substituted up to 2 times by hydroxy; Rvm-9 is hydrogen; Rvιπ-10 is hydrogen, halogen, azido, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, mercapto, trifluoromethoxy, sfraight-chain or branched alkoxy with up to 5 carbon atoms, or a radical of -NRvιiM3Rvιπ-i4; and Rvπι-i3 and Rvιπ-14 are identical or different and have the meaning given above for
RVIM, and Rvm-2, or Rvπι-9 and Rvπι-10 form a carbonyl group together with the carbon atom. The compounds of formula VIII are described in WO 9804528, which is hereby incoφorated by reference.
Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are substituted 1,2,4- triazoles represented by formula IX:
Figure imgf000069_0002
IX and pharmaceutically acceptable salts or tautomers thereof; wherein RDM is higher alkyl, higher alkenyl, higher alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, aryloxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, or cycloalkylalkyl; Rκ-2 is aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkenyl; wherein Rrχ-2 is optionally substituted at a substitutable position with one or more radicals independently selected from alkyl, haloalkyl, alkylthio, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkoxy, halo, aryloxy, aralkyloxy, aryl, aralkyl, aminosulfonyl, amino, monoalkylamino and dialkylamino; Rκ-3 is from hydrido, -SH, or halo; and provided Rrχ- cannot be phenyl or 4-methylphenyl when RDM is higher alkyl and
Figure imgf000070_0001
Procedures for the preparation of compounds of formula IX are described in WO
9914204, which is hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor a compoundof formula IX selected from the group consisting of 2,4-dihydro-4-(3-methoxyphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4- triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(2-fluorophenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-friazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(2- methylphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(3-chlorophenyl)-5- tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(2-methoxyphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H- 1,2,4- triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(3-methylphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 4- cyclohexyl-2,4-dihydro-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-friazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(3-pyridyl)-5- tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(2-ethoxyphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4- triazole-3-thione;
2,4-dihydro-4-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H- 1 ,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4- (4-phenoxyphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l ,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 4-(l ,3-benzodioxol-5-yl)-2,4- dihydro-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4- triazole-3-thione; 4-(2-chlorophenyl)-2,4-dihydro-5-tridecyl- 3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(4-methoxyphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole- 3-thione;
2,4-dihydro-5-tridecyl-4-(3-trifluoromethylphenyl)-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro- 5-tridecyl-4-(3-fluorophenyl)-3H- 1 ,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 4-(3-chloro-4-methylphenyl)-2.4- dihy(fro-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-1riazole-3-tMone; 2,4-dihydro-4-(2-memylthiophenyl)-5- tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 4-(4-benzyloxyphenyl)-2,4-dihydro-5-tridecyl-3H- 1 ,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(2-naphthyl)-5-fridecyl-3H- 1 ,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-5-tridecyl-4-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-3H- 1 ,2,4-triazole-3 -thione; 2,4-dihydro- 4-( 1 -naρhthyl)-5-tridecyl-3H- 1 ,2,4-triazole-3 -thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(3-methylthioρhenyl)- 5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-truone; 2,4-dihydro-4-(4-methylthiophenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H- l,2,4-triazole-3-tlnone; 2,4-dihydro-4-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-
3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(2,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4- dihydro-4-(2-methoxy-5-chlorophenyl)-5-fridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 4-(4- aminosulfonylphenyl)-2,4-dihycko-5-tridecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-5- dodecyl-4-(3-methoxyphenyl)-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; 2,4-dihydro-4-(3- methoxyphenyl)-5-tetradecyl-3H- 1 ,2,4-triazole-3-thione;
2,4-dihydro-4-(3-methoxyphenyl)-5-undecyl-3H-l,2,4-triazole-3-thione; and 2,4-dihydro-
(4-methoxyphenyl)-5-pentadecyl-3H- 1 ,2,4-triazole-3-thione. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are hetero- tetrahydroquinolines represented by formula X:
Figure imgf000071_0001
X and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, stereoisomers, or N-oxides; wherein Ax represents cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms or a 5 to 7-membered, saturated, partially saturated or unsaturated, optionally benzo-condensed heterocyclic ring containing up to 3 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of S, N and O; that in case of a saturated heterocyclic ring is bonded to a nitrogen function, optionally bridged over it, and in which the aromatic systems mentioned above are optionally substituted up to 5 -times in an identical or different substituents in the form of halogen, nitro, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy or by a sfraight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, hydroxyalkyl or alkoxy each having up to 7 carbon atoms or by BNRχ-3Rχ-4; wherein Rχ-3 and Rx^ each represent independently hydrogen, phenyl or straight-chain or branched alkyl having up to 6 carbon atoms; or
Figure imgf000071_0002
Dx represents an aryl having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, that is optionally substituted by phenyl, nitro, halogen, trifluormethyl or trifluormethoxy; or Dx represents a radical of Rχ-5- L-, -C(Rχ.6)(Rχ.7)(Rχ.8), orRx.9-Tχ-Vχ-Xχ-; Rχ-5, Rχ-6 and Rx-9 each represent independently cycloalkyl having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, or an aryl having 6 to 10 carbon atoms or a 5- to 7-membered aromatic, optionally benzo-condensed saturated or unsaturated, mono-, bi-, or tricyclic heterocyclic ring from the group consisting of S, N and O; in which the rings are substituted, optionally, in case of the nifrogen containing aromatic rings via the N function, with up to 5 identical or different substituents in the form of halogen, trifluoromethyl, nifro, hydroxy, cyano, carbonyl, trifluoromethoxy, straight sfraight-chain or branched acyl, alkyl, alkylthio, alkylalkoxy, alkoxy, or alkoxycarbonyl; each having up to 6 carbon atoms, by aryl or trifluoromethyl- substituted aryl each having 6 to 10 carbon atoms or by an optionally benzo-condensed, aromatic 5- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring having up to 3 heteroatoms from the group consisting of S, N, and O; and optionally substituted by BORχ-10, -SRχ_π, SO2Rχ-12 or BNRx-13Rχ-14; wherein Rχ-ιo, Rχ-n and Rχ.12 each represent independently aryl having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is in turn substituted with up to 2 identical or different substituents in the form of phenyl, halogen or a sfraight-chain or branched alkyl having up to 6 carbon atoms; wherein Rχ.13 and Rχ-14 are identical or different and have the meaning of Rχ-3 and Rχ-4 indicated above, or
Rχ_5 and/or Rχ-6 are a radical of the
Figure imgf000072_0001
Rχ-7 is hydrogen or halogen; Rx-8 is hydrogen, halogen, azido, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethoxy, sfraight-chain or branched alkoxy or alkyl having up to 6 carbon atoms or a radical BNRχ_ l5Rχ-16, Rχ-15 and Rχ-16 are identical or different and have the meaning of Rχ-3 and Rχ- indicated above; or Rχ_7 and Rx-8 together form a radical of the formula =O or
Figure imgf000072_0002
Rχ-π is hydrogen or straight chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy or acyl having up to 6 carbon atoms; Lx is a straight chain or branched alkylene or alkenylene chain having up to 8 carbon atoms, that are optionally substituted with up to 2 hydroxy groups; Tx and Xx are identical or different and denote a straight chain or branched alkylene chain with up to 8 carbon atoms, or Tx or Xx is a bond; Vx represents oxygen, sulfur, or BNRχ.18; Rχ.18 is hydrogen or straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms or phenyl; Ex represents cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms, or straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, that is optionally substituted by cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms or hydroxy, or represents a phenyl, that is optionally substituted by halogen or trifluoromethyl; Rx-i and Rχ.2 together form a straight-chain or branched alkylene chain with up to 7 carbon atoms, that must be substituted by carbonyl group and/or by a radical of
Figure imgf000073_0001
; -ORx-19; or l,2
Figure imgf000073_0002
; a and b each represent independently 1, 2, or 3, Rχ-19 is hydrogen, cycloalkyl with 3 up to 7 carbon atoms, straight chain or branched silylalkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms or straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms that are optionally substituted by hydroxyl, straight chain or branched alkoxy with up to 6 carbon atoms or by phenyl, which in turn might be substituted by halogen, nitro, trifluormethyl, trifluoromethoxy or by phenyl or by tefrazole-substituted phenyl, and alkyl, optionally be substituted by a group with the formula BORχ.22; wherein Rχ-22 is a straight chain or branched acyl with up to 4 carbon atoms or benzyl; or Rχ_19 is straight chain or branched acyl with up to 20 carbon atoms or benzoyl, that is optionally substituted by halogen, trifluoromethyl, nitro or trifluoromethoxy, or it is straight chain or branched fluoroacyl with up to 8 carbon atoms and 9 fluorine atoms; Rx-2o and Rχ-21 each represent independently hydrogen, phenyl or straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms; or Rχ-20 and Rχ.21 together form a 3- to 6- membered carbocyclic ring, and the carbocyclic rings formed are optionally substituted, optionally also geminally, with up to six identical or different substituents in the form of triflouromethyl, hydroxy, nitrile, halogen, carboxyl, nitro, azido, cyano, cycloalkyl or cycloalkyloxy with 3 to 7 carbon atoms each, by straight chain or branched alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxy or alkylthio with up to 6 carbon atoms each or by straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms, which in turn is substituted with up to 2 identically or differently by hydroxyl, benzyloxy, trifluoromethyl, benzoyl, straight chain or branched alkoxy, oxyacyl or carbonyl with up to 4 carbon atoms each and/or phenyl, which may in turn be substituted with a halogen, trifuoromethyl or trifluoromethoxy, and/or the formed carbocyclic rings are optionally substituted, also geminally, with up to 5 identical or different substituents in the form of phenyl, benzoyl, thiophenyl or sulfonylbenzyl, which in turn are optionally substituted by halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy or nitro, and/or optionally are substituted by a radical of
v x- , X j
Figure imgf000074_0001
, V_/ , or Rχ-32 Rχ-33; e is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7; fis 1 or 2; Rχ-23 and Rχ- 4 are identical or different and denote hydrogen, cycloalkyl with 3 to 6 carbon atoms, straight chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms, benzyl or phenyl, that is optionally substituted with up to 2 identically or differently by halogen, trifluoromethyl, cyano, phenyl or nitro, and/or the formed carbocyclic rings are substituted
optionally by a spiro-linked radical of 1 ,2
Figure imgf000074_0002
; -SO2Ph; -[C(O)]dNRχ.23Rχ.24; or =O; wherein Wx is oxygen or sulfur; Yx and Y'χ together form a 2 to 6 membered straight chain or branched alkylene chain; c is 1, 2, 3, or 4; d is O or 1; Rχ-25, Rχ-26, Rχ-27, Rχ-28, Rχ-29, Rχ-30 and Rx-3ι each represent independently hydrogen, trifluoromethyl, phenyl, halogen or sfraight chain or branched alkyl or alkoxy with up to 6 carbon atoms each; or Rχ-25 and Rχ-26 or Rχ-27 and Rχ-28 respectively form together a straight chain or branched alkyl chain with up to 6 carbon atoms; or Rχ-25 and Rχ-26 or Rχ. 7 and Rχ-28 each together form a radical of
wx . Wx has the meaning given above; g is a number equaling 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7; Rχ-32 and Rχ-33 form together a 3- to 7- membered heterocycle,. which contains an oxygen or sulfur atom or a group with the formula SO, SO2 or -NRχ-34; and Rx-3 is hydrogen, phenyl, benzyl or straight or branched alkyl with up to 4 carbon atoms. Procedures for the preparation of compounds of formula X are described in WO
9914215, which is hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor of formula X is selected from the group consisting of 2-cyclopentyl-5-hydroxy-7,7-dimethyl-4-(3-thienyl)-3-(4-trifluorome- thylbenxoyl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinoline; 2-cyclopentyl-3-[fluoro-(4- trifluoromethylphenyl)methyl]-5-hydiOxy-7,7-dimethyl-4-(3-thienyl)-5,6,7,8- tetrahydroquinoline; and 2-cyclopentyl-5 -hydroxy-7,7-dimethyl-4-(3 -thienyl)-3 - (trifluoromethylbenxyl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinoline. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are substituted tetrahydro naphthalines and related compound both of which are represented by formula XI:
Figure imgf000075_0001
XI and stereoisomers, stereoisomer mixtures, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; wherein Aχι is for cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms, or stands for aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms, or stands for a 5- to 7-membered, saturated, partially unsaturated or unsaturated, possibly benzocondensated, heterocycle with up to 4 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of S, N, and O; wherein aryl and the heterocyclic ring systems mentioned above are substituted up to 5-fold, identical or different, by cyano, halogen, nitro, carboxyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoro- methoxy, or by straight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylthio, alkoxycarbonyl, oxyalkoxycarbonyl or alkoxy each with up to 7 carbon atoms, or -NRχι-3Rχι-4; Rχι-3 and Rχι.4 each represent independently hydrogen, phenyl, or straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms; Dχι is a radical of Rχι-5-L-, -C(Rχι-6)(Rχι.7)(Rχι-8), or Rχι-9-Tχι-Vχι-Xχι-; Rχι-5, Rχι-6 and Rχι-9 each represent independently cycloalkyl with 3 to 6 carbon atoms, or denote aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms, or denote a 5- to 7-membered, possibly benzocondensated, saturated or unsaturated, mono-, bi- or tricyclic heterocycle with up to 4 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of S, N, and O; wherein said cycles are optionallyt substituted in the case of the nitrogen-containing rings also via the N-function up to 5-fold, identical or different, by halogen, trifluoromethyl nitro, hydroxy, cyano, carboxyl, trifluoromethoxy, straight-chain or branched acyl, alkyl, alkylthio, alkylalkoxy, alkoxy or alkoxycarbonyl with up to 6 carbon atoms each by aryl or trifluoromethyl substituted aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms each, or by a optionally benzocondensated aromatic 5- to 7-membered heterocycle with up to 3 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of S, N and O; and optionally substituted by -ORχι-10, -SRχι-l l5 -SO2Rχι-12 or -
Figure imgf000076_0001
RXMO, Rχ-π and Rχι-12 each represent independentlye aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which itself is substituted up to 2-fold, identical or different, by phenyl, halogen, or by sfraight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms; Rχι-13 and Rχ-i-14 are identical or different and have the meaning given above for Rχι-3 and Rχι-4; or
Figure imgf000076_0002
Rχι-7 is hydrogen, halogen or methyl; or Rχι-7 and Rχι-8 together form a radical of the formula =O or =NRχM7; Rχ_! is hydrogen, halogen, azido, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethoxy, straight-chain or branched alkoxy or alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms each, or a radical of - NRX SRX-KJ; RX 5 and Rχι-16 are identical or different and have the meaning given above for Rχ_ 13 and Rx-14; RXM7 is hydrogen or straight-chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy or acyl with up to 6 carbon atoms each; Lχι is a straight-chain or branched alkylene- or alkenylene chain with up to 8 carbon atoms each, which is possibly substituted up to 2-fold by hydroxy; Tχι and Xχι each represent independently a straight-chain or branched alkylene chain with up to 8 carbon atoms, or Tχι and Xχι are a bond; Vχι is oxygen, sulfur, or -NRχι-18; RXMS is hydrogen or straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms, or phenyl; Eχι is cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms, or stands for straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, which is possibly substituted by cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms or hydroxy, or stands for phenyl, which is optionally substituted by halogen or trifluoromethyl; RXM and Rχι-2 together form a sfraight-chain or branched alkylene chain with up to
7 carbon atoms, which are substituted by a carbonyl group and optionally by a radical of
Figure imgf000077_0001
; -ORx-19; or l,2
Figure imgf000077_0002
; wherein a and b represent independently 1, 2 or 3; Rχι-i9 is hydrogen, cycloalkyl with 3 to 7 carbon atoms, straight-chain or branched silylalkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, or straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, which is possibly substituted by hydroxy, straight-chain or branched alkoxy with up to 6 carbon atoms, or by phenyl, which itself can be substituted by halogen, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy or by phenyl substituted by phenyl or tetrazol; and said alkyl is optionally substituted by -ORn-22; Rχι-22 is a straight-chain or branched acyl with up to 4 carbon atoms, or benzyl; Rχι_19 is a straight-chain or branched acyl with up to 20 carbon atoms or benzoyl, which is possibly substituted by halogen, trifluoromethyl, nitro or trifluoromethoxy, or is sfraight-chain or branched fluoroacyl with up to 8 carbon atoms and 9 fluorine atoms; Rχι-20 and Rχι_21 represent independently hydrogen, phenyl or sfraight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms; or Rχι-20 and Rχι-2ι together form a 3- to 6- membered carbocycle, and, optionally geminally, the alkylene chain formed by RXM and Rχι-2, is optionally substituted up to 6-fold, identical or different, by trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, nitrile, halogen, carboxyl, nifro, azido, cyano, cycloalkyl or cycloalkyloxy with 3 to 7 carbon atoms each, by sfraight-chain or branched alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxy or alkoxythio with up to 6 carbon atoms each, or by straight- chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms, which itself is substituted up to 2-fold, identical or different by hydroxyl, benzyloxy, trifluoromethyl, benzoyl, straight-chain or branched alkoxy, oxyacyl or carboxyl with up to 4 carbon atoms each, and/or phenyl which itself can be substituted by halogen, trifluoromethyl or trifluoromethoxy, and/or the alkylene chain formed by RX and Rχι-2 is substituted, also geminally, possibly up to 5-fold, identical or different, by phenyl, benzoyl, thiophenyl or sulfobenzyl-which themselves are optionally substituted by halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy or nitro, and optionally the alkylene chain formed by Rχι- i and Rχι-2 is possibly substituted by a radical of
1,2
Figure imgf000078_0001
; -SO2Ph; -[C(O)]dNRχι-23Rχι-24; or =O; c is 1, 2, 3 or 4; d is O or 1; Rχι-23 and Rχι- 4 each represent independently hydrogen, cycloalkyl with 3 to 6 carbon atoms, straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms, benzyl or phenyl, which is optionally substituted up to 2-fold identical or different, by halogen, trifluoromethyl, cyano, phenyl or nifro, and/or the alkylene chain formed by RXM and Rχι_2 is optionally substituted by a spiro-jointed radical of Rχ| 2 Rxi-26 Lir xr
Figure imgf000078_0003
(C-Rχ|-27 -Rχi-28 •)e,
Figure imgf000078_0002
, or RX'-32 RXI-33 ; Wχι is oxygen or sulfur; Yxi and Y'χι together form a 2- to 6-membered straight-chain or branched alkylene chain; e is a number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7; fis 1 or 2; Rχι-25, Rχι-26, Rχι-27, Rχι-28, Rχι-29, Rχι-30 and Rχι-31 each represent independently hydrogen, trifluoromethyl, phenyl, halogen, or straight-chain or branched alkyl or alkoxy with up to 6 carbon atoms each; or Rχι-25 and Rχι- 6 or Rχι-27 and Rχι-28 together form a straight-chain or branched alkyl chain with up to 6 carbon atoms; or Rχι-25 and Rχι-26 or Rχι_ 27 and Rχι- 8 together form a radical of fl Wχ' Wx, . g is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7; Rχι-32 and Rχι-33 together form a 3- to 7-membered heterocycle that contains an oxygen- or sulfur atom or a group of the formula SO, SO2 or -NRχι_3 ; and Rχι-34 is hydrogen, phenyl, benzyl, or straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 4 carbon atoms.
Procedures for the preparation of compounds of formula XI are described WO 9914174, all of which is hereby incoφorated by reference. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are 2-aryl-substituted pyridines represented by formula XII:
Figure imgf000079_0001
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, and stereoisomers thereof; wherein Axπ and Exπ each represent independently aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms optionally substituted, up to 5 -fold identical or different, by halogen, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro or by sfraight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, hydroxy alkyl or alkoxy with up to 7 carbon atoms each, or by -NRXIM Rχπ-2; RXIM and Rχn-2 each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen, phenyl, or sfraight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms; Dxπ is a straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, which is substituted by hydroxy; Lxπ represents independently for each occurrence cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms or sfraight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted by cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms, or by hydroxy; Txπ is a radical of Rχπ-3-Xχπ- or -C(Rχπ-4)(Rχιι-5)(Rχn-6); Rχπ-3 and Rχn-4 each represent independently cycloalkyl with 3 to 8 carbon atoms, or aryl with 6 to 10 carbon atoms, or a 5- to 7-membered aromatic, possibly benzocondensated heterocycle with up to 3 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of S, N and O; wherein said cycloalkyl, aryl, and aromatic groups are optionally substituted up to 3-fold identical or different, by trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, halogen, hydroxy, carboxyl, nitro, by straight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, alkoxy or alkoxycarbonyl with up to 6 carbon atoms each or by phenyl, phenoxy or phenylthio which in turn can be substituted by halogen trifluoromethyl or trifluoromethoxy; and wherein said cycles are possibly substituted by -NRχπ-7Rχπ-8; Rχπ-7 and Rχn-8 are identical or different and have the meaning of RXIM and Rχn-2 given above; Xχιι is a straight-chain or branched alkyl or alkenyl with 2 to 10 carbon atoms each, possibly substituted up to 2-fold by hydroxy or halogen; Rxn-5 is hydrogen; Rχπ-6 represents independently for each occurrence hydrogen, halogen, mercapto, azido, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethoxy, straight-chain or branched alkoxy with up to 5 carbon atoms, or a radical of BNRχπ-9Rχπ-ι0; or Rχπ-5 and Rχπ-6, together with the carbon atom, form a carbonyl group; and Rxπ-9 and Rχn-10 are identical or different and have the meaning of RXIM and Rχπ-2 given above. Procedures for preparation of the compounds of formula XII are described in EP 796846-Al; U.S. Pat. No. 6,127,383; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,925,645, all of which are hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula XII selected from the group consisting of 4,6-bis-(p-fluorophenyl)-2-isopropyl-3-[(p- trifluoromethylphenyl)-(fluoro)-methyl]-5-(l-hydroxyethyl)pyridine; 2,4-bis-(4- fluorophenyl)-6-isopropyl-5-[4-(trifluoromethylphenyl)-fluoromethyl]-3- hydroxymethyl)pyridine; and 2,4-bis-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-isopropyl-5-[2-(3- trifluoromethylphenyl)- vinyl] -3 -hydroxymethyl)pyridine. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are represented by formula XIII:
Figure imgf000080_0001
xπi and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, or stereoisomers thereof; wherein Rxm is a straight chain or branched C O alkyl; sfraight chain or branched C2-1o alkenyl; halogenated C1-4 lower alkyl; C3-10 cycloalkyl that may be substituted; C5-8 cycloalkenyl that may be substituted; C3-10 cycloalkyl CMO alkyl that may be substituted; aryl that may be substituted; aralkyl that may be substituted; or a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic group having 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms or sulfur atoms that may be substituted; Xχιπ-1, Xχπι-2, Xχπι-3, Xχm-4 each represent independently hydrogen, halogen, Cι-4 lower alkyl, halogenated C1-4 lower alkyl, C1-4 lower alkoxy, cyano, nifro, acyl, or aryl; Yxπi is -CO- or BSO2-; and Zχιπ is hydrogen or a mercapto protecting group. Procedures for preparation of the compounds of formula XIII are described in WO 98/35937, which is hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula XIII selected from the group consisting of N,N'-(dithiodi-2,l-phenylene)bis[2,2-dimethyl- propanamide]; N,N'-(dithiodi-2,l-phenylene)bis[l-methyl-cyclohexanecarboxamide]; N,N'- (dithiodi-2,l-phenylene)bis[l-(3-methylbutyl)-cyclopentanecarb-oxamide]; N,N'-(dithiodi- 2, 1 -phenylene)bis[ 1 -(3 -methylbutyl)-cyclohexanecarbo-xamide] ; N,N'-(dithiodi-2, 1 - phenylene)bis[ 1 -(2-ethylbutyl)-cyclohexanecarbox-amide] ; N,N'-(dithiodi-2, 1 - phenylene)bis-tricyclo[3.3.1.13'7]decane-l-carboxamide; propanethioic acid, 2-methyl-5- [2[[[l-(2-ethylbutyl)cyclohexyl]carbonyl]amino]phenyl] ester; propanethioic acid, 2,2- dimethyl, S-[2-[[[l-(2-ethylbutyl)cyclohexyl]carbonyl]amino]phenyl] ester; and ethanethioic acid, S-[2-[[[l-(2-ethylbutyl)cyclohexyl]carbonyl]amino]phenyl] ester. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are polycyclic aryl and heteroaryl tertiary-heteroalkylamines represented by formula XIV:
Figure imgf000082_0001
XIV and pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvates, or hydrates thereof; wherein nxrv is an integer selected from 0 through 5; Rχrv-ι is selected from the group consisting of haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkoxyalkyl, and haloalkenyloxyalkyl; Xxrv is selected from the group consisting of O, H, F, S, S(O),NH, N(OH), N(alkyl), and N(alkoxy); Rχrv-i6 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, aryloxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkenyloxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, aralkoxyalkyl, heteroaralkoxyalkyl, alkylsulfinylalkyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, cycloalkyl, ' cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkylalkenyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkenylalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkenyl, haloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, halocycloalkoxyalkyl, halocycloalkenyloxyalkyl, perhaloaryl, perhaloaralkyl, perhaloaryloxyalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, monocarboalkoxyalkyl, monocarboalkoxy, dicarboalkoxyalkyl, monocarboxamido, monocyanoalkyl, dicyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, acyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, dialkoxyphosphonoalkyl, trialkylsilyl, and a spacer selected from the group consisting of a covalent single bond and a linear spacer moiety having from 1 through 4 contiguous atoms linked to the point of bonding of an aromatic substituent selected from the group consisting of Rχrv-4, Rχrv-8, Rχrv-9, and Rχrv-13 to form a heterocyclyl ring having from 5 through 10 contiguous members with the provisos that said spacer moiety is other than a covalent single bond when Rχrv-2 is alkyl and there is no Rχrv-ι6 wherein X is H or F; Dχrv-ι, Dχrv-2, Jχrv-ι, Jχrv-2 and Kxrv-i are independently selected from the group consisting of C, N, O, S and a covalent bond with the provisos that no more than one of Dχrv-ι, Dχrv-2, Jχrv-ι, Jχrv-2 and Kxrv-i is a covalent bond, no more than one of Dχrv-ι, Dxrv- 2, Jχrv-ι, Jχrv-2 and Kχrv-ι is O, no more than one of DXΓV-Ϊ, Dχrv-2, Jχrv-ι, Jχrv-2 and Kxrv-i is S, one of Dχrv-1, Dχrv-2, Jχrv-ι, Jχrv-2 and Kxrv-i must be a covalent bond when two of Dxrv- 1, Dχrv-2, Jχrv-ι, Jχrv-2 and Kχrv-ι are O and S, and no more than four of DχιV-ι, Dχrv-2, Jxrv- 1, Jχrv-2 and Kxrv-i are N; Dχrv-3, Dχrv-4, Jχrv-3, Jχrv-4 and Kχrv-2 are independently selected from the group consisting of C, N, O, S and a covalent bond provided that no more than one of Dχrv-3, Dχrv-4, Jχrv-3, Jχrv-4 and Kχrv-2 is a covalent bond, no more than one of Dχrv-3, Dχrv-4, Jχrv-3, Jχrv-4 and Kχrv-2 is O, no more than one of Dχrv-3, Dχrv-4, Jχrv-3, Jχrv-4 and Kχrv-2 is S, one of Dχrv-3, Dχrv-4, Jχrv-3, Jχrv-4 and Kχrv-2 must be a covalent bond when two of Dχrv-3, Dxrv- 4, Jχrv-3, Jχrv-4 and Kχrv-2 are O and S, and no more than four of D, Dχrv-4, Jχrv-3, Jχrv-4 and
Figure imgf000083_0001
Rχrv-2 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrido, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, aminoalkyl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, aralkoxyalkyl, aryloxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, alkenyloxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, aralkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkylalkenyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkenylalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, aloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, halocycloalkoxy, halocycloalkoxyalkyl, halocycloalkenyloxyalkyl, perhaloaryl, perhaloaralkyl, perhaloaryloxyalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylthioalkyl, heteroarallcylthioalkyl, monocarboalkoxyalkyl, dicarboalkoxyalkyl, monocyanoalkyl, dicyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfinylalkyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, haloalkylsulfinyl, haloalkylsulfonyl, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfonyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, aralkylsulfinyl, aralkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfinyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfinylalkyl, cycloalkylsufonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfinylalkyl, aralkylsulfmylalkyl, aralkylsulfonylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboalkoxy, carboxamide, carboxamidoalkyl, carboaralkoxy, dialkoxyphosphono, diaralkoxyphosphono, dialkoxyphosphonoalkyl, and diaralkoxyphosphonoalkyl; or Rχrv-2 and Rχrv-3 are taken together to form a linear spacer moiety selected from the group consisting of a covalent single bond and a moiety having from 1 through 6 contiguous atoms to form a ring selected from the group consisting of a cycloalkyl having from 3 through 8 contiguous members, a cycloalkenyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members, and a heterocyclyl having from 4 through 8 contiguous members; Rχrv-3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, hydroxy, halo, cyano, aryloxy, hydroxyalkyl, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, acyl, sulfhydryl, acylamido, alkoxy, alkylthio, arylthio, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, aryloxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, heteroaryltliio, aralkylthio, aralkoxyalkyl, alkylsulfinylalkyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, aralkylthioalkyl, heteroaralkylthioalkyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, alkenyloxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkylalkenyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkenylalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, haloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, halocycloalkoxy, halocycloalkoxyalkyl, halocycloalkenyloxyalkyl, perhaloaryl, perhaloaralkyl, perhaloaryloxyalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylthioalkyl, monocarboalkoxyalkyl, dicarboalkoxyalkyl, monocyanoalkyl, dicyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, haloalkylsulfinyl, haloalkylsulfonyl, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfonyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, aralkylsulfinyl, aralkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfinyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfinylalkyl, cycloalkylsufonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfinylalkyl, aralkylsulfinylalkyl, aralkylsulfonylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboalkoxy, carboxamide, carboxamidoalkyl, carboaralkoxy, dialkoxyphosphono, diaralkoxyphosphono, dialkoxyphosphonoalkyl, and diaralkoxyphosphonoalkyl; Yxrv is selected from a group consisting of a covalent single bond,(C(Rχιv-i4)2)qxrv wherein qxrv is an integer selected from 1 and 2, and (CH(Rχrv-i4))gχrv- χιv-(CH(Rχrv- i4))pxrv wherein gxrv and pxrv are integers independently selected from 0 and 1; Rχrv-i4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrido, hydroxy, halo, cyano, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, hydroxyalkyl, acyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, sulfhydryl, acylamido, alkoxy, alkylthio, arylthio, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, aryloxyalkyl, aralkoxyalkylalkoxy, alkylsulfinylalkyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, aralkylthioalkyl, heteroaralkoxythioalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, alkenyloxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkylalkenyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkenylalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, haloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, halocycloalkoxy, halocycloalkoxyalkyl, halocycloalkenyloxyalkyl, perhaloaryl, perhaloaralkyl, perhaloaryloxyalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylthioalkyl, heteroaralkylthioalkyl, monocarboalkoxyalkyl, dicarboalkoxyalkyl, monocyanoalkyl, dicyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, haloalkylsulfinyl, haloalkylsulfonyl, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfonyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, aralkylsulfinyl, aralkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfinyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfinylalkyl, cycloalkylsufonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfinylalkyl, aralkylsulfinylalkyl, aralkylsulfonylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboalkoxy, carboxamide, carboxamidoalkyl, carboaralkoxy, dialkoxyphosphono, diaralkoxyphosphono, dialkoxyphosphonoalkyl, diaralkoxyphosphonoalkyl, a spacer selected from a moiety having a chain length of 3 to 6 atoms connected to the point of bonding selected from the group consisting of Rχrv-9 and Rχrv-i3 to form a ring selected from the group consisting of a cycloalkenyl ring having from 5 through 8 contiguous members and a heterocyclyl ring having from 5 through 8 contiguous members, and a spacer selected from a moiety having a chain length of 2 to 5 atoms connected to the point of bonding selected from the group consisting of Rχrv-4 and Rχrv-8 to form a heterocyclyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members; and with the proviso that when Yxrv is a covalent bond, an Rχrv-i4 substituent is not attached to Yxrv; Rχrv-i4 and Rχrv-i4 when bonded to the different atoms are taken together to form a group selected from the group consisting of a covalent bond, alkylene, haloalkylene, and a spacer selected from a group consisting of a moiety having a chain length of 2 to 5 atoms connected to form a ring selected from the group of a saturated cycloalkyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members, a cycloalkenyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members, and a heterocyclyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members; Rχrv-i4 and Rχrv-i4 when bonded to the same atom are taken together to form a group selected from the group consisting of oxo, thiono, alkylene, haloalkylene, and a spacer selected from the group consisting of a moiety having a chain length of 3 to 7 atoms connected to form a ring selected from the group consisting of a cycloalkyl having from 4 through 8 contiguous members, a cycloalkenyl having from 4 through 8 contiguous members, and a heterocyclyl having from 4 through 8 contiguous members; Wxrv is selected from the group consisting of O, C(O), C(S), C(O)N(R.sub.XIV- 14), C(S)N(Rχrv-ι4), (Rχrv-i4)NC(O), (Rχrv-i4)NC(S), Si S(O), S(O)2, S(O)2N(Rχrv-i4), (Rχrv-i4)NS(O)2, and N(Rχrv-i4) with the proviso that Rχrv-14 is not halo and cyano; Zxrv is independently selected from the group consisting of a covalent single bond, (C(Rχrv-i5)2)qxrv-2 wherein qχrv-2 is an integer selected from 1 and 2, and (CH(Rχrv-i5))j- xrv- W-(CH(Rχrv-i5))kxrv wherein jxrv and kxrv are integers independently selected from 0 and 1; provided that when ZXrv is a covalent single bond, an Rχrv-ιs substituent is not attached to Zxrv; Rχrv-ι5 is independently selected, when Z rv is (C(Rχrv-ιs)2)qxrv wherein qxrv is an integer selected from 1 and 2, from the group consisting of hydrido, hydroxy, halo, cyano, aryloxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, hydroxyalkyl, acyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, sulfhydryl, acylamido, alkoxy, alkylthio, arylthio, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, aryloxyalkyl, aralkoxyalkyl, alkylsulfinylalkyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, aralkylthioalkyl, heteroaralkylthioalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, alkenyloxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkylalkenyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkenylalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, haloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, halocycloalkoxy, halocycloalkoxyalkyl, halocycloalkenyloxyalkyl, perhaloaryl, perhaloaralkyl, perhaloaryloxyalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylthioalkyl, heteroaralkylthioalkyl, monocarboalkoxyalkyl, dicarboalkoxyalkyl, monocyanoalkyl, dicyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, haloalkylsulfmyl, haloalkylsulfonyl, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfonyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, aralkylsulfinyl, aralkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfinyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfinylalkyl, cycloalkylsufonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfinylalkyl, aralkylsulfinylalkyl, aralkylsulfonylalkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, carboalkoxy, carboxamide, carboxamidoalkyl, carboaralkoxy, dialkoxyphosphono, diaralkoxyphosphono, dialkoxyphosphonoalkyl, diaralkoxyphosphonoalkyl, a spacer selected from a moiety having a chain length of 3 to 6 atoms connected to the point of bonding selected from the group consisting of Rχrv-4 and Rχrv-8 to form a ring selected from the group consisting of a cycloalkenyl ring having from 5 through 8 contiguous members and a heterocyclyl ring having from 5 through 8 contiguous members, and a spacer selected from a moiety having a chain length of 2 to 5 atoms connected to the point of bonding selected from the group consisting of Rχrv-9 and Rχrv-13 to form a heterocyclyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members; Rχrv-i5 and Rχrv-ιs, when bonded to the different atoms, are taken together to form a group selected from the group consisting of a covalent bond, alkylene, haloalkylene, and a spacer selected from a group consisting of a moiety having a chain length of 2 to 5 atoms connected to form a ring selected from the group of a saturated cycloalkyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members, a cycloalkenyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members, and a heterocyclyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members; Rχrv-i5 and Rχrv-i5 when bonded to the same atom are taken together to form a group selected from the group consisting of oxo, thiono, alkylene, haloalkylene, and a spacer selected from the group consisting of a moiety having a chain length of 3 to 7 atoms connected to form a ring selected from the group consisting of a cycloalkyl having from 4 through 8 contiguous members, a cycloalkenyl having from 4 through 8 contiguous members, and a heterocyclyl having from 4 through 8 contiguous members; Rχrv-i5 is independently selected, when Zxrv is (CH(Rχrv-ι5))jxrv-W-(CH(Rχrv- ι5))kxrv wherein jxrv and kxrv are integers independently selected from 0 and 1, from the group consisting of hydrido, halo, cyano, aryloxy, carboxyl, acyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, hydroxyalkyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, acylamido, alkoxy, alkylthio, arylthio, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, aryloxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, heteroaryloxyalkyl, aralkoxyalkyl, heteroaralkoxyalkyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, alkylsulfinylalkyl, alkenyloxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkylalkenyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkenylalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, haloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, halocycloalkoxy, halocycloalkoxyalkyl, halocycloalkenyloxyalkyl, perhaloaryl, perhaloaralkyl, perhaloaryloxyalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylthioalkyl, heteroaralkylthioalkyl, monocarboalkoxyalkyl, dicarboalkoxyalkyl, monocyanoalkyl, dicyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, haloalkylsulfinyl, haloalkylsulfonyl, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfonyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, aralkylsulfinyl, aralkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfinyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfinylalkyl, cycloalkylsufonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfinylalkyl, aralkylsulfinylalkyl, aralkylsulfonylalkyl, carboxyalkyl, carboalkoxy, carboxamide, carboxamidoalkyl, carboaralkoxy, dialkoxyphosphonoalkyl, diaralkoxyphosphonoalkyl, a spacer selected from a linear moiety having a chain length of 3 to 6 atoms connected to the point of bonding selected from the group consisting of Rχrv-4 and Rχrv-8 to form a ring selected from the group consisting of a cycloalkenyl ring having from 5 through 8 contiguous members and a heterocyclyl ring having from 5 through 8 contiguous members, and a spacer selected from a linear moiety having a chain length of 2 to 5 atoms connected to the point of bonding selected from the group consisting of Rχrv-9 and Rχrv-i3 to form a heterocyclyl ring having from 5 through 8 contiguous members; Rχrv-4, Rχv-5, Rχrv-6 Rχrv-7, Rχrv-8, Rχv-9, Rχrv-ιo, Rχrv-n, Rχrv-12, and Rχrv-13 are independently selected from the group consisting of perhaloaryloxy, alkanoylalkyl, alkanoylalkoxy, alkanoyloxy, N-aryl-N-alkylamino, heterocyclylalkoxy, heterocyclylthio, hydroxyalkoxy, carboxamidoalkoxy, alkoxycarbonylalkoxy, alkoxycarbonylalkenyloxy, aralkanoylalkoxy, aralkenoyl, N-alkylcarboxamido, N-haloalkylcarboxamido, N- cycloalkylcarboxamido, N-arylcarboxamidoalkoxy, cycloalkylcarbonyl, cyanoalkoxy, heterocyclylcarbonyl, hydrido, carboxy, heteroaralkylthio, heteroaralkoxy, cycloalkylamino, acylalkyl, acylalkoxy, aroylalkoxy, heterocyclyloxy, aralkylaryl, aralkyl, aralkenyl, aralkynyl, heterocyclyl, perhaloaralkyl, aralkylsulfonyl, aralkylsulfonylalkyl, aralkylsulfinyl, aralkylsulfinylalkyl, halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkenyl, cycloalkylsulfinyl, cycloalkylsulfinylalkyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfonylalkyl, heteroarylamino, N- heteroarylamino-N-alkylamino, heteroarylaminoalkyl, haloalkylthio, alkanoyloxy, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, haloalkoxylalkyl, heteroaralkoxy, cycloalkoxy, cycloalkenyloxy, cycloalkoxyalkyl, cycloalkylalkoxy, cycloalkenyloxyalkyl, cycloalkylenedioxy, halocycloalkoxy, halocycloalkoxyalkyl, halocycloalkenyloxy, halocycloalkenyloxyalkyl, hydroxy, amino, thio, nitro, lower alkylamino, alkylthio, alkylthioalkyl, arylamino, aralkylamino, arylthio, arylthioalkyl, heteroaralkoxyalkyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfinylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonylalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, haloalkylsulfinylalkyl, haloalkylsulfonylalkyl, alkylsulfonamido, alkylaminosulfonyl, amidosulfonyl, monoalkylamidosulfonyl, dialkyl amidosulfonyl, monoarylamidosulfonyl, arylsulfonamido, diarylamidosulfonyl, monoalkyl monoaryl amidosulfonyl, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylthio, heteroarylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, heterocyclylsulfonyl, heterocyclylthio, alkanoyl, alkenoyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, aralkanoyl, heteroaralkanoyl, haloalkanoyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkenyloxy, alkenyloxyalky, alkylenedioxy, haloalkylenedioxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkanoyl, cycloalkenyl, lower cycloalkylalkyl, lower cycloalkenylalkyl, halo, haloalkyl; haloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, hydroxyhaloalkyl, hydroxyaralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydoxyheteroarallcyl, haloalkoxyalkyl, aryl, heteroaralkynyL aryloxy, aralkoxy, aryloxyalkyl, saturated heterocyclyl, partially saturated heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heteroaryloxyalkyl, arylalkenyl, heteroarylalkenyl, carboxyalkyl, carboalkoxy, alkoxycarboxamido, alkylamidocarbonylamido, arylamidocarbonylamido, carboalkoxyalkyl, carboalkoxyalkenyl, carboaralkoxy, carboxamido, carboxamidoalkyl, cyano, carbohaloalkoxy, phosphono, phosphonoalkyl, diaralkoxyphosphono, and diaralkoxyphosphonoalkyl; provided that there are one to five non-hydrido ring substituents Rχrv-4, Rχrv-5, Rχrv-6, Rχrv-7, and Rχrv-8 present; that there are one to five non-hydrido ring substituents Rχrv-9, Rχrv-ιo, Rχv-n, Rχrv-12, and Rχrv-13 present; and Rχrv-4, Rχrv-5, Rχιv-6, Rχv-7, Rχv-8, Rχv-9, Rχrv-10, Rχrv-11, Rχrv-12, and Rχrv-13 are each independently selected to maintain the tetravalent nature of carbon, trivalent nature of nitrogen, the divalent nature of sulfur, and the divalent nature of oxygen; Rχrv-4 and Rχrv-5, Rχrv-5 and Rχrv-6, Rχrv-6 and Rχrv-7, Rχrv-7 and Rχrv-8, Rχrv-8 and Rxrv-9, Rχrv-9 and Rχrv-10, Rχrv-10 and Rχrv-11, Rχrv-11 and Rχrv-12, and Rχrv-12 and Rχrv-13 are independently selected to form spacer pairs wherein a spacer pair is taken together to form a linear moiety having from 3 through 6 contiguous atoms connecting the points of bonding of said spacer pair members to form a ring selected from the group consisting of a cycloalkenyl ring having 5 through 8 contiguous members, a partially saturated heterocyclyl ring having 5 through 8 contiguous members, a heteroaryl ring having 5 through 6 contiguous members, and an aryl with the provisos that no more than one of the group consisting of spacer pairs Rχrv-4 and Rχrv-s, Rχrv-5 and Rχrv-6, Rχrv-6 and Rχrv-7, and Rχrv-7 and Rχrv-8 are used at the same time and that no more than one of the group consisting of spacer pairs Rχrv-9 and Rχrv-10, Rxrv-io and Rχrv-11, Rχrv-11 and Rχrv-12, and Rχrv-12 and Rχrv-13 are used at the same time; and Rχrv-4 and Rχrv-9, Rχrv-4 and Rχrv-13, Rχrv-8 and Rχrv-9, and Rχrv-8 and Rχrv-13 are independently selected to form a spacer pair wherein said spacer pair is taken together to form a linear moiety wherein said linear moiety forms a ring selected from the group consisting of a partially saturated heterocyclyl ring having from 5 through 8 contiguous members and a heteroaryl ring having from 5 through 6 contiguous members with the proviso that no more than one of the group consisting of spacer pairs Rχrv-4 and Rχrv-9, Rχrv-4 and Rχrv-13, Rχrv-8 and Rχrv-9, and Rχrv-8 and Rχrv-13 is used at the same time. Procedures for preparation of the compounds of formula XIV are described in WO 00/18721, which is hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor of formula XIV is selected from the group consisting of 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxyphenpxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroeth- oxy)-phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- isoρropylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3 -(1,1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 -cyclopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1,2,2- tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-(2- furyl)phenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino] 1,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]\methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(4-methlylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy) phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2-fluoro-5- bromophenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenoxy]phenyl][[3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenoxy]phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 ,5 - dimethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy) phenyl]methyl]amino]-l ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl][[3-(l, 1,2,2- tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-t- butylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] 1,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-methylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(5,6,7,8- tefrahydro-2-naphthoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(phenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-[3-(N,N- dimethylamino)phenoxy]phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoro ethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l, l,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3- (trifluoromethoxy)-phenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [ [3 - (1,1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3-(trifluoromethyl)- phenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l, 1,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3 -[ [3 ,5 -dimethylphenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1- frifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3- (trifluoromethylthio)phenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino]- l,l,-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3- (1,1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3 -[ [3 , 5-difluorophenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3- [cyclohexylmethoxy]phenyl] amino] -1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2-difluoromethoxy- 4-pyridyloxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2-trifluoromethyl-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl][[3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)- phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- difluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl][[3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)-phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(3-trifluoromethylthio)phenoxy]phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(4-chloro-3 - trifluoromethylphenoxy)phenyl][[3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)-phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1,1 ,-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [[3- (pentafluoroethymethyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- isopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]-amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 -cyclopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -
(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-(2- furyl)phenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]-amino]- 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2- propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(2,3 -dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] - l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol;
3 - [ [3 -(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-ρropanol; 3-[[3-(4-methylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2-fluoro-5-bromophenoxy)phenyl] [[3- (pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3- ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol;
3-[[3-[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)ρhenoxy]ρhenyl] [[3- (pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-[3- (pentafluoroethyl)phenoxy]phenyl][[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3,5-dimethylphenoxy)phenyl][[3-
(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]-amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-(3-t-butylphenoxy)phenyl][[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol;
3 -[ [3 -(3 -methylρhenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -pentafluoroethyl) phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(5,6,7,8-tefrahydro-2-naphthoxy)phenyl][[3- (pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 -[[3- (phenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-[3-(N,N-dimethylamino)phenoxy]phenyl][[3- (pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3- (pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [[3 -(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3 - [ [3 -(trifluoromethyl)phenyl] - methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-
(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3,5-dimethylphenyl]methoxy]-phenyl]amino]-l,l,l- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluoromethylthio)phenyl]- methoxy]phenyl] amino] -l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-
(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3 - [ [3 , 5-difluorophenyl]methoxy] -phenyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3-
[cyclohexylmethoxy]phenyl] amino] -l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2-difluoromethoxy- 4-pyridyloxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl] methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-(2-frifluoromethyl-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl][[3-
(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 - difluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl] -methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [[ [3 -(3 -trifluoromethylthio)phenoxy]phenyl] [ [3 - (pentafluoroethyl)phenyl] methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3- trifluoromethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [[3- (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl] -methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 -[ [3 -(3 - isopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 -cyclopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl] methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-(2-furyl)phenoxy)phenyl] [[3- (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(2,3 - dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] - l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-methylphenoxy)phenyl][[3- heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2-fluoro-5- bromophenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl] -methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl][[3-(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]- amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenoxy]phenyl] [[3- (heptafluoropropyl)-phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 - [3 - pentafluoroethyl)phenoxy]phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl] -methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 ,5-dimethylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 - (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]-amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(heptafluoropropyl) phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 -t-butylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl) phenyl]methyl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-methylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3- (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(5,6,7,8- tetrahydro-2-naphthoxy)phenyl][[3-(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l ,1,- trifluoro-2-propanol;
3-[[3-(phenoxy)ρhenyl] [[3-(heptafluoroρropyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 -,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-[3-(N ,N-dimethylamino)phenoxy]phenyl][[3-(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]- methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] [3 - [[3 - (trifluoromethoxy)phenyl] -methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [ [3 - (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]- methoxy]phenyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-
(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3,5-dimethylphenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] [3 -[ [3 - (trifluoromethylthio)phenyl]-methoxy]phenyl] amino]- 1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3- (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3,5-difluorophenyl]methoxy]-phenyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(heptafluoropropyl) phenyl]methyl][3- [cyclohexylmethoxy]phenyl] -amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 -[ [3 -(2-difluoromethoxy- 4-pyridyloxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-(2-trifluoromethyl-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl][[3-(heptafluoropropyl) phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- difluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [[3 -(heptafluoropropyl) phenyl] -methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(3-trifluoromethylthio)phenoxy]phenyl][[3- (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]amino-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3- frifluoromethylphenoxy)phenyl][[3-(heptafluoropro- pyl)-phenyl] -methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxyphenoxy) phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]-methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- isopropylphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-methyl]amino]-l,l,l- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 -cyclopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-5-
(trifluoromethyl)phenyl] -methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 -(2- furyl)phenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(2,3 -dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl] - methyl] amino] -1 ,1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)ρhenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3- [ [3 -(4- methylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl] amino] -1 , 1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2-fluoro-5-bromophenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3- ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; 3-[[3-[3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenoxy]phenyl][[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-[3- (pentafluoroethyl)phenoxy]phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl]amino]- l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3,5-dimethylphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- ethylρhenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]-amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-t-butylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl]- amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-methylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl]-amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(5,6,7,8- tetrahydro-2-naphthoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5 -(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(phenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5-
(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-[3-(N,N- dimethylamino)phenoxy]phenyl][[2-fluoro-5-(trifluorom- ethyl)-phenyl]methyl]amino]- l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl][3-[[3- (trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[2- fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluoromethyl)- phenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-proρanol; 3-[[[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3 ,5-dimethylphenyl]-methoxy]phenyl] amino]- 1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluoromet- hylthio)-phenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 -[ [[2-fluoro-5 - (trifluoromethyl)ρhenyl]methyl] [3-[[3,5-difluorophenyl]-methoxy]phenyl]amino]-l , 1,1- trifluoro-2-ρropanol; 3-[[[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3- [cyclohexylmethox- y]-phenyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2- difluoromethoxy-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)- phenyl]methyl] amino] -1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2-trifluoromethyl-4- pyridyloxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l, l-trifluoro-2- propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 -difluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5 -(trifluoromethyl)- phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(3-trifluoromethylthio) phenoxy]phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2- propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(4-chloro-3 -trifluoromethylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-5 - (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [[3 -(3 - trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 -[[3-(3-isopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)ρhenyl] -methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 - cyclopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl] -methyl] amino] - 1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-(2-furyl)phenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl] -methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(2,3 - dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl] -methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4-
(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(4- methylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl] methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2-fluoro-5-bromophenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3- ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenoxy]phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-[3- (pentafluoroethyl)phenoxy] phenyl][[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl]amino]- l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3,5-dimethylphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4- (frifluoromethyl)phenyl]-methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl] -amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-t-butylphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]- amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-methylphenoxy) phenyl][[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl] -amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(5,6,7,8- tetrahydro-2-naphthoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-4-(trifluo- romethyl)-phenyl]methyl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(phenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-[3-(N,N- dimethylamino)phenoxy]phenyl][[2-fluoro-4-(trifluorom- ethyl)-phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3- (trifluoromethoxy)-phenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[2- fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluoromethyl)- phenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3,5-dimethylphenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]-l , 1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluoromet- hylthiό)-phenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]- 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3 - [ [3 ,5-difluorophenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-prop anol; 3 - [ [ [2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3 - [cyclohexylmethoxy]-phenyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2-difluoromethoxy- 4-pyridyloxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-(2-trifluoromethyl-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)- phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [[3 -(3 - difluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl] amino] - l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(3-trifluoromethylthio)phenoxy]phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; and 3 - [ [3 -(4-chloro-3 - trifluoromethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4-(trifl- uoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are substitued N-aliphatic- N-aromatic tertiary-heteroalkylamines represented by formula XV:
Figure imgf000096_0001
XV and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; wherein nxv is 1 or 2; Axv and Qxv are independently selected from the group consisting -CH2(CRχv- 37Rxv-38)vXi-(CRχv-33Rχv-34)uxv-Tχv-(CRχv-35Rχv-36)wXVH, a radical represented by formula AQ-1
Figure imgf000097_0001
AQ-1 , and a radical represented by formula AQ-2
Figure imgf000097_0002
AQ-2 provided that one of Axv and Qxv must be AQ-1 and that one of Axv and Qxv must be selected from the group consisting of AQ-2 and -CH2(CRχv-37Rχv-3s)vxv-(CRχv-33Rχv- 34)uXv-Tχv-(CRχv-35Rχv-36)wxv-H; Txv is selected from the group consisting of a single covalent bond, O, S, S(O), S(O)2, C(Rχv-33)=C(Rχv-35), and C≡C; Vxv is an integer selected from 0 through 1 provided that vxv is 1 when any one of Rχv-33, Rχv-34, Rχv-35, and Rχv-36 is aryl or heteroaryl; uxv and Wxv are integers independently selected from 0 through 6;
Figure imgf000097_0003
Dχv-1, Dχv-2, Jχv-ι, Jχv-2, and Kχv-ι are independently selected from the group consisting of C, N, O, S and a covalent bond with the provisos that no more than one of Dχv-i, Dχv-2, Jχv-ι, Jχv-2, and Kχv-ι is a covalent bond, no more than one of Dχv-ι, DXV-2, Jχv-b Jχv-2, and Kχv-ι is 0, no more than one of Dχv-ι, Dχv-2, Jχv-ι, Jχv-2, and Kxv-! is S, one of Dχv-ι, Dχv-2, Jχv-ι, Jχv-2, and Kχv-ι must be a covalent bond when two of Dχv-ι» Dχv-2, Jχv-ι, Jχv-2, and Kχv-ι are O and S, and no more than four of Dχv-ι, Dχv-2, Jχv-ι, Jxv-
Figure imgf000098_0001
Bχv-ι, Bχv-2, Dχv-3, Dχv-4, Jχv-3, Jχv-4, and Kχv-2 are independently selected from the group consisting of C, C(Rχv-30), N, O, S and a covalent bond with the provisos that no more than 5 of Bχv-ι, BXV-2, Dχv-3, Dχv-4, Jχv-3, Jχv-4, and Kχv-2 are a covalent bond, no more than two of Bχv-ι, Bχv-2, Dχv-3, Dχv-4, Jχv-3, Jχv-4, and Kχv-2 are 0, no more than two of Bχv-ι, Bχv-2, Dχv-3ι, Dχv-4, Jχv-3, Jχv-4, and Kχv-2 are S, no more than two of BχV-ι, Bxv- 2, D.sub.χv-3, Dχv-4, Jχv-3, Jχv-4, and Kχv-2 are simultaneously O and S, and no more than two of Bxv-i, Bχv-2, Dχv-3, Dχv-4, Jχv-3, Jχv-4, and Kχv-2 are N; Bxv-t and Dχv-3, Dχv-3, and Jχv-3, Jχv-3, and Kχv-2, Kχv-2, and Jχv-4, Jχv-4, and Oχv- 4, and Dχv-4, and Bχv-2 are independently selected to form an in-ring spacer pair wherein said spacer pair is selected from the group consisting of C(RXV-33)=:C(Rχv-35) and N=N with the provisos that AQ-2 must be a ring of at least five contiguous members, that no more than two of the group of said spacer pairs are simultaneously C(Rχv-33)=C(Rχv-35) and that no more than one of the group of said spacer pairs can be N=N unless the other spacer pairs are other than C(Rχv-33)=C(Rχv-35), O, N, and S; Rχv-ι is selected from the group consisting of haloalkyl and haloalkoxymethyl; Rχv-2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, aryl, alkyl, alkenyl, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, haloalkoxyalkyl, perhaloaryl, perhaloaralkyl, perhaloaryloxyalkyl, and heteroaryl; Rχv-3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, aryl, alkyl, alkenyl, haloalkyl, and haloalkoxyalkyl; Yxv is selected from the group consisting of a covalent single bond, (CH2)q wherein q is an integer selected from 1 through 2 and (CH )j-O-(CH )k wherein j and k are independently 0 or 1; Zxv is selected from the group consisting of covalent single bond, (CH2)q wherein q is 1 or 2, and (CH2)j-O-(CH2) wherein j and k are independently 0 or 1; Xxv is a covalent single bond, oxy, (CH2)q wherein q is 1 or 2, or (CH2)j'-O-(CH2)k> wherein j ' and k' are independently 0 or 1 ; Rχv-i4, Rχv-i5, and Rχv-ι6 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrido, halo, haloalkyl, and alkyl; Rχv-30 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, alkylamino, alkylthio, alkylthioalkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, haloalkoxy, and haloalkoxyalkyl with the proviso that Rχι-30 is selected to maintain the tetravalent nature of carbon, trivalent nature of nitrogen, the divalent nature of sulfur, and the divalent nature of oxygen; Rχv-3Q, when bonded to Aχv-ι, is taken together to form an infra-ring linear spacer connecting the Aχv-ι-carbon at the point of attachment of Rχv-30 to the point of bonding of a group selected from the group consisting of Rχv-10, Rχv-11, R12, Rχv-31 and Rχv-32 wherein said infra-ring linear spacer is selected from the group consisting of a covalent single bond and a spacer moiety having from 1 through 6 contiguous atoms to form a ring selected from the group consisting of a cycloalkyl having from 3 through 10 contiguous members, a cycloalkenyl having from 5 through 10 contiguous members, and a heterocyclyl having from 5 through 10 contiguous members; Rχv-30, when bonded to Aχv-l5 is taken together to form an infra-ring branched spacer connecting the Aχv-ι -carbon at the point of attachment of Rχv-3o to the points of bonding of each member of any one of substituent pairs selected from the group consisting of subsitituent pairs Rχv-ιo and Rχv-ι 1, Rχv-ι and Rχv-31, Rχv-31 and Rχv-32, Rχv-ι 1 and Rxv- 12, Rχv-11 and Rχv-31, Rχv-11 and Rχv-32, Rχv-11 and Rχv-12, Rχv-31 and Rχv-32, Rχv-31 and Rχv-12, and Rχv-32 and Rχv-12 and wherein said infra-ring branched spacer is selected to form two rings selected from the group consisting of cycloalkyl having from 3 through 10 contiguous members, cycloalkenyl having from 5 through 10 contiguous members, and heterocyclyl having from 5 through 10 contiguous members; RχV-4, RχV-5, RχV-6, RχV-7, RχV-8, RχV-9, RχV-10, RχV-11, RχV-12, RχV-13, RχV-31, RχV-32,
Rχv-33, Rχv-34, Rχv-35, and Rχv-36 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrido, carboxy, heteroaralkylthio, heteroaralkoxy, cycloalkylamino, acylalkyl, acylalkoxy, aroylalkoxy, heterocyclyloxy, aralkylaryl, aralkyl, aralkenyl, aralkynyl, heterocyclyl, perhaloaralkyl, aralkylsulfonyl, aralkylsulfonylalkyl, aralkylsulfinyl, aralkylsulfinylalkyl, halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkenyl, cycloalkylsulfinyl, cycloalkylsulfinylalkyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfonylalkyl, heteroarylarnino, N- heteroarylamino-N-alkylamino, heteroarylamino-N-alkylamino, heteroarylaminoalkyl, haloalkylthio, alkanoyloxy, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, haloalkoxylalkyl, heteroaralkoxy, cycloalkoxy, cycloalkenyloxy, cycloalkoxyalkyl, cycloalkylalkoxy, cycloalkenyloxyalkyl, cycloalkylenedioxy, halocycloalkoxy, halocycloalkoxyalkyl, halocycloalkenyloxy, halocycloalkenyloxyalkyl, hydroxy, amino, thio, nitro, lower alkylamino, alkylthio, alkylthioalkyl, arylamino, aralkylamino, arylthio, arylthioalkyl, heteroaralkoxyalkyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfinylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonylalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, haloalkylsulfinylalkyl, haloalkylsulfonylalkyl, alkylsulfonamido, alkylaminosulfonyl, amidosulfonyl, monoalkylamidosulfonyl, dialkyl amidosulfonyl, monoarylamidosulfonyl, arylsulfonamido, diarylamidosulfonyl, monoalkyl monoaryl amidosulfonyl, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylthio, heteroarylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, heterocyclylsulfonyl, heterocyclylthio, alkanoyl, alkenoyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, aralkanoyl, heteroaralkanoyl, haloalkanoyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkenyloxy, alkenyloxyalky, alkylenedioxy, haloalkylenedioxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkanoyl, cycloalkenyl, lower cycloalkylalkyl, lower cycloalkenylalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, hydroxyhaloalkyl, hydroxyaralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydoxyheteroaralkyl, haloalkoxyalkyl, aryl, heteroaralkynyl, aryloxy, aralkoxy, aryloxyalkyl, saturated heterocyclyl, partially saturated heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heteroaryloxyalkyl, arylalkenyl, heteroarylalkenyl, carboxyalkyl, carboalkoxy, alkoxycarboxamido, alkylamidocarbonylamido, alkylamidocarbonylamido, carboalkoxyalkyl, carboalkoxyalkenyl, carboaralkoxy, carboxamido, carboxamidoalkyl, cyano, carbohaloalkoxy, phosphono, phosphonoalkyl, diaralkoxyphosphono, and diaralkoxyphosphonoalkyl with the provisos that Rχv-4, Rχv-5, Rχv-6, Rχv-7, Rχv-8, Rχv-9, Rχv-ιo, Rχv-n, Rχv-i2, Rχv-i3, Rχv-3i, Rχv-32, Rχv-33, Rχv-34, Rχv-35, and Rχv-36 are each independently selected to maintain the tetravalent nature of carbon, trivalent nature of nifrogen, the divalent nature of sulfur, and the divalent nature of oxygen, provided that no more than three of the Rχv-33 and Rχv-34 substituents are simultaneously selected from other than the group consisting of hydrido and halo, and that no more than three of the Rχv-35 and Rχv-36 substituents are simultaneously selected from other than the group consisting of hydrido and halo; Rχv-9, Rxv-io, Rχv-11, Rχv-12, Rχv-13, Rχv-31 and Rχv-32 are independently selected to be oxo with the provisos that Bχv-ι, Bχv-2, Dχv-3, Dχv-4, Jχv-3, Jχv-4, and Kχv-2 are independently selected from the group consisting of C and S, no more than two of Rχv-9, Rχv-10, Rχv-11, Rχv-12, Rχv-13, Rχv-31 and Rχv-32 are simultaneously oxo, and provided that Rxv-9, Rχv-10, Rχv-11, Rχv-12, Rχv-13, Rχv-31, and Rχv-32 are each independently selected to maintain the tetravalent nature of carbon, trivalent nature of nitrogen, the divalent nature of sulfur, and the divalent nature of oxygen; Rχv-4 and Rχv-5, Rχv-5 and Rχv-6, Rχv-6 and Rχv-7, Rχv-7 and Rχv-8, Rχv-9 and Rxv- 10, Rχv-ιo and Rχv-n, Rχv-n and Rχv-31, Rχv-31 and Rχv-32, Rχv-32 and Rχv-12, and Rχv-12 and Rχv-13 are independently selected to form spacer pairs wherein a spacer pair is taken together to form a linear moiety having from 3 through 6 contiguous atoms connecting the points of bonding of said spacer pair members to form a ring selected from the group consisting of a cycloalkenyl ring having 5 through 8 contiguous members, a partially saturated heterocyclyl ring having 5 through 8 contiguous members, a heteroaryl ring having 5 tlirough 6 contiguous members, and an aryl with the provisos that no more than one of the group consisting of spacer pairs Rχv-4 and Rχv-5, Rχv-5 and Rχv-6, Rχv-6 and Rχv_ 7, Rχv-7 and Rχv-8 is used at the same time and that no more than one of the group consisting of spacer pairs Rχv-9 and Rχv-10, Rχv-10 and Rχv-11, Rχv-11 and Rχv-31, Rχv-31 and Rχv-32, Rχv-32 and Rχv-12, and Rχv-12 and Rχv-13 are used at the same time; Rχv-9 and Rχv-11, Rχv-9 and Rχv-12, Rχv-9 and Rχv-13, Rχv-9 and Rχv-3i, Rχv-9 and Rχv-32, Rχv-10 and Rχv-i2, Rχv-10 and Rχv-13, Rχv-10 and Rχv-3i, Rχv-10 and Rχv-32, Rχv-11 and Rχv-12, Rχv-11 and Rχv-13, Rχv-11 and Rχv-2, Rχv-12 and Rχv-31, Rχv-13 and Rχv-31, and Rχv-13 and Rχv-32 are independently selected to form a spacer pair wherein said spacer pair is taken together to form a linear spacer moiety selected from the group consisting of a covalent single bond and a moiety having from 1 through 3 contiguous atoms to form a ring selected from the group consisting of a cycloalkyl having from 3 through 8 contiguous members, a cycloalkenyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members, a saturated heterocyclyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members and a partially saturated heterocyclyl having from 5 through 8 contiguous members with the provisos that no more than one of said group of spacer pairs is used at the same time; and Rχv-37 and Rχv-38 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrido, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, hydroxy, amino, thio, halo, haloalkyl, alkylamino, alkylthio, alkylthioalkyl, cyano, alkyl, alkenyl, haloalkoxy, and haloalkoxyalkyl. Procedures for preparation of compounds of formula XV are described in WO 00/18723, which is hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula XV selected from the group consisting of 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl] (cyclohexylmethyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3- ethylphenoxy)phenyl] (cyclopentylmethyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(4- chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl](cyclopropylmethyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3- [[3 -(4-chloro-3 -ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [(3 -trifluoromethyl) cyclohexy-1-methyl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-ρropanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [(3- pentafluoroethyl)cyclohexyl-methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3- ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [(3-trifluoromethoxy)cyclohexyl-methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl][[3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy) cyclohexylmethyl] amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] (cyclohexyhnethyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxyphenoxy) phenyl](cyclopentylmethyl)amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoro- methoxyphenoxy)phenyl] (cyclopropylmethyl) amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [(3 -trifluoromethyl)cyclohexymethyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 -trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] ] (3 - pentafluoroethyl)cyclohexyl-methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [(3 -trifluoromethoxy)cyclohexyl-methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)cyclohexylmethyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 - isopropylphenoxy)phenyl] (cyclohexylmethyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 - isopropylphenoxy)phenyl](cyclopentylmethyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- isopropylphenoxy)phenyl] (cyclopropylmethyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 - isopropylρhenoxy)phenyl] [(3-trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl-methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-(3-isopropylphenoxy)phenyl][(3- pentafluoroethyl)cyclohexylmethyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- isopropylρhenoxy)phenyl] [(3 -trifluoromethoxy)cyclohexylmethyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-(3-isopropylphenoxy)phenyl][3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)cyclohexyl- methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(2,3 -dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] cyclohexylmethyl )amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy) phenyl](cyclopentylmethyl)amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2,3- dichlorophenoxy)phenyl](cyclopropylmethyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2,3- dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] [(3-trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl-methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] [(3- pentafluoroethyl)cyclohexylmethyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(2,3- dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] [(3-trifluoromethoxy)cyclohexyl-methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy)phenyl)[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)cyclohexylmethyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 -[ [3 -(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl] (cyclohexylmethyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 -[ [3 -(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl] (cyclopentylmethyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [[3 -(4- fluorophenoxy)phennyl](cyclopropylmethyl)amino]-l,l,l-triflouro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl][(3-trifluoromethyl)cyclohexylmethyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[3-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl][(3-pentafluoroethyl)cyclohexylmethyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-ρropanol; 3-[[3-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl] [(3- trifluoromethoxy)cyclohexyl-methyl] amino] -1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl] [[3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)cyclohexyl-methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxybenzyloxy]phenyl] (cyclohexylmethyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 -trifluoromethoxy- benzyloxy)phenyl](cyclopentylmethyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- trifluoromethoxybenzyloxy)phenyl](cyclopropylmethyl] amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxybenzyloxy)phenyl][(3-trifluoromethyl)cyclohexylmethyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 -trifluoromethoxybenzyloxy)phenyl] [(3 - pentafluoroethyl) cyclohexylmethyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- trifluoromethoxy benzyloxy)phenyl] [(3-trifluoromethoxy)cyclohexyl-methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol;
3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxybenzyloxy)phenyl][3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)-cyclohexyl- methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyloxy) phenyl](cyclohexylmethyl)amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethyl- benzyloxy)phenyl] (cyclopentylmethyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [3 -(3 - trifluoromethylbenzyloxy)phenyl](cyclopropylmethyl)amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3- [[3-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyloxy)phenyl][(3-trifluoromethyl)cyclohexylmethyl]amino]- 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyloxy)phenyl] [(3- pentafluoroethyl)cyclo- hexylmethyl] amino] -l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3- trifluoromethylbenzyloxy)phenyl] [(3 -trifluoromethoxy)cyclohexylmethyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethylbenzyloxy)phenyl][3-(l, 1,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)cyclohexyhnethyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3- trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl](cyclohexyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3- pentafluoroefhyl)phenyl]methyl](cyclohexyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3- trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methyl](cyclohexyl)amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3- (1,1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] (cyclohexyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [[[(3-trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl](4-methylcyclohexyl)amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[[(3-pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl](4-methylcyclohexyl)amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [ [(3 -trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methyl] (4-methylcyclohexyl) amino] - 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl](4- methylcyclohexyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-prop anol; 3 - [ [ [(3 - trifluoromethyl]phenyl]methyl] (3 -trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl) mino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3 -[ [ [(3 -pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] (3 -trifluoromethylcyclohexyl)amino] - l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3-trifluoromethoxy) phenyl]methyl](3- trifluoromethylcyclohexyl)amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] (3-trifluoromethylcyclohexyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[[(3-trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-(4-chloro-3- ethylphenoxy)cyclohexyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3-pentafluoroethyl) phenyl]methyl] [3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)cyclohexyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [ [(3 -trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3 -(4-chloro-3 -methylphenoxy)cyclohexyl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy) phenyl]methyl] [3-(4-chloro-3- ethylphenoxy)-cyclohexyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [ [(3 - trifluoromethyl]phenyl]methyl](3-phenoxycyclohexyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3-pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl](3-phenoxycyclohexyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2- propanol; 3 - [ [ [(3 -trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methyl] (3 -phenoxycyclohexyl) amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl](3- phenoxycyclohexyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3- trifloromethyl)phenyl]methyl](3-isopropoxycyclohexyl) amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [ [ [(3 -pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] (3 -isopropoxycyclohexyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[[(3-trifluoromethoxy) phenyl]methyl](3-isopropoxycyclohexyl)amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl](3- isopropoxycyclohexyl)-ammo] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol;
3-[[[(3-trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl](3-cyclopentyloxycyclohexyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; 3-[[[(3-pentafluoroethyl]phenyl]methyl](3-cyclopentyloxycyclohexyl)amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 - [[ [(3 -trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methyl] (3 - cyclopentyloxycyclohexyl) amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] (3-cyclopentyloxycyclohexyl)-amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[[(2-trifluoromethyl)pyrid-6-yl]methyl](3-isopropoxycyclohexyl)amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 -[ [ [(2-trifluoromethyl)p yrid-6-yl]methyl] (3 - cyclopentyloxycyclohexyl)-amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(2- trifluoromethyl)pyrid-6-yl]methyl] (3 -phenoxycyclohexyl)amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3-[[[(2-trifluoromethyl)pyrid-6-yl]methyl](3-trifluoromethylcyclohexyl) amino]- 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(2-trifluoromethyl)pyrid-6-yl]methyl] [3-(4-chloro-3- ethylphenoxy)cyclohexyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(2-trifluoromethyl)pyrid- 6-yl]methyl] [3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)cyclohexyl]amino]-l , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3- [ [ [(2-trifluoromethyl)pyrid-6-yl]methyl] (3 -pentafluoroethylcyclohexyl)-amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(2-trifluoromethyl)pyrid-6-yl]methyl](3- trifluoromethoxycyclohexyl)amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-([[[(3- trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)propyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro- 2-propanol; 3-[[[(3-pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)propyl]- amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3 -[ [ [(3 -trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3 -(4-chloro-3 - ethylphenoxy)propyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l, 1,2,2- tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy) propyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3-trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)- 2,2,-di-fluropropyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3- pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)-2,2-di-fluropropyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3-trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3-(4-chloro-3- ethylphenoxy)-2,2, -di-fluropropyl] amino] -l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[3-(l, 1,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy) phenyl]methyl][3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)-2,2-di-fluropropyl]amino]- 1,1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3-trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3- (isopropoxy)propyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluor-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3- pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3-(isopropoxy)propyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; 3-[[[(3-trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3-(isopropoxy)propyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; 3 - [ [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3 -(isopropoxy)prop- yl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; and 3-[[[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3- (phenoxy)ρropyl] amino]- 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are (R)-chiral halogenated 1-substituted amino-(n+l)-alkanols represented by formula XVI
Figure imgf000106_0001
XIV and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; wherein nχvι is an integer selected from 1 through 4;
Figure imgf000106_0002
Rχvι-ι is selected from the group consisting of haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkoxymethyl, and haloalkenyloxymethyl; provided that Rχv-n has a higher Cahn- Ingold-Prelog stereochemical system ranking than both Rχvι-2 and (CHRχvι-3)n- N(Aχvι)Qxvι5 wherein AXVι is formula XVI-(II) represented by
Figure imgf000106_0003
XVI-(II), and Q is formula XVI-(III) represented by
Figure imgf000107_0001
Rχvι-i6 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, alkyl, acyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, trialkylsilyl, and a spacer selected from the group consisting of a covalent single bond and a linear spacer moiety having a chain length of 1 to 4 atoms linked to the point of bonding of any aromatic substituent selected from the group consisting of Rχvι-4, Rχvι- 8, Rχvι-9, and Rχvι- 13 to form a heterocyclyl ring having from 5 through 10 contiguous members; Dχvι-ι, Dχvι-2, Jxvi-i, Jχvι-2 and KXVM are independently selected from the group consisting of C, N, O, S and covalent bond with the provisos that no more than one of Dχvι- i, Dχvι-2, Jχvι-ι, Jχvι-2 and Kχvι-ι, is a covalent bond, no more than one Dχvι-ι, Dχvι-2, Jχvι-ι, Jxvι-2 and Kχvι-ι is be O, no more than one of DXVM, Dχvι-2, Jxvi-i, Jχvι-2 and KXVM is S, one of Dχvι-1, Dχvι-2, Jχvι-ι, Jχvι-2 and Kχvι-ι must be a covalent bond when two of DXVM, Dχvι-2, Jxvi-i, Jχvι-2 and KXVM are O and S, and no more than four of DXV , Dχvι-2, Jχvι-ι,
Figure imgf000107_0002
Dχvι-3, Dχvι-4, Jχvι-3, Jχvι-4 and Kχvι-2 are independently selected from the group consisting of C, N, O, S and covalent bond with the provisos that no more than one is a covalent bond; no more than one of Dχvι-3, Dχvι-4, Jχvι-3, Jχvι-4 and Kχvι-2 is O; no more than one of Dχvι-3, Dχvι-4, Jχvι-3, Jχvι-4, and Kχvι-2 is S; no more than two of Dχvι-3, Dχvι-4, Jχvι-3, Jχvι-4 and Kχvι-2 is O and S; one of Dχvι-3, Dχvι-4, Jχvι-3, Jχvι-4, and Kχvι-2 must be a covalent bond when two of Dχvι-3, Dχvι-4, Jχvι-3, Jχvι-4 and Kχvι-2 are O and S; and no more than four of DXVι-3, Dχvι-4, Jχvι-3, Jχvι-4 and Kχvι-2 are N; Rχvι-2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, aryl, aralkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkenyloxyalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, halocycloalkyl, haloalkoxy, haloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, halocycloalkoxy, halocycloalkoxyalkyl, perhaloaryl, perhaloaralkyl, perhaloaryloxyalkyl, heteroaryl, dicyanoalkyl, and carboalkoxycyanoaiky; provided that Rχvι-2 has a lower Cahn-Ingold-Prelog system ranking than both Rχv-ι and (CHRχvι-3)n-
Figure imgf000108_0001
Rχvι-3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, hydroxy, cyano, aryl, aralkyl, acyl, alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxyalkyl, heteroaryl, alkenyloxyalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, haloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, monocyanoalkyl, dicyanoalkyl, carboxamide, and carboxamidoalkyl; provided that (CHRχv-ι3)n-N(Aχvι)Qxvι has a lower Cahn-higold-Prelog stereochemical system ranking than Rχvι-ι and a higher Cahn-Ingold-Prelog stereochemical system ranking than Rχvι-2; Yxvi is selected from a group consisting of a covalent single bond, (C(Rχvι-i4)2)q wherein q is an integer selected from 1 and 2 and (CH(Rχv-i4)).g-Wχvι(CH(RχvM4))p wherein g and p are independently 0 or 1; Rχvι-i4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, hydroxy, cyano, hydroxyalkyl, acyl, alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxyalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, haloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, monocarboalkoxyalkyl, monocyanoalkyl, dicyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, carboalkoxy, carboxamide, and carboxamidoalkyl; Zχvι is selected from a group consisting of a covalent single bond, (C(Rχvι-ιs)2)q, wherein q is an integer selected from 1 and 2, and (CH(Rχvι-i5))j-Wχvι-(CH(Rχvι-ι5))k wherein j and k are independently 0 or 1; Wχvι is selected from the group consisting of O, C(O), C(S),C(O)N(Rχvι-i4),
C(S)N(RχvM4),(Rχvι-i4)NC(O), (Rχvι-ι )NC(S), S, S(O), S(O).sub.2, S(O)2N(Rχvι-ι ), (Rχvι-i4)NS(O) , and N(Rχvι-i4); with the proviso that Rχvι-i4 is other than cyano; Rχvι-i5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrido, cyano, hydroxyalkyl, acyl, alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxyalkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, haloalkoxyalkyl, haloalkenyloxyalkyl, monocarboalkoxyalkyl, monocyanoalkyl, dicyanoalkyl, carboalkoxycyanoalkyl, carboalkoxy, carboxamide, and carboxamidoalkyl; Rχvι-4, Rχvι-5, Rχvι-6, Rχv-7, Rχvι-8, Rχvι-9, Rχvι-iQ, Rχvι-ιι, Rχvι-i2, and Rχvn3 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrido, carboxy, heteroaralkylthio, heteroaralkoxy, cycloalkylamino, acylalkyl, acylalkoxy, aroylalkoxy, heterocyclyloxy, aralkylaryl, aralkyl, aralkenyl, aralkynyl, heterocyclyl, perhaloaralkyl, aralkylsulfonyl, aralkylsulfonylalkyl, aralkylsulfinyl, aralkylsulfinylalkyl, halocycloalkyl, halocycloalkenyl, cycloalkylsulfinyl, cycloalkylsulfinylalkyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfonylalkyl, heteroarylamino, N-heteroarylamino-N-alkylamino, heteroaralkyl, heteroarylaminoalkyl, haloalkylthio, alkanoyloxy, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, haloalkoxylalkyl, heteroaralkoxy, cycloalkoxy, cycloalkenyloxy, cycloalkoxyalkyl, cycloalkylalkoxy, cycloalkenyloxyalkyl, cycloalkylenedioxy, halocycloalkoxy, halocycloalkoxyalkyl, halocycloalkenyloxy, halocycloalkenyloxyalkyl, hydroxy, amino, thio, nitro, lower alkylamino, alkylthio, alkylthioalkyl, arylamino, aralkylamino, arylthio, arylthioalkyl, heteroaralkoxyalkyl, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, heteroarylsulfinylalkyl, heteroarylsulfonylalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, haloalkylsulfinylalkyl, haloalkylsulfonylalkyl, alkylsulfonamido, alkylaminosulfonyl, amidosulfonyl, monoalkyl amidosulfonyl, dialkyl, amidosulfonyl, monoarylamidosulfonyl, arylsulfonamido, diarylamidosulfonyl, monoalkyl monoaryl amidosulfonyl, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylthio, heteroarylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, heterocyclylsulfonyl, heterocyclylthio, alkanoyl, alkenoyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, aralkanoyl, heteroaralkanoyl, haloalkanoyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkenyloxy, alkenyloxyalky, alkylenedioxy, haloalkylenedioxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkanoyl, cycloalkenyl, lower cycloalkylalkyl, lower cycloalkenylalkyl, halo, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkoxy, hydroxyhaloalkyl,hydroxyaralkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydoxyheteroaralkyl, haloalkoxyalkyl, aryl, heteroaralkynyl, aryloxy, aralkoxy, aryloxyalkyl, saturated heterocyclyl, partially saturated heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heteroaryloxyalkyl, arylalkenyl, heteroarylalkenyl, carboxyalkyl, carboalkoxy, alkoxycarboxamido, alkylamidocarbonylamido, arylamidocarbonylamido, carboalkoxyalkyl, carboalkoxyalkenyl, carboaralkoxy, carboxamido, carboxamidoalkyl, cyano, carbohaloalkoxy, phosphono, phosphonoalkyl, diaralkoxyphosphono, and diaralkoxyphosphonoalkyl; with the proviso that Rχvι-4, Rχvι-5, Rχvι-6, Rχvι-7, Rχvι-8, Rχvι- 9, Rχvι-ιc Rχvι-n, Rχvι-i2, and Rχv-π are each independently selected to maintain the tetravalent nature of carbon, trivalent nature of nitrogen, the divalent nature of sulfur, and the divalent nature of oxygen; Rxvi-4 and Rχvι-5, Rχvι-5 and Rχvι- 6, Rχvι-6 and Rχvι-7, Rχvι-7 and Rχvι-8, Rχvι-9 and RXVMO, Rxvi-ii and Rχvι-n, Rχvι-n and Rχvι-12, and Rχvι-12 and Rχrv-13 are independently selected to form spacer pairs wherein a spacer pair is taken together to form a linear moiety having from 3 through 6 contiguous atoms connecting the points of bonding of said spacer pair members to form a ring selected from the group consisting of a cycloalkenyl ring having 5 through 8 contiguous members, a partially saturated heterocyclyl ring having 5 through 8 contiguous members, a heteroaryl ring having 5 through 6 contiguous members, and an aryl with the provisos that no more than one of the group consisting of spacer pairs Rχv-14 and Rχvι-5, Rχvι- 5 and Rχvι-6, Rχv-ι6 and Rχvι-7, and Rχvι-7 and R.χvι-8 is used at the same time and that no more than one of the group consisting of spacer pairs Rχrv-9 and Rχvι-10, Rχvι-10 and Rχvι-11, Rχv-11 and Rχvι-i2, and Rχvι-i2 and Rχvι-13 can be used at the same time; and Rxvi-4 and Rχvι- 9, Rχvι-4 and Rχvι-i3, Rχvι-8 and Rχvι-9, and R.χvι- s and Rχvι-13 is independently selected to form a spacer pair wherein said spacer pair is taken together to form a linear moiety wherein said linear moiety forms a ring selected from the group consisting of a partially saturated heterocyclyl ring having from 5 through 8 contiguous members and a heteroaryl ring having from 5 tlirough 6 contiguous members with the proviso that no more than one of the group consisting of spacer pairs Rχvι-4 and Rχvι-9, Rχvι-4 and Rχvι-13, Rχvι-8 and Rχvι-9, and Rχvι-8 and Rχvι-13 is used at the same time. Procedures for preparation of the compounds of formula XVI are described in WO 00/18724, which is hereby incoφorated by reference. In a preferred embodiment, the CETP inhibitor is a compound of formula XVI selected from the group consisting of (2R)-3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyι][[3- (1,1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3- isopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-cyclopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl] methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-(2- furyl)phenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy)phenyl][[3-(l, 1,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl] methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-ρroρanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-methylρhenoxy)phenyl][[3-(l, 1,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2-fluoro-5- bromophenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1,1- trifluoro-2-ρroρanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-ethylρhenoxy)ρhenyl][[3-(l, 1,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl] methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy) phenoxy]phenyl] [[3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] - 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-ρroρanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3-(ρentafluoroethyl)phenoxy]phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy) phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3,5- dimethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)ph- enyl] -methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[ [3 -(3 -t-butylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 - (1,1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]-methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3- (3-methylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)ρhenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1,1- trifluoro-2-ρropanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-2-naρhthoxy)phenyl][[3-(l, 1,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3- (phenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl] methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3-(N ,N-dimethylamino)phenoxy]phenyl] [[3-(l, 1 ,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-(l, 1,2,2,- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methoxy] phenyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-(l, 1,2,2- tefrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] (3-[[3-(triflu- oromethyl)phenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-ρroρanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3,5- dimethylphenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-(l, 1,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3-[3-(trifluo- romethylthio)phenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-proρanol; (2R)-3 - [ [ [3 - (1,1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3 - [ [3 ,5-difluorophenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl] [3- [cyclohexyl- methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(2- difluoromethoxy-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2- trifluoromethyl-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl][[3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy) phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(3 -difluoromethoxy phenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -( 1 , 1,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)-phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [ [3 -(3 - trifuoromethylthio)phenoxy]phenyl][[3-(l,l,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy) phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-trifluoro-methylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3- (1,1 ,2,2-t- etrafluoroethoxy)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3- (3-trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl][[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]-l,l,l- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-isopropylphenoxy)phenyl][[3-(pentafluoro- ethyl)phenyl]methyl]-amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-cyclopropyl- phenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-(2-furyl)ρhenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(ρentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] [[3- (pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(pentafluoroethyl) phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-methylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-
(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 -[ [3-(2-fluoro-5- bromophenoxy)phenyl][[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]-amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-
(ρentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-ρroρanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3-(l, 1,2,2- tetrafluoroethoxy)phenoxy]phenyl][[3-(pentaf- luoroethyl)-phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -[3 -(pentafluoroethyl)phenoxy]phenyl] [ [3 - (pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]-methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3,5- dimethylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(pentafluoroethyl) phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(3 -ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(pentafluoroethyl) phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(3 -t- butylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoiO-2- propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-methylphenoxy)phenyl][[3-
(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(5,6,7,8- tetrahydro-2-naphthoxy)phenyl][[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(phenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl) phenyl]methyl] amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3-(N,N-methylamino)phenoxy]phenyl][[3- (pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-
(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]- 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-proρanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-(pentafluoroethyl)ρhenyl]methyl] [3-[[3- (trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-ρropanol; (2R)-3 - [ [ [3 - (pentafluoroethyl) phenyl]methyl][3-[[3,5-dimethylphenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]-l, 1,1- trifluoro-2-ρroρanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-(pentafluoroethyl)ρhenyl]methyl][3-[[3-
(trifluoromethylthio)phenyl]methoxy] phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [ [3 -(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3 - [ [3 ,5 -difluorophenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3- [cyclohexylmethoxy]phenyl] amino] -1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2- difluoromethoxy-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl] methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2-trifluoromethyl-4-pyridyloxy) phenyl] [[3- (pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]-methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3- difluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [ [3 -(3 -trifluoromethylthio)phenoxy]phenyl] [ [3 - (pentafluoroethyl)phenyl] methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-chloro- 3-trifluoromethyl phenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(pentafluoroethyl)-phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(3 -trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 - (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(3 - isopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl] methyl] -amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-cyclopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3- heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] -amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(3 -(2- furyl)phenoxy)phenyl] [[3 -(heptafluoropropyl) phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol;
(2R)-3 - [ [3 -(2,3 -dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl) phenyl] methyl] -amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl) phenyl] methyl] amino] -l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4- methylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 ,-trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2-fluoro-5-bromophenoxy)phenyl][[3-
(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-chloro- 3 -ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenoxy]phenyl] [[3- (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3 - (pentafluoroethyl)phenoxy]phenyl] [[3-(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3,5-dimethylphenoxy)phenyl][[3- (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] -amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(3 - ethylphenoxy)phenyl][[3-(heptafluoropropyl) phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(3 -t-butylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl) phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3- methylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-2-naphthoxy)ρhenyl] [[3- (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl] methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 - (phenoxy)phenyl] [[3 -(heptafluoropropyl) phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3-(N,N-dimethylamino) phenoxy]ρhenyl][[3-(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]- methyl]amino]-l , 1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-
(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] [3 -[ [3 - (trifluoromethyl)ρhenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [[3 - (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3,5-dimethylphenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] [3 - [ [3 - (trifluoromethylthio) phenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3- [[[3-(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3,5-difluorophenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] [3- [cyclohexylmethoxy] phenyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2- difluoromethoxy-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl] [[3-(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2-trifluoromethyl-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl] [[3- (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3- difluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [[3-(heptafluoropropyl)- phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-(3-trifluoromethylthio) phenoxy]phenyl] [[3- (heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-chloro- 3 -trifluoromethylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [3 -(heptafluoropropyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3- isopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-5 -(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-cyclopropylphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl] methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(3 -(2- furyl)phenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(frifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4- fluorophenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro- 3-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-methylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2-fluoro-5- bromophenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tetrafluoroethoxy) phenoxy]phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol;
(2R)-3-[[3-[3-(pentafluoroethyl)phenoxy]phenyl][[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)- phenyl]methyl] amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3,5- dimethylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-5 -(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1- frifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-ethylphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-t- butylphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]-amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro- 2-proρanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-methylphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]-amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(5,6,7,8- tetrahydro-2-naphthoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(phenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-5 -(trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-frifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3-(N,N-dimethylamino- phenoxy]phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 , 1 , l-trifluoro-2- propanol;
(2R)-3-[[[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl] methoxy]phenyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-3-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl] [3 - [ [3 -(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [ [2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3 - [ [3 ,5 -dimethylphenyl] methoxy]phenyl] amino]- 1 , 1 ,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-
(trifluoromethylthio)phenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3- [[[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3,5-difluo- rophenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [[2-fluoro-5 - (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3-[cyclohexylmethoxy]phenyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(2-difluoromethoxy-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-5 - (trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2- trifluoromethyl-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-difluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl] methyl] amino] -l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[3-(3- trifluoromethylthio)phenoxy]phenyl] [[2-fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2- fluoro-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3- trifluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1,1 , l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-isopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3- cyclopropylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-flouro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl] methyl] amino] - 1,1,1- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(3 -(2-furyl)phenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(2,3 - dichlorophenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-fluorophenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl] methyl] amino] -1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4- methylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2-fluoro-5-bromophenoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(4-chloro-3- ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3-(l , 1 ,2,2-tefrafluoroethoxy)phenoxy]phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-[3-
(pentafluoroethyl)phenoxy]phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl] amino] - 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3,5-dimethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 -(3 - ethylphenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-ρropanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3-t-butylphenoxy)ρhenyl][[2-fluoro-4-
(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]-amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(3- methylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro- 2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-2-naphthoxy)phenyl][[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3- [ [3 - (phenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [3 - [3 -(N,N-dimethylamino)phenoxy]phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)-phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2 -propanol; (2R)-3- [ [[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluo- romethoxy)phenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-ρroρanol; (3R)-3-[[[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] [3-[[3- (frifluoromethyl)phenyl]methoxy]phenyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[2- fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3,5-dimeth- ylphenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [ [2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3-(trifluoromethylthio)- phenyl]methoxy]phenyl] amino] -1,1 ,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [[2-fluoro-4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3-[[3,5-difluorophenyl]-methoxy]phenyl]amino]-l,l,l- trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl][3- [cyclohexylmethoxy]phenyl]amino]-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2- difluoromethoxy-4-pyridyloxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)- phenyl]methyl]amino]-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3-[[3-(2-trifluoromethyl-4- pyridyloxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; (2R)-3 -[ [3 -(3 -difluoromethoxyphenoxy)phenyl] [ [2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl] amino] -1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol; (2R)-3 - [ [ [3 -(3 -trifluoromethylthio) phenoxy]phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methyl]amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2- propanol; and (2R)-3-[[3-(4-chloro-3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)phenyl] [[2-fluoro-4-(- trifluoromethyl) phenyl]methyl] amino]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro-2-propanol. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are quinolines represented by formula XVII:
Figure imgf000117_0001
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, and hydrates thereof; wherein AXVII is an aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted with up to five identical or different substituents in the form of a halogen, nitro, hydroxyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy or a straight-chain or branched alkyl, acyl, hydroxyalkyl or alkoxy containing up to 7 carbon atoms each, or in the form of a group according to the formula --NRXVIMRXVII-S; Rχvπ-4 and Rχvι-5 each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen, phenyl or a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms; Dχvιι is an aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted with a phenyl, nifro, halogen, trifluoromethyl or trifluoromethoxy, or a radical of Rχvπ-6-L. xvir, -C(Rχvπ-7)(Rχvιι-8)(Rχvπ-9), or Rχvιι-ιo-Tχvπ-Vχvπ-Xχvπ-; Rχvι-6, Rχvπ-7, and Rχvπ-ιo each represent independently for each occurrence cycloalkyl containing 3 to 6 carbon atoms, or an aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atom or a 5- to 7-membered, optionally benzo-condensed, saturated or unsaturated, mono-, bi- or tricyclic heterocycle containing up to 4 heteroatomsselected from the group consisting of S, N and O; wherein the rings are optionally substituted, in the case of the nitrogen- containing rings also via the N function, with up to five identical or different substituents in the form of a halogen, trifluoromethyl, mfro, hydroxyl, cyano, carboxyl, trifluoromethoxy, a straight-chain or branched acyl, alkyl, alkyltliio, alkylalkoxy, alkoxy or alkoxycarbonyl contaimng up to 6 carbon atoms each, an aryl or trifluoromethyl-substituted aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atoms each, or an optionally benzo-condensed, aromatic 5-to 7-membered heterocycle containing up to 3 heteoatoms selected from the group consisting of S, N and O; and optionally in the form of a group according to the formula -ORχvπ-n, -SRχvn-12, - SO2Rχvι-ι3, or -NRχvn4, Rχvπ-15; Rχvπ-11, Rχvι-12, and Rχvπ-i3 each represent independently for each occurrence aryl containing 6 to 10 carbon atoms, which is in turn substituted with up to two. identical or different substituents in the form of a phenyl, halogen or a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms; Rχvιι-14 and Rχvπ-ι5 each represent independently for each occurrence Rχvπ-14 and Rχvπ-5 as defined above; Rχvπ-6 and/or Rχvπ-7 each represent independently for each occurrence radical of
Figure imgf000118_0001
Rχvπ-8 is hydrogen or halogen; Rχvπ-9 ia hydrogen, halogen, azido, trifluoromethyl, hydroxyl, trifluoromethoxy, a straight-chain or branched alkoxy or alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms each, or a radical according to the formula NRχvπ-i6Rχvπ-i7; RX.vπ-iό and Rχvπ-17 each represent independently for each occurrence Rχvn-4 and Rχvπ-5 as defined above; or Rχvπ-8 and Rχvπ-9 together form a radical according to the formula =O or =NRχvπ-i8; Rχvn-i8 each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen, or a straight- chain or branched alkyl, alkoxy, or acyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms each; Lχvιι each represent independently for each occurrence a straight-chain or branched alkylene or alkenylene chain containing up to 8 carbon atoms each, which are optionally substituted with up to two hydroxyl groups; Tχvιι and Xχvιι each represent independently for each occurrence a straight-chain or branched alkylene chain containing up to 8 carbon atoms; or Tχvιι and Xχvιι is a bond; VXVII represents independently for each occurrence oxygen, sulfur, or -NRχvπ-19; Rχvπ-19 represents independently for each occurrence hydrogen or a straight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 6 carbon atoms or a phenyl; Eχvιι represents independently for each occurrence a cycloalkyl containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms, or a sfraight-chain or branched alkyl containing up to 8 carbon atoms, which is optionally substituted with a cycloalkyl containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms or a hydroxyl, or a phenyl, which is optionally substituted with a halogen or trifluoromethyl; Rχvn-1 and Rχvπ-2 each represent independently a cycloalkyl containing 3 to 8 carbon atoms, hydrogen, nitro, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, carboxy, hydroxy, cyano, a straight-chain or branched acyl, alkoxycarbonyl or alkoxy with up to 6 carbon atoms, or NRχvn-2θRχvιι-2i; Rχvn-20 and Rχvπ-21 each represent independently hydrogen, phenyl, or a straight- chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms; and Rχvn-1 and Rχvn-2 each represent independently straight-chain or branched alkyl with up to 6 carbon atoms, optionally substituted with halogen, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxy, or a straight-chain or branched alkoxy with up to 4 carbon atoms, aryl containing 6-10 carbon atoms optionally substituted with up to five of the same or different substituents selected from halogen, cyano, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, straight- chain or branched alkyl, acyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy with up to 7 carbon atoms and NRxvii- 22 XV11-23; or Rχvn-ι and Rχvπ-2 taken together form a straight-chain or branched alkene or alkane with up to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with halogen, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy or straight-chain or branched alkoxy with up to 5 carbon atoms; Rχvπ-22 and Rχvπ-23 each represent independently hydrogen, phenyl or a straight- chain or branched akyl up to 6 carbon atoms; Rχvπ-3 represents independently for each occurrence hydrogen a straight-chain or branched acyl with up to 20 carbon atoms, a benzoyl optionally substituted with halogen, trifluoromethyl, nitro or trifluoromethoxy, a straight-chained or branched fluoroacyl with up to 8 carbon atoms and 7 fluoro atoms, a cycloalkyl with 3 to 7 carbon atoms, a straight chained or branched alkyl with up to 8 carbon atoms optionally substituted with hydroxyl, a straight-chained or branched alkoxy with up to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with phenyl which may in turn be substituted with halogen, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, or phenyl or a tefrazol substitued phenyl, and/or an alkyl that is optionally substituted with a group according to the formula -ORχvι-24; and Rχvιι-24 is a straight-chained or branched acyl with up to 4 carbon atoms or benzyl. Procedures for preparation of the compounds of formula XVII are described in WO 98/39299, which is hereby incoφorated by reference. Other CETP inhibitors amenable to the present invention are 4- phenyltetrahydroquinolines represented by formula XVIII:
Figure imgf000120_0001
and N oxides and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof; wherein Axvni is phenyl optionally substituted with up to two identical or different substituents in the form of halogen, trifluoromethyl or a sfraight-chain or branched alkyl or alkoxy containing up to three carbon atoms; Dxvm is -C(Rχvιπ-5)(Rχvιιι-6)(Rχvιπ-7), Rχvπι-7) or -CH2-O-CH -; Rχvm-5 and Rχvn-6 are taken together to form =O; or Rχvm-5 is hydrogen and Rχvn-6 is halogen or hydrogen; or Rχvιπ-5 and Rχvιπ-6 are hydrogen; Rχv-111-7 and Rχvιπ-8 each represent independently phenyl, naphthyl, benzothiazolyl, quinolinyl, pyrimidyl or pyridyl with up to four identical or different substituents in the form of halogen, trifluoromethyl, nitro, cyano, trifluoromethoxy, -SO2-CH3 or NRχvπι-
Rχvm-9 and Rχvm-10 each represent independently for each occurrence hydrogen or a straight-chained or branched alkyl of up to three carbon atoms; Eχvιι represents independently for each occurrence cycloalkyl of from three to six carbon atoms or a straight-chained or branched alkyl of up to eight carbon atoms; Rχvιπ-1 is hydroxy; Rχvιπ-2 is hydrogen or methyl; and Rχvπι-3 and Rχvιπ-4 represent independently for each occurrence straight-chained or branched alkyl of up to three carbon atoms; or R.χvπ-3 and Rχvπι-4 taken together form an alkenylene made up of between two and four carbon atoms. Procedures for preparation of the compounds of formula XVIII are described in WO 99/15504 and U.S. 6,291,477, both of which are hereby incoφorated by reference. Assessment ofBioavailablity Assessment of bioavailability from plasma concentration-time data usually involves determining the maximum (peak) plasma drug concentration, the time at which maximum plasma drug concenfration occurs (peak time), and the area under the plasma concentration- time curve (AUC; see Figure 7). The plasma drug concenfration increases with the extent of absoφtion; the peak is reached when the drug elimination rate equals absoφtion rate. Bioavailability determinations based on the peak plasma concentration can be misleading, because drug elimination begins as soon as the drug enters the bloodstream. The most widely used general index of absoφtion rate is peak time; the slower the absoφtion, the later the peak time. However, peak time is often not a good statistical measure because it is a discrete value that depends on frequency of blood sampling and, in the case of relatively flat concentrations near the peak, on assay reproducibility. AUC is the most reliable measure of bioavailability. It is directly proportional to the total amount of unchanged drug that reaches the systemic circulation. For an accurate measurement, blood must be sampled frequently over a long enough time to observe virtually complete drug elimination. Drug products may be considered bioequivalent in extent and rate of absoφtion if their plasma-level curves are essentially superimposable. Drug products that have similar AUCs but differently shaped plasma-level curves are equivalent in extent but differ in their absoφtion rate-time profiles. Combination Therapy One aspect of the present invention relates to combination therapy. This type of therapy is advantageous because the co-administration of active ingredients achieves a therapeutic effect that is greater than the therapeutic effect achieved by administration of only a single therapeutic agent. In a preferred embodiment, the co-administration of two or more therapeutic agents achieves a synergistic effect, i.e., a therapeutic affect that is greater than the sum of the therapeutic effects of the individual components of the combination. The active ingredients that comprise a combination therapy may be administered together via a single dosage form or by separate administration of each active agent, hi certain embodiments, the first and second therapeutic agents are administered in a single dosage form. The agents may be formulated into a single tablet, pill, capsule, or solution for parenteral administration and the like. Alternatively, the first therapeutic agent and the second therapeutic agents may be admimstered as separate compositions, e.g., as separate tablets or solutions. The first active agent may be administered at the same time as the second active agent or the first active agent may be admimstered intermittently with the second active agent. The length of time between administration of the first and second therapeutic agent may be adjusted to achieve the desired therapeutic effect. In certain instances, the second therapeutic agent may be administered only a few minutes (e.g., 1, 2, 5, 10, 30, or 60 min) after administration of the first therapeutic agent. Alternatively, the second therapeutic agent may be administered several hours (e.g., 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 24, or 36 hr) after administration of the first therapeutic agent. In certain embodiments, it may be advantageous to administer more than one dosage of the second therapeutic agent between administrations of the first therapeutic agent. For example, the second therapeutic agent may be administered at 2 hours and then again at 10 hours following administration of the first therapeutic agent. Alternatively, it may be advantageous to administer more than one dosage of the first therapeutic agent between administrations of the second therapeutic agent. Importantly, it is preferred that the therapeutic effects of each active ingredient overlap for at least a portion of the duration of each therapeutic agent so that the overall therapeutic effect of the combination therapy is attributable in part to the combined or synergistic effects of the combination therapy. The dosage of the active agents will generally be dependent upon a number of factors including pharmacodynamic characteristics of each agent of the combination, mode and route of administration of active agent(s), the health of the patient being freated, the extent of treatment desired, the nature and kind of concurrent therapy, if any, and the frequency of treatment and the nature of the effect desired. In general, dosage ranges of the active agents often range from about 0.001 to about 250 mg/kg body weight per day. For a normal adult having a body weight of about 70 kg, a dosage in the range of from about 0.1 to about 25 mg/kg body weight is typically preferred. However, some variability in this general dosage range may be required depending upon the age and weight of the subject being treated, the intended route of administration, the particular agent being administered and the like. Since two or more different active agents are being used together in a combination therapy, the potency of each agent and the interactive effects achieved using them together must be considered. Importantly, the determination of dosage ranges and optimal dosages for a particular mammal is also well within the ability of one of ordinary skill in the art having the benefit of the instant disclosure. In certain embodiments, it may be advantageous for the pharmaceutical combination to have a relatively large amount of the first component compared to the second component. In certain instances, the ratio of the first active agent to second active agent is 30:1, 20:1, 15:1, 10:1, 9:1, 8:1, 7:1, 6:1, or 5:1. In certain embodiments, it may be preferable to have a more equal distribution of pharmaceutical agents. In certain instances, the ratio of the first active agent to the second active agent is 4:1, 3:1, 2:1, 1:1, 1:2, 1:3, or 1 :4. In certain embodiments, it may be advantageous for the pharmaceutical combination to have a relatively large amount of the second component compared to the first component, hi certain instances, the ratio of the second active agent to the first active agent is 30:1, 20:1, 15:1, 10:1, 9:1, 8:1, 7:1, 6:1, or 5:1. Importantly, a composition comprising any of the above-identified combinations of first therapeutic agent and second therapeutic agent may be admimstered in divided doses 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or more times per day or in a form that will provide a rate of release effective to attain the desired results, hi a preferred embodiment, the dosage form contains both the first and second active agents. In a more preferred embodiment, the dosage form only has to be admimstered one time per day and the dosage form contains both the first and second active agents. For example, a formulation intended for oral admimsfration to humans may contain from 0.1 mg to 5 g of the first therapeutic agent and 0.1 mg to 5 g of the second therapeutic agent, both of which are compounded with an appropriate and convenient amount of carrier material varying from about 5 to about 95 percent of the total composition. Unit dosages will generally contain between from about 0.5 mg to about 1500 mg of the first therapeutic agent and 0.5 mg to about 1500 mg of the second therapeutic agent. In a preferred embodiment, the dosage comprises 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 200 mg, 300 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, 800 mg, or 1000 mg, etc., up to 1500 mg of the first therapeutic agent. In a preferred embodiment, the dosage comprises 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 200 mg, 300 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, 800 mg, or 1000 mg, etc., up to 1500 mg of the second therapeutic agent. The optimal ratios of the first and second therapeutic agent can be determined by standard assays known in the art. Application of an equieffective dose substitution model and a curvilinear regression analysis utilizing all the data for the individual compounds and various dose ratios for the combinations can be used to establish the existence of unexpectedly enhanced antihypertensive, antihyperlipidemic, or other related cardiac activity of combinations of active agents, i.e., the resulting activity is greater than the activity expected from the sum of the activities of the individual components. The toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD5o/ED5o. Compounds wliich exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. The data obtained from these cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any compound used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of RT production from infected cells compared to untreated control as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC). Synersism The term "synergistic" refers to a combination which is more effective than the additive effects of any two or more single agents. A synergistic effect permits the effective freatment of a disease using lower amounts (doses) of either individual therapy. The lower doses result in lower toxicity without reduced efficacy, hi addition, a synergistic effect can result in improved efficacy, e.g., improved antiviral activity. Finally, synergy may result in an improved avoidance or reduction of disease as compared to any single therapy. Combination therapy often allows for the use of lower doses of the first therapeutic or the second therapeutic agent (referred to as "apparent one-way synergy" herein), or lower doses of both therapeutic agents (referred to as "two-way synergy" herein) than would normally be required when either drug is used alone. By using lower amounts of either or both drugs, the side effects associated with them are reduced. In certain embodiments, the synergism exhibited between the second therapeutic agent and the first therapeutic agent is such that the dosage of the first therapeutic agent would be sub-therapeutic if admimstered without the dosage of the second therapeutic agent, hi other embodiments, the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising an therapeutically effective dose of a first therapeutic agent together with a dose of a second therapeutic agent effective to augment the therapeutic effect of the first therapeutic agent. Alternatively, the synergism exhibited between the second therapeutic agent and the first therapeutic agent is such that the dosage of the second therapeutic agent would be sub-therapeutic if administered without the dosage of the first therapeutic agent. In other embodiments, the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising an therapeutically effective dose of a second therapeutic agent together with a dose of a first therapeutic agent effective to augment the therapeutic effect of the second therapeutic agent. In certain preferred embodiments, the invention is directed in part to synergistic combinations of the first therapeutic agent in an amount sufficient to render a therapeutic effect together with a second therapeutic agent. For example, in certain embodiments a therapeutic effect is attained which is at least about 2 (or at least about 4, 6, 8, or 10) times greater than that obtained with the dose of the first therapeutic agent alone, hi certain embodiments, the synergistic combination provides a therapeutic effect which is up to about 20, 30 or 40 times greater than that obtained with the dose of first therapeutic agent alone. In such embodiments, the synergistic combinations display what is referred to herein as an "apparent one-way synergy", meaning that the dose of second therapeutic agent synergistically potentiates the effect of the first therapeutic agent, but the dose of first therapeutic agent does not appear to significantly potentiate the effect of the second therapeutic agent. hi certain embodiments, the combination of active agents exhibit two-way synergism, meaning that the second therapeutic agent potentiates the effect of the first therapeutic agent, and the first therapeutic agent potentiates the effect of the second therapeutic agent. Thus, other embodiments of the invention relate to combinations of a second therapeutic agent and a first therapeutic agent where the dose of each drug is reduced due to the synergism between the drugs, and the therapeutic effect derived from the combination of drugs in reduced doses is enhanced. The two-way synergism is not always readily apparent in actual dosages due to the potency ratio of the first therapeutic agent to the second therapeutic agent. For instance, two-way synergism can be difficult to detect when one therapeutic agent displays much greater therapeutic potency relative to the other therapeutic agent. The synergistic effects of combination therapy may be evaluated by biological activity assays. For example, the therapeutic agents are be mixed at molar ratios designed to give approximately equipotent therapeutic effects based on the EC90 values. Then, three different molar ratios are used for each combination to allow for variability in the estimates of relative potency. These molar ratios are maintained throughout the dilution series. The corresponding monotherapies are also evaluated in parallel to the combination freatments using the standard primary assay format. A comparison of the therapeutic effect of the combination treatment to the therapeutic effect of the monotherapy gives a measure of the synergistic effect. Further details on the design of combination analyses can be found in B E Korba (1996) Antiviral Res. 29:49. Analysis of synergism, additivity, or antagonism can be determined by analysis of the aforementioned data using the CalcuSyn™ program (Biosoft, Inc.). This program evaluates drug interactions by use of the widely accepted method of Chou and Talalay combined with a statistically evaluation using the Monte Carlo statistical package. The data are displayed in several different formats including median- effect and dose-effects plots, isobolograms, and combination index [CI] plots with standard deviations. For the latter analysis, a CI greater than 1.0 indicates antagonism and a CI less than 1.0 indicates synergism. Compositions of the invention present the opportunity for obtaining relief from moderate to severe cases of disease. Due to the synergistic and/or additive effects provided by the inventive combination of the first and second therapeutic agent, it may be possible to use reduced dosages of each of therapeutic agent. By using lesser amounts of other or both drugs, the side effects associated with each may be reduced in number and degree. Moreover, the inventive combination avoids side effects to which some patients are particularly sensitive. Compositions of the Invention One aspect of the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition, comprising optically pure (S)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 500 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 250 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 100 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester fransfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an ICso less than about 50 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 25 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 10 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A, CP 532623 , JTT-705, niceritrol, PD 140195, SC-744, SC-794, SC-795, SC-364, SCH 58149, Synthetic Peptide A, torcetrapib, U-106305, wiedendiol-A, wiedendiol-B, WRMWY, SCH-50678, puupenhenone triacetate, puupenhenone, avarol, aureol, illimaquinone, spongiatriol, spongiadiol, sulfiricin, compounds 100-203, compound of formula I-XVIII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is JTT-705, SC-795, torcetrapib, compounds 177-181, compounds 186-203, compound of formula IV, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is SC-795 or torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of either of them. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned pharmaceutical compositions, wherein said optically pure (S)-amlodipine is optically pure (<S)-amlodipine malate, or a polymoφh, pseudopolymoφh or solvate thereof. Another aspect of the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition consisting essentially of optically pure (S)-amlodipine, a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC5Q less than about 500 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 250 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. h certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 100 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 50 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 25 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 10 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A, CP 532623 , JTT-705, nicerifrol, PD 140195, SC-744, SC-794, SC-795, SC-364, SCH 58149, Synthetic Peptide A, torcetrapib, U-106305, wiedendiol-A, wiedendiol-B, WRMWY, SCH-50678, puupenhenone triacetate, puupenhenone, avarol, aureol, illimaquinone, spongiatriol, spongiadiol, sulfiricin, compounds 100-203, compound of formula I-XVIII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is JTT-705, SC-795, torcetrapib, compounds 177-181, compounds 186-203, compound of formula IV, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is SC-795 or torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of either of them. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned pharmaceutical composition, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof. h certain embodiments, the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned pharmaceutical compositions, wherein said optically pure (S)-amlodipine is optically pure (<S)-amlodipine malate, or a polymoφh, pseudopolymoφh or solvate thereof. Methods of the Invention Another aspect of the present invention relates to a method of treating a patient suffering from a medical condition selected from the group consisting of hypertension, congestive heart failure, angina, hyperlipidemia, coronary artery disease, atherosclerosis, congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, arrhythmia, artheroscierosis, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic cardiac myopathy, renal insufficiency, peripheral vascular disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, cognitive dysfunction, stroke, and headache; comprising the step of: co-administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of optically pure (ιS)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 500 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 250 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 100 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester fransfer protein. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 50 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 25 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 10 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester fransfer protein. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A, CP 532623 , JTT-705, niceritrol, PD 140195, SC-744, SC- 794, SC-795, SC-364, SCH 58149, Synthetic Peptide A, torcetrapib, U-106305, wiedendiol-A, wiedendiol-B, WRMWY, SCH-50678, puupenhenone triacetate, puupenhenone, avarol, aureol, illimaquinone, spongiatriol, spongiadiol, sulfiricin, compounds 100-203, compound of formula I-XVIII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is JTT-705, SC-795, torcetrapib, compounds 177-181, compounds 186-203, compound of formula IV, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is SC-795 or torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of either of them. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cholesteryl fransfer protein inhibitor is torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned methods, wherein said optically pure S)-amlodipine is optically pure (S)-amlodipine malate, or a polymoφh, pseudopolymoφh or solvate thereof. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned methods, wherein said medical condition is hypertension, congestive heart failure, angina, hyperlipidemia, coronary artery disease, atherosclerosis, or myocardial infarction. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned methods, wherein said medical condition is hypertension or hyperlipidemia. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to any of the aforementioned methods, wherein said medical condition is hypertension. Immediate/Sustained Release Combination Therapy Dosase Forms The combination therapy may be formulated in an immediate release dosage form or a sustained release dosage form. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to immediate release dosage forms of the first and second therapeutic agents. An immediate release dosage form may be formulated as a tablet or multiparticulate which may be encapsulated. Other immediate release dosage forms known in the art can be employed. In certain embodiments, the combination of therapeutic agents may be formulated to provide for an increased duration (sustained release) of therapeutic action. These formulations, at comparable daily dosages of conventional immediate release drug, are often associated with a lower incidence or severity of adverse drug reactions; and they can also be administered at a lower daily dose than conventional oral medication while maintaining therapeutic activity. In certain embodiments, the combination therapy can be formulated to delivery the therapeutic agents at the same time or at separate times. In certain embodiments, the first and second therapeutic agents are administered via an oral solid dosage form that mcludes a sustained release carrier causing the sustained release of the first therapeutic agent, or both the first therapeutic agent and the second therapeutic agent when the dosage form contacts gastrointestinal fluid. The sustained release dosage form may comprise a plurality of substrates which include the drugs. The subsfrates may comprise matrix spheroids or may comprise inert pharmaceutically acceptable beads which are coated with the drugs. The coated beads are then preferably overcoated with a sustained release coating comprising the sustained release carrier. The matrix spheroid may include the sustained release carrier in the matrix itself; or the matrix may comprise a normal release matrix containing the drugs, the matrix having a coating applied thereon which comprises the sustained release carrier. In other embodiments, the oral solid dosage form comprises a tablet core containing the drugs within a normal release matrix, with the tablet core being coated with a sustained release coating comprising the sustained release carrier. In further embodiments, the tablet contains the drugs within a sustained release matrix comprising the sustained release carrier, hi additional embodiments, the tablet contains the first therapeutic agent within a sustained release matrix and the second therapeutic agent coated into the tablet as an immediate release layer. The term "sustained release" is defined for puφoses of the present invention as the release of the therapeutic agent from the formulation at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations (levels) are maintained within the therapeutic range (above the minimum effective hypertensive or hyperlipidemic concenfration or "MEAC") but below toxic levels over a period of time of about 12 hours or longer. The first and second therapeutic agents can be formulated as a controlled or sustained release oral formulation in any suitable tablet, coated tablet or multiparticulate formulation known to those skilled in the art. The sustained release dosage form may optionally include a sustained released carrier which is incoφorated into a matrix along with the active agents, or which is applied as a sustained release coating. The sustained release dosage form may include the first therapeutic agent in sustained release form and second therapeutic agent in the sustained release form or in immediate release form. The first therapeutic agent may be incoφorated into the sustained release matrix along with the second therapeutic agent; incoφorated into the sustained release coating; incoφorated as a separated sustained release layer or immediate release layer; or may be incoφorated as a powder, granulation, etc., in a gelatin capsule with the substrates of the present invention. Alternatively, the sustained release dosage form may have the first therapeutic agent in the sustained release form and the second therapeutic agent in the sustained release form or immediate release form. An oral dosage form according to the invention may be provided as, for example, granules, spheroids, beads, pellets (hereinafter collectively referred to as "multiparticulates") and/or particles. An amount of the multiparticulates which is effective to provide the desired dose of the therapeutic agents over time may be placed in a capsule or may be incoφorated in any other suitable oral solid form. In one certain embodiments of the present invention, the sustained release dosage form comprises such particles containing or comprising the active ingredient, wherein the particles have diameter from about 0.1 mm to about 2.5 mm, preferably from about 0.5 mm to about 2 mm. In certain embodiments, the particles comprise normal release matrixes containing the first therapeutic agent with the second therapeutic agent. These particles are then coated with the sustained release carrier in embodiments where the first therapeutic agent is immediately released, the first therapeutic agent may be included in separate normal release matrix particles, or may be co-administered in a different immediate release composition which is either enveloped within a gelatin capsule or is administered separately. In other embodiments, the particles comprise inert beads which are coated with the second therapeutic agent with the first therapeutic agents. Thereafter, a coating comprising the sustained release carrier is applied onto the beads as an overcoat. The particles are preferably film coated with a material that permits release of the active agents at a sustained rate in an aqueous medium. The film coat is chosen so as to achieve, in combination with the other stated properties, a desired in vitro release rate. The sustained release coating formulations of the present invention should be capable of producing a strong, continuous film that is smooth and elegant, capable of supporting pigments and other coating additives, non-toxic, inert, and tack-free. Coatings The dosage forms of the present invention may optionally be coated with one or more materials suitable for the regulation of release or for the protection of the formulation. In one embodiment, coatings are provided to permit either pH-dependent or pH- independent release, e.g., when exposed to gastrointestinal fluid. A pH-dependent coating serves to release the first active agent, second active agent, or both in the desired areas of the gastro-intestinal (GI) tract, e.g., the stomach or small intestine, such that an absoφtion profile is provided which is capable of providing at least about twelve hours and preferably up to twenty-four hours of therapeutic benefit to a patient. When a pH-independent coating is desired, the coating is designed to achieve optimal release regardless of pH-changes in the environmental fluid, e.g., the GI tract. It is also possible to formulate compositions wliich release a portion of the dose in one desired area of the GI tract, e.g., the stomach, and release the remainder of the dose in another area of the GI tract, e.g., the small intestine. In certain embodiments, the first therapeutic agent is released in one area of the GI fract and the second therapeutic agent is released in a second area of the GI tract. In certain embodiments, the first and second therapeutic agents are released in nearly equal amounts at the same location in the GI tract. Formulations according to the invention that utilize pH-dependent coatings to obtain formulations may also impart a repeat-action effect whereby unprotected drug is coated over the enteric coat and is released in the stomach, while the remainder, being protected by the enteric coating, is released further down the gastrointestinal tract. Coatings which are pH-dependent may be used in accordance with the present invention include shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP), polyvinyl acetate phthalate (PVAP), hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, and methacrylic acid ester copolymers, zein, and the like. Thus, one aspect of the present invention relates to a formulation wherem the first therapeutic agent is coated over the enteric coat and released into the stomach while the second therapeutic agent is protected by the enteric coating and is released further down the GI fract. Alternatively, one aspect of the present invention relates to a formulation wherein the second therapeutic agent is coated over the enteric coat and released into the stomach while the first therapeutic agent is protected by the enteric coating and is released further down the GI tract. In certain preferred embodiments, the substrate (e.g., tablet core bead, matrix particle) containing the first therapeutic agent (with or without the second therapeutic agent) is coated with a hydrophobic material selected from (i) an alkylcellulose; (ii) an acrylic polymer; or (iii) mixtures thereof. The coating may be applied in the form of an organic or aqueous solution or dispersion. The coating may be applied to obtain a weight gain from about 2 to about 25% of the substrate in order to obtain a desired sustained release profile. Alternatively, the invention relates to instances wherein the subsfrate (e.g., tablet core bead, matrix particle) containing the second therapeutic agent (with or without the first therapeutic agent) is coated with a hydrophobic material. Such formulations are described, e.g., in detail in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,273,760 and 5,286,493. Other examples of sustained release formulations and coatings which may be used in accordance with the present invention include U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,324,351; 5,356,467, and 5,472,712. Alkylcellulose Polymers Cellulosic materials and polymers, including alkylcelluloses, provide hydrophobic materials well suited for coating the formulations according to the invention. Simply by way of example, one preferred alkylcellulosic polymer is ethylcellulose, although the artisan will appreciate that other cellulose and/or alkylcellulose polymers may be readily employed, singly or in any combination, as all or part of a hydrophobic coating. One commercially-available aqueous dispersion of ethylcellulose is Aquacoat® (FMC Coφ., Philadelphia, Pa., U.S.A.). Aquacoat® is prepared by dissolving the ethylcellulose in a water-immiscible organic solvent and then emulsifying the same in water in the presence of a surfactant and a stabilizer. After homogenization to generate submicron droplets, the organic solvent is evaporated under vacuum to form a pseudolatex. The plasticizer is not incoφorated in the pseudolatex during the manufacturing phase. Thus, prior to using the same as a coating, it is necessary to intimately mix the Aquacoat® with a suitable plasticizer prior to use. Another aqueous dispersion of ethylcellulose is commercially available as Surelease® (Colorcon, Inc., West Point, Pa., U.S.A.). This product is prepared by incoφorating plasticizer into the dispersion during the manufacturing process. A hot melt of a polymer, plasticizer (dibutyl sebacate), and stabilizer (oleic acid) is prepared as a homogeneous mixture, which is then diluted with an alkaline solution to obtain an aqueous dispersion which can be applied directly onto substrates. Acrylic Polymers In other preferred embodiments of the present invention, the hydrophobic material comprising the controlled release coating is a pharmaceutically acceptable acrylic polymer, including but not limited to acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxyethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), methacrylic acid alkylamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polymethacrylate, poly(methyl methacrylate) copolymer, polyacrylamide, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride), and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers. In certain preferred embodiments, the acrylic polymer is comprised of one or more ammonio methacrylate copolymers. Ammonio methacrylate copolymers are well known in the art, and are copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic acid esters with a low content of quaternary ammonium groups. In order to obtain a desirable dissolution profile, it may be necessary to incoφorate in a coating two or more ammonio methacrylate copolymers having differing physical properties, such as different molar ratios of the quaternary ammonium groups to the neutral (meth)acrylic esters. Certain methacrylic acid ester-type polymers are useful for preparing pH-dependent coatings which may be used in accordance with the present invention. For example, there are a family of copolymers synthesized from diethylaminoethyl methacrylate and other neutral methacrylic esters, also known as methacrylic acid copolymer or polymeric methacrylates, commercially available as Eudragit® from Rohm Tech, Inc. There are several different types of Eudragit®. For example, Eudragit® E is an example of a methacrylic acid copolymer which swells and dissolves in acidic media. Eudragit® L is a methacrylic acid copolymer which does not swell at about pH<5.7 and is soluble at about pH>6. Eudragit® S does not swell at about pH<6.5 and is soluble at about pH>7. Eudragit® RL and Eudragit® RS are water swellable, and the amount of water absorbed by these polymers is pH-dependent, however, dosage forms coated with Eudragit® RL and RS are pH-independent. In certain preferred embodiments, the acrylic coating comprises a mixture of two acrylic resin lacquers commercially available from Rohm Pharma under the Tradenames Eudragit® RL30D and Eudragit® RS30D, respectively. Eudragit® RL30D and Eudragit® RS30D are copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters with a low content of quaternary ammonium groups, the molar ratio of ammonium groups to the remaining neutral (meth)acrylic esters being 1 :20 in Eudragit® RL30D and 1 :40 in Eudragit® RS30D. The mean molecular weight is about 150,000. The code designations RL (high permeability) and RS (low permeability) refer to the permeability properties of these agents. Eudragit® RL/RS mixtures are insoluble in water and in digestive fluids. However, coatings formed from the same are swellable and permeable in aqueous solutions and digestive fluids. The Eudragit® RL/RS dispersions of the present invention may be mixed together in any desired ratio in order to ultimately obtain a sustained release formulation having a desirable dissolution profile. Desirable sustained release formulations may be obtained, for instance, from a retardant coating derived from 100% Eudragit® RL, 50% Eudragit® RL and 50% Eudragit® RS, and 10% Eudragit® RL:Eudragit® 90% RS. Of course, one skilled in the art will recognize that other acrylic polymers may also be used, such as, for example, Eudragit® L. Plasticizers In embodiments of the present invention where the coating comprises an aqueous dispersion of a hydrophobic material, the inclusion of an effective amount of a plasticizer in the aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material will further improve the physical properties of the sustained release coating. For example, because ethylcellulose has a relatively high glass transition temperature and does not form flexible films under normal coating conditions, it is preferable to incoφorate a plasticizer into an ethylcellulose coating containing sustained release coating before using the same as a coating material. Generally, the amount of plasticizer included in a coating solution is based on the concentration of the film-former, e.g., most often from about 1 to about 50 percent by weight of the film-former. Concentration of the plasticizer, however, can only be properly determined after careful experimentation with the particular coating solution and method of application. Examples of suitable plasticizers for ethylcellulose include water insoluble plasticizers such as dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate, and triacetin, although it is possible that other water-insoluble plasticizers (such as acetylated monoglycerides, phthalate esters, castor oil, etc.) maybe used. Triethyl citrate is an especially preferred plasticizer for the aqueous dispersions of ethyl cellulose of the present invention. Examples of suitable plasticizers for the acrylic polymers of the present invention include, but are not limited to citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate NF XVI, tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, and possibly 1,2-propylene glycol. Other plasticizers which have proved to be suitable for enhancing the elasticity of the films formed from acrylic films such as Eudragit® RL/RS lacquer solutions include polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil, and triacetin. Triethyl citrate is an especially preferred plasticizer for the aqueous dispersions of ethyl cellulose of the present invention. It has further been found that the addition of a small amount of talc reduces the tendency of the aqueous dispersion to stick during processing, and acts as a polishing agent. Processes for Preparing Coated Beads When the aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material is used to coat inert pharmaceutical beads such as nu pariel 18/20 beads, a plurality of the resultant stabilized solid controlled release beads may thereafter be placed in a gelatin capsule in an amount sufficient to provide an effective controlled release dose when ingested and contacted by an environmental fluid, e.g., gastric fluid or dissolution media. The stabilized controlled release bead formulations of the present invention slowly release the therapeutically active agent, e.g., when ingested and exposed to gastric fluids, and then to intestinal fluids. The controlled release profile of the formulations of the invention can be altered, for example, by varying the amount of overcoating with the aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material, altering the manner in which the plasticizer is added to the aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material, by varying the amount of plasticizer relative to hydrophobic material, by the inclusion of additional ingredients or excipients, by altering the method of manufacture, etc. The dissolution profile of the ultimate product may also be modified, for example, by increasing or decreasing the thickness of the retardant coating. Spheroids or beads coated with a therapeutically active agent are prepared, e.g., by dissolving the therapeutically active agent in water and then spraying the solution onto a substrate, for example, nu pariel 18/20 beads, using a Wuster insert. Optionally, additional ingredients are also added prior to coating the beads in order to assist the binding of the active agents to the beads, and/or to color the solution, etc. For example, a product which includes hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, etc. with or without colorant (e.g., Opadry , commercially available from Colorcon, Inc.) may be added to the solution and the solution mixed (e.g., for about 1 hour) prior to application of the same onto the beads. The resultant coated substrate, in this example beads, may then be optionally overcoated with a barrier agent, to separate the therapeutically active agent from the hydrophobic controlled release coating. An example of a suitable barrier agent is one which comprises hydroxypropylmethylcellulose. However, any film-former known in the art may be used. It is preferred that the barrier agent does not affect the dissolution rate of the final product. The beads may then be overcoated with an aqueous dispersion of the hydrophobic material. The aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material preferably further includes an effective amount of plasticizer, e.g. triethyl citrate. Pre-formulated aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose, such as Aquacoat® or Surelease®, may be used. If Surelease® is used, it is not necessary to separately add a plasticizer. Alternatively, pre-fonnulated aqueous dispersions of acrylic polymers such as Eudragit® can be used. The coating solutions of the present invention preferably contain, in addition to the film-former, plasticizer, and solvent system (i.e., water), a colorant to provide elegance and product distinction. Color may be added to the solution of the therapeutically active agent instead, or in addition to the aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material. For example, color be added to Aquacoat® via the use of alcohol or propylene glycol based color dispersions, milled aluminum lakes and opacifiers such as titanium dioxide by adding color with shear to water soluble polymer solution and then using low shear to the plasticized Aquacoat®. Alternatively, any suitable method of providing color to the formulations of the present invention may be used. Suitable ingredients for providing color to the formulation when an aqueous dispersion of an acrylic polymer is used include titanium dioxide and color pigments, such as iron oxide pigments. The incoφoration of pigments, may, however, increase the retard effect of the coating. The plasticized aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material may be applied onto the substrate comprising the therapeutically active agent by spraying using any suitable spray equipment known in the art. In a preferred method, a Wurster fluidized-bed system is used in which an air jet, injected from underneath, fluidizes the core material and effects drying while the acrylic polymer coating is sprayed on. A sufficient amount of the aqueous dispersion of hydrophobic material to obtain a predetermined controlled release of said therapeutically active agent when said coated substrate is exposed to aqueous solutions, e.g., gastric fluid, is preferably applied, taking into account the physical characteristics of the therapeutically active agent, the manner of incoφoration of the plasticizer, etc. After coating with the hydrophobic material, a further overcoat of a film-former, such as Opadry®, is optionally applied to the beads. This overcoat is provided, if at all, in order to substantially reduce agglomeration of the beads. The release of the therapeutically active agent from the controlled release formulation of the present invention can be further influenced, i.e., adjusted to a desired rate, by the addition of one or more release-modifying agents, or by providing one or more passageways through the coating. The ratio of hydrophobic material to water soluble material is determined by, among other factors, the release rate required and the solubility characteristics of the materials selected. The release-modifying agents which function as pore-formers may be organic or inorganic, and include materials that can be dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use. The pore-formers may comprise one or more hydrophilic materials such as hydroxypropylmethylcellulose. The sustained release coatings of the present invention can also include erosion- promoting agents such as starch and gums. The sustained release coatings of the present invention can also include materials useful for making microporous lamina in the environment of use, such as polycarbonates comprised of linear polyesters of carbonic acid in which carbonate groups reoccur in the polymer chain. The release-modifying agent may also comprise a semi-permeable polymer. In certain preferred embodiments, the release-modifying agent is selected from hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, lactose, metal stearates, and mixtures of any of the foregoing. The sustained release coatings of the present invention may also include an exit means comprising at least one passageway, orifice, or the like. The passageway may be formed by such methods as those disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,845,770; 3,916,889; 4,063,064; and 4,088,864. The passageway can have any shape such as round, triangular, square, elliptical, irregular, etc. Matrix Bead Formulations In other embodiments of the present invention, the controlled release formulation is achieved via a matrix having a controlled release coating as set forth above. The present invention may also utilize a controlled release matrix that affords in-vitro dissolution rates of the active agent within the preferred ranges and that releases the active agent in a pH- dependent or pH-independent manner. The materials suitable for inclusion in a controlled release matrix will depend on the method used to form the matrix. For example, a matrix in addition to the first active agent and (optionally) the second active agent may include: (1) Hydrophilic and/or hydrophobic materials, such as gums, cellulose ethers, acrylic resins, protein derived materials; the list is not meant to be exclusive, and any pharmaceutically acceptable hydrophobic material or hydrophilic material which is capable of imparting controlled release of the active agent and which melts (or softens to the extent necessary to be extruded) may be used in accordance with the present invention. (2) Digestible, long chain (C8 -C50, especially C12 -C40), substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as fatty acids, fatty alcohols, glyceryl esters of fatty acids, mineral and vegetable oils and waxes, and stearyl alcohol; and polyalkylene glycols. The hydrophobic material is preferably selected from the group consisting of alkylcelluloses, acrylic and methacrylic acid polymers and copolymers, shellac, zein, hydrogenated castor oil, hydrogenated vegetable oil, or mixtures thereof. In certain preferred embodiments of the present invention, the hydrophobic material is a pharmaceutically acceptable acrylic polymer, including but not limited to acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxyethyl methacrylates, cynaoethyl methacrylate, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), methacrylic acid alkylamine copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), poly(methacrylic acid)(anhydride), polymethacrylate, polyacrylamide, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride), and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers. hi other embodiments, the hydrophobic material is selected from materials such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses such as hydroxypropylmethylcellulose and mixtures of the foregoing. Prefeπed hydrophobic materials are water-insoluble with more or less pronounced hydrophilic and/or hydrophobic frends. Preferably, the hydrophobic materials useful in the invention have a melting point from about 30 to about 200 C, preferably from about 45 to about 90 C. Specifically, the hydrophobic material may comprise natural or synthetic waxes, fatty alcohols (such as lauryl, myristyl, stearyl, cetyl or preferably cetostearyl alcohol), fatty acids, including but not limited to fatty acid esters, fatty acid glycerides (mono-, di-, and tri-glycerides), hydrogenated fats, hydrocarbons, normal waxes, stearic aid, stearyl alcohol and hydrophobic and hydrophilic materials having hydrocarbon backbones. Suitable waxes include, for example, beeswax, glycowax, castor wax and camauba wax. For puφoses of the present invention, a wax-like substance is defined as any material which is normally solid at room temperature and has a melting point of from about 30 to about 100 C. Suitable hydrophobic materials which may be used in accordance with the present invention include digestible, long chain (C8 -C50, especially C12 -C40), substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as fatty acids, fatty alcohols, glyceryl esters of fatty acids, mineral and vegetable oils and natural and synthetic waxes. Hydrocarbons having a melting point of between 25 and 90 C. are preferred. Of the long chain hydrocarbon materials, fatty (aliphatic) alcohols are prefeπed in certain embodiments. The oral dosage form may contain up to 60% (by weight) of at least one digestible, long chain hydrocarbon. In certain instances, a combination of two or more hydrophobic materials are included in the matrix formulations. If an additional hydrophobic material is included, it may be selected from natural and synthetic waxes, fatty acids, fatty alcohols, and mixtures of the same. Examples include beeswax, camauba wax, stearic acid and stearyl alcohol. This list is not meant to be exclusive. One particular suitable matrix comprises at least one water soluble hydroxyalkyl cellulose, at least one C12 -C36, preferably 4 -C22, aliphatic alcohol and, optionally, at least one polyalkylene glycol. The at least one hydroxyalkyl cellulose is preferably a hydroxy ( to C6) alkyl cellulose, such as hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose and, especially, hydroxyethylcellulose. The amount of the at least one hydroxyalkyl cellulose in the present oral dosage form will be determined, inter alia, by the precise rate of release desired for the therapeutic agent. The at least one aliphatic alcohol may be, for example, lauryl alcohol, myristyl alcohol or stearyl alcohol. In certain embodiments of the present oral dosage form, however, the at least one aliphatic alcohol is cetyl alcohol or cetostearyl alcohol. The amount of the at least one aliphatic alcohol in the present oral dosage form will be determined, as above, by the precise rate of release desired for the therapeutic agent. It will also depend on whether at least one polyalkylene glycol is present in or absent from the oral dosage form. In the absence of at least one polyalkylene glycol, the oral dosage form preferably contains between 20% and 50% (by wt) of the at least one aliphatic alcohol. When at least one polyalkylene glycol is present in the oral dosage form, then the combined weight of the at least one aliphatic alcohol and the at least one polyalkylene glycol preferably constitutes between 20% and 50% (by wt) of the total dosage. In one embodiment, the ratio of, e.g., the at least one hydroxyalkyl cellulose or acrylic resin to the at least one aliphatic alcohol/polyalkylene glycol determines, to a considerable extent, the release rate of the active agent from the formulation. A ratio of the at least one hydroxyalkyl cellulose to the at least one aliphatic alcohol/polyalkylene glycol of between 1 :2 and 1 :4 is prefeπed, with a ratio of between 1 :3 and 1 :4 being particularly prefeπed. The at least one polyalkylene glycol may be, for example, polypropylene glycol or, which is prefeπed, polyethylene glycol. The number average molecular weight of the at least one polyalkylene glycol is prefeπed between 1,000 and 15,000 especially between 1,500 and 12,000. Another suitable controlled release matrix would comprise an alkylcellulose (especially ethyl cellulose), a C12 to C36 aliphatic alcohol and, optionally, a polyalkylene glycol. In another prefeπed embodiment, the matrix includes a pharmaceutically acceptable combination of at least two hydrophobic materials, h addition to the above ingredients, a controlled release matrix may also contain suitable quantities of other materials, e.g. diluents, lubricants, binders, granulating aids, colorants, flavorants and glidants that are conventional in the pharmaceutical art. Pharmaceutical Compositions In another aspect, the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the compounds described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents. As described in detail below, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, e.g., those targeted for buccal, sublingual, and systemic absoφtion, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous or epidural injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension, or sustained-release formulation; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment, or a controlled-release patch or spray applied to the skin; (4) infravaginally or infrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam; (5) sublingually; (6) ocularly; (7) transdermally; or (8) nasally. The phrase "therapeutically-effective amount" as used herein means that amount of a compound, material, or composition comprising a compound of the present invention which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect in at least a sub-population of cells in an animal at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment. The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable" is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. The phrase "pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier" as used herein means a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, manufacturing aid (e.g., lubricant, talc magnesium, calcium or zinc stearate, or steric acid), or solvent encapsulating material, involved in caπying or fransporting the subject compound from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body. Each carrier must be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as com starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, com oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15) alginic acid; (16) pyrogen-free water; (17) isotonic saline; (18) Ringer's solution; (19) ethyl alcohol; (20) pH buffered solutions; (21) polyesters, polycarbonates and/or polyanhydrides; and (22) other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical formulations. As set out above, certain embodiments of the present compounds may contain a basic functional group, such as amino or alkylamino, and are, thus, capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable acids. The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable salts" in this respect, refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ in the administration vehicle or the dosage form manufacturing process, or by separately reacting a purified compound of the invention in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed during subsequent purification. Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tarfrate, napthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, and laurylsulphonate salts and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutical Salts", J Pharm. Sci. 66:1-19) The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the subject compounds include the conventional nontoxic salts or quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds, e.g., from non-toxic organic or inorganic acids. For example, such conventional nontoxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloride, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric, and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, palmitic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2- acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isothionic, and the like. In other cases, the compounds of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable bases. The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable salts" in these instances refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic base addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can likewise be prepared in situ in the administration vehicle or the dosage form manufacturing process, or by separately reacting the purified compound in its free acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine. Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts and the like. Representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al., supra) Wetting agents, emulsifiers and lubricants, such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions. Examples of pharmaceutically-acceptable antioxidants include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like. Formulations of the present invention include those suitable for oral, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal and/or parenteral administration. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage foπn and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally, out of one hundred per cent, this amount will range from about 0.1 per cent to about ninety-nine percent of active ingredient, preferably from about 5 per cent to about 70 per cent, most preferably from about 10 per cent to about 30 per cent. In certain embodiments, a formulation of the present invention comprises an excipient selected from the group consisting of cyclodextrins, celluloses, liposomes, micelle forming agents, e.g., bile acids, and polymeric carriers, e.g., polyesters and polyanhydrides; and a compound of the present invention. In certain embodiments, an aforementioned formulation renders orally bioavailable a compound of the present invention. Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association a compound of the present invention with the caπier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a compound of the present invention with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product. Formulations of the invention suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non- aqueous liquid, or as an oil-in- water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as an active ingredient. A compound of the present invention may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste. In solid dosage forms of the invention for oral administration (capsules, tablets, pills, dragees, powders, granules, frouches and the like), the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyπolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absoφtion accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds and surfactants, such as poloxamer and sodium lauryl sulfate; (7) wetting agents, such as, for example, cetyl alcohol, glycerol monostearate, and non-ionic surfactants; (8) absorbents, such as kaolin and bentonite clay; (9) lubricants, such as talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, zinc stearate, sodium stearate, stearic acid, and mixtures thereof; (10) coloring agents; and (11) controlled release agents such as crospovidone or ethyl cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-shelled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like. A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent. The tablets, and other solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, such as dragees, capsules, pills and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres. They may be formulated for rapid release, e.g., freeze-dried. They may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incoφorating sterilizing agents in the foπn of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use. These compositions may also optionally contain opacifymg agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. The active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients. Liquid dosage forms for oral admimsfration of the compounds of the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active ingredient, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, com, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents. Suspensions, in addition to the active compounds, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof. Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more compounds of the invention with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound. Formulations of the present invention which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate. Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants. The active compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required. The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound of this invention, excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof. Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to a compound of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane. Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound of the present invention to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the compound in the proper medium. Absoφtion enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel. Ophthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the like, are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention. Pharmaceutical compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more compounds of the invention in combination with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain sugars, alcohols, antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents. Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers which may be employed in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants. These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms upon the subject compounds may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absoφtion of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents wliich delay absoφtion such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin. The therapeutic agent alone or on combination with other therapeutic agents can be employed in admixtures with conventional excipients, i.e., pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic carrier substances suitable for oral, parenteral, nasal, intravenous, subcutaneous, enteral, or any other suitable mode of administration, known to the art. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include but are not limited to water, salt solutions, alcohols, gum arabic, vegetable oils, benzyl alcohols, polyethylene glycols, gelate, carbohydrates such as lactose, amylose or starch, magnesium stearate talc, silicic acid, viscous paraffin, perfume oil, fatty acid monoglycerides and diglycerides, pentaerythritol fatty acid esters, hydroxymethylcellulose, polyvinylpyπolidone, etc. The pharmaceutical preparations can be sterilized and if desired mixed with auxiliary agents, e.g., lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifiers, salts for influencing osmotic pressure buffers, coloring, flavoring and/or aromatic substances and the like. They can also be combined where desired with other active agents, e.g., other analgesic agents. For parenteral application, particularly suitable are oily or aqueous solutions, as well as suspensions, emulsions, or implants, including suppositories. Ampoules are convenient unit dosages. For oral application, particularly suitable are tablets, dragees, liquids, drops, suppositories, or capsules, caplets and gelcaps. The compositions intended for oral use may be prepared according to any method known in the art and such compositions may contain one or more agents selected from the group consisting of inert, non-toxic pharmaceutically excipients which are suitable for the manufacture of tablets. Such excipients include, for example an inert diluent such as lactose; granulating and disintegrating agents such as cornstarch; binding agents such as starch; and lubricating agents such as magnesium stearate. The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques for elegance or to delay release of the active ingredients. Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert diluent. Aqueous suspensions contain the above-identified combination of drugs and that mixture has one or more excipients suitable as suspending agents, for example pharmaceutically acceptable synthetic gums such as hydroxypropylmethylcellulose or natural gums. Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the above-identified combination of drugs in a vegetable oil or mineral oil. The oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax or cetyl alcohol. A syrup, elixir, or the like can be used wherein a sweetened vehicle is employed. Injectable suspensions may also be prepared, in which case appropriate liquid carriers, suspending agents and the like may be employed. It is also possible to freeze-dry the active compounds and use the obtained lyophilized compounds, for example, for the preparation of products for injection. One aspect of combination therapy pertains to a method for providing effective therapeutic treatment in humans, comprising administering an effective or sub-therapeutic amount of a first therapeutic agent; and administering an effective amount of a second therapeutic agent in an amount effective to augment the therapeutic effect provided by said first therapeutic agent. The second therapeutic agent can be admimstered before, simultaneously with, or after admimsfration of the first therapeutic agent, as long as the dosing interval of the second therapeutic agent overlaps with the dosing interval of the first therapeutic agent (or its therapeutic effect). In other words, according to the method of the present invention, in certain prefeπed embodiments the second therapeutic agent need not be administered in the same dosage form or even by the same route of admimsfration as the first therapeutic agent. Rather, the method is directed to the suφrising synergistic and/or additive benefits obtained in humans, when therapeutically effective levels of a first therapeutic agent have been administered to a human, and, prior to or during the dosage interval for the second therapeutic agent or while the human is experiencing the therapeutic effect, an effective amount of a second therapeutic agent to augment the therapeutic effect of the first therapeutic agent is administered. If the second therapeutic agent is administered prior to the administration of the first therapeutic agent, it is prefeπed that the dosage intervals for the two drugs overlap, i.e., such that the therapeutic effect over at least a portion of the dosage interval of the first therapeutic agent is at least partly attributable to the second therapeutic agent. hi an additional method of the invention, the suφrising synergistic and/or additive benefits obtained in the patient are achieved when therapeutically effective levels of the second therapeutic agent have been administered to the patient, and, during the dosage interval for the second therapeutic agent or while the patient is experiencing the therapeutic effect by virtue of the administration of a second therapeutic agent, an effective amount of a first therapeutic agent to augment the therapeutic effect of the second therapeutic agent is administered. Another aspect of combination therapy relates to an oral solid dosage form comprising an therapeutically effective amount of a first therapeutic agent together with an amount of a second therapeutic agent or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof which augments the effect of the first therapeutic agent. In some cases, in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absoφtion of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amoφhous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absoφtion of the drag then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form.
Alternatively, delayed absoφtion of a parenterally-administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle. Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the subject compounds in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissue. When the compounds of the present invention are admimstered as pharmaceuticals, to humans and animals, they can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1 to 99% (more preferably, 10 to 30%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The preparations of the present invention may be given orally, parenterally, topically, or rectally. They are of course given in forms suitable for each administration route. For example, they are admimstered in tablets or capsule form, by injection, inhalation, eye lotion, ointment, suppository, etc. administration by injection, infusion or inhalation; topical by lotion or ointment; and rectal by suppositories. Oral administrations are prefeπed. The phrases "parenteral administration" and "administered parenterally" as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, infrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, infraspinal and infrasternal injection and infusion. The phrases "systemic administration," "admimstered systemically," "peripheral administration" and "administered peripherally" as used herein mean the admimsfration of a compound, drug or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes, for example, subcutaneous administration. These compounds may be administered to humans and other animals for therapy by any suitable route of administration, including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, infracisternally and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually. Regardless of the route of administration selected, the compounds of the present invention, which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically-acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods known to those of skill in the art. Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention maybe varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient. The selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the particular compound of the present invention employed, or the ester, salt or amide thereof, the route of administration, the time of adminisfration, the rate of excretion or metabolism of the particular compound being employed, the rate and extent of absoφtion, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compound employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts. A physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition required. For example, the physician or veterinarian could start doses of the compounds of the invention employed in the pharmaceutical composition at levels lower than that required in order to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved. In general, a suitable daily dose of a compound of the invention will be that amount of the compound which is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above. Generally, oral, intravenous, intracerebro ventricular and subcutaneous doses of the compounds of this invention for a patient, when used for the indicated analgesic effects, will range from about 0.0001 to about 100 mg per kilogram of body weight per day. If desired, the effective daily dose of the active compound may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms. Prefeπed dosing is one adminisfration per day. While it is possible for a compound of the present invention to be administered alone, it is preferable to administer the compound as a pharmaceutical formulation (composition). The compounds according to the invention may be formulated for admimsfration in any convenient way for use in human or veterinary medicine, by analogy with other pharmaceuticals. In another aspect, the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the subject compounds, as described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents. As described in detail below, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin, lungs, or mucous membranes; or (4) intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam; (5) sublingually or buccally; (6) ocularly; (7) transdermally; or (8) nasally. The term "treatment" is intended to encompass also prophylaxis, therapy and cure. The patient receiving this freatment is any animal in need, including primates, in particular humans, and other mammals such as equines, cattle, swine and sheep; and poultry and pets in general. The compound of the invention can be administered as such or in admixtures with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and can also be administered in conjunction with antimicrobial agents such as penicillins, cephalosporins, aminoglycosides and glycopeptides. Conjunctive therapy, thus includes sequential, simultaneous and separate admimsfration of the active compound in a way that the therapeutical effects of the first administered one is not entirely disappeared when the subsequent is administered. The addition of the active compound of the invention to animal feed is preferably accomplished by preparing an appropriate feed premix containing the active compound in an effective amount and incoφorating the premix into the complete ration. Alternatively, an intermediate concentrate or feed supplement containing the active ingredient can be blended into the feed. The way in which such feed premixes and complete rations can be prepared and administered are described in reference books (such as "Applied Animal Nutrition", W.H. Freedman and CO., San Francisco, U.S.A., 1969 or "Livestock Feeds and Feeding" O and B books, Corvallis, Ore., U.S.A., 1977). Micelles Recently, the pharmaceutical industry introduced microemulsification technology to improve bioavailability of some lipophilic (water insoluble) pharmaceutical agents.
Examples include Trimetrine (Dordunoo, S. K, et al., Drag Development and Industrial Phaπnacy, 17(12), 1685-1713, 1991 and REV 5901 (Sheen, P. C, et al, J Pharm Sci 80(7), 712-714, 1991). Among other things, microemulsification provides enhanced bioavailability by preferentially directing absoφtion to the lymphatic system instead of the circulatory system, which thereby bypasses the liver, and prevents destruction of the compounds in the hepatobiliary circulation. h one aspect of invention, the formulations contain micelles formed from a compound of the present invention and at least one amphiphilic carrier, in which the micelles have an average diameter of less than about 100 nm. More prefeπed embodiments provide micelles having an average diameter less than about 50 mn, and even more prefeπed embodiments provide micelles having an average diameter less than about 30 nm, or even less than about 20 nm. While all suitable amphiphilic carriers are contemplated, the presently prefeπed carriers are generally those that have Generally-Recognized-as-Safe (GRAS) status, and that can both sofubilize the compound of the present invention and microemulsify it at a later stage when the solution comes into a contact with a complex water phase (such as one found in human gastro-intestinal tract). Usually, amphiphilic ingredients that satisfy these requirements have HLB (hydrophilic to lipophilic balance) values of 2-20, and their structures contain sfraight chain aliphatic radicals in the range of C-6 to C-20. Examples are polyethylene-glycolized fatty glycerides and polyethylene glycols. Particularly prefeπed amphiphilic carriers are saturated and monounsaturated polyethyleneglycolyzed fatty acid glycerides, such as those obtained from fully or partially hydrogenated various vegetable oils. Such oils may advantageously consist of tri-. di- and mono-fatty acid glycerides and di- and mono-polyethyleneglycol esters of the conesponding fatty acids, with a particularly prefeπed fatty acid composition including capric acid 4-10, capric acid 3-9, lauric acid 40-50, myristic acid 14-24, palmitic acid 4-14 and stearic acid 5-15%. Another useful class of amphiphilic carriers includes partially esterified sorbitan and/or sorbitol, with saturated or mono-unsaturated fatty acids (SPAN- series) or conesponding ethoxylated analogs (TWEEN-series). Commercially available amphiphilic carriers are particularly contemplated, including Gelucire-series, Labrafil, Labrasol, or Lauroglycol (all manufactured and distributed by Gattefosse Coφoration, Saint Priest, France), PEG-mono-oleate, PEG-di- oleate, PEG-mono-laurate and di-laurate, Lecithin, Polysorbate 80, etc (produced and distributed by a number of companies in USA and worldwide). Polymers Hydrophilic polymers suitable for use in the present invention are those which are readily water-soluble, can be covalently attached to a vesicle- forming lipid, and which are tolerated in vivo without toxic effects (i.e., are biocompatible). Suitable polymers include polyethylene glycol (PEG), polylactic (also termed polylactide), polyglycolic acid (also termed polyglycolide), a polylactic-polyglycolic acid copolymer, and polyvinyl alcohol. Prefeπed polymers are those having a molecular weight of from about 100 or 120 daltons up to about 5,000 or 10,000 daltons, and more preferably from about 300 daltons to about 5,000 daltons. In a particularly prefeπed embodiment, the polymer is polyethyleneglycol having a molecular weight of from about 100 to about 5,000 daltons, and more preferably having a molecular weight of from about 300 to about 5,000 daltons. In a particularly prefeπed embodiment, the polymer is polyethyleneglycol of 750 daltons (PEG(750)). Polymers may also be defined by the number of monomers therein; a prefeπed embodiment of the present invention utilizes polymers of at least about three monomers, such PEG polymers consisting of three monomers (approximately 150 daltons). Other hydrophilic polymers which may be suitable for use in the present invention include polyvinylpyπolidone, polymethoxazoline, polyethyloxazoline, polyhydroxypropyl methacrylamide, polymethacrylamide, polydimethylacrylamide, and derivatized celluloses such as hydroxymethylcellulose or hydroxyethylcellulose. In certain embodiments, a formulation of the present invention comprises a biocompatible polymer selected from the group consisting of polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polyvinyl polymers, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes and co-polymers thereof, celluloses, polypropylene, polyethylenes, polystyrene, polymers of lactic acid and glycolic acid, polyanhydrides, poly(ortho)esters, poly(butic acid), poly(valeric acid), poly(lactide-co- caprolactone), polysaccharides, proteins, polyhyaluronic acids, polycyanoacrylates, and blends, mixtures, or copolymers thereof.
Cyclodextrins Cyclodextrins are cyclic oligosaccharides, consisting of 6, 7 or 8 glucose units, designated by the Greek letter α, β,or γ, respectively. Cyclodextrins with fewer than six glucose units are not known to exist. The glucose units are linked by alpha- 1,4-glucosidic bonds. As a consequence of the chair conformation of the sugar units, all secondary hydroxyl groups (at C-2, C-3) are located on one side of the ring, while all the primary hydroxyl groups at C-6 are situated on the other side. As a result, the external faces are hydrophilic, making the cyclodextrins water-soluble. In contrast, the cavities of the cyclodextrins are hydrophobic, since they are lined by the hydrogen of atoms C-3 and C-5, and by ether-like oxygens. These matrices allow complexation with a variety of relatively hydrophobic compounds, including, for instance, steroid compounds such as 17. beta. - estradiol (see, e.g., van Uden et al. Plant Cell Tiss. Org. Cult. 38:1-3-113 (1994)). The complexation takes place by Van der Waals interactions and by hydrogen bond fonnation. For a general review of the chemistry of cyclodextrins, see, Wenz, Agnew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 33:803-822 (1994). The physico-chemical properties of the cyclodextrin derivatives depend strongly on the kind and the degree of substitution. For example, their solubility in water ranges from insoluble (e.g., triacetyl-beta-cyclodextrin) to 147% soluble (w/v) (G-2-beta-cyclodextrin). In addition, they are soluble in many organic solvents. The properties of the cyclodextrins enable the confrol over solubility of various formulation components by increasing or decreasing their solubility. Numerous cyclodextrins and methods for their preparation have been described. For example, Parmeter (I), et al. (U.S. Pat. No. 3,453,259) and Gramera, et al. (U.S. Pat. No. 3,459,731) described electroneufral cyclodextrins. Other derivatives include cyclodextrins with cationic properties [Parmeter (II), U.S. Pat. No. 3,453,257], insoluble crosslinked cyclodextrins (Solms, U.S. Pat. No. 3,420,788), and cyclodextrins with anionic properties [Parmeter (ILT), U.S. Pat. No. 3,426,011]. Among the cyclodextrin derivatives with anionic properties, carboxylic acids, phosphorous acids, phosphinous acids, phosphonic acids, phosphoric acids, thiophosphonic acids, thiosulphinic acids, and sulfonic acids have been appended to the parent cyclodextrin [see, Parmeter (III), supra]. Furthermore, sulfoalkyl ether cyclodextrin derivatives have been described by Stella, et al. (U.S. Pat. No.
5,134,127).
Liposomes Liposomes consist of at least one lipid bilayer membrane enclosing an aqueous internal compartment. Liposomes may be characterized by membrane type and by size. Small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs) have a single membrane and typically range between 0.02 and 0.05 μm in diameter; large unilamellar vesicles (LUVS) are typically larger than 0.05 μm Oligolamellar large vesicles and multilamellar vesicles have multiple, usually concentric, membrane layers and are typically larger than 0.1 μm. Liposomes with several nonconcentric membranes, i.e., several smaller vesicles contained within a larger vesicle, are termed multivesicular vesicles. One aspect of the present invention relates to formulations comprising liposomes containing a compound of the present invention, where the liposome membrane is formulated to provide a liposome with increased caπying capacity. Alternatively or in addition, the compound of the present invention may be contained within, or adsorbed onto, the liposome bilayer of the liposome. The compound of the present invention may be aggregated with a lipid surfactant and carried within the liposome's internal space; in these cases, the liposome membrane is formulated to resist the disruptive effects of the active agent-surfactant aggregate. According to one embodiment of the present invention, the lipid bilayer of a liposome contains lipids derivatized with polyethylene glycol (PEG), such that the PEG chains extend from the inner surface of the lipid bilayer into the interior space encapsulated by the liposome, and extend from the exterior of the lipid bilayer into the surrounding environment. Active agents contained within liposomes of the present invention are in solubilized form. Aggregates of surfactant and active agent (such as emulsions or micelles containing the active agent of interest) may be entrapped within the interior space of liposomes according to the present invention. A surfactant acts to disperse and solubilize the active agent, and may be selected from any suitable aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or aromatic surfactant, including but not limited to biocompatible lysophosphatidylcholines (LPCs) of varying chain lengths (for example, from about C14 to about C20). Polymer-derivatized lipids such as PEG-lipids may also be utilized for micelle formation as they will act to inhibit micelle/membrane fusion, and as the addition of a polymer to surfactant molecules decreases the CMC of the surfactant and aids in micelle formation. Prefeπed are surfactants with CMCs in the micromolar range; higher CMC surfactants may be utilized to prepare micelles entrapped within liposomes of the present invention, however, micelle surfactant monomers could affect liposome bilayer stability and would be a factor in designing a liposome of a desired stability. Liposomes according to the present invention may be prepared by any of a variety of techniques that are known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,235,871; Published PCT applications WO 96/14057; New RRC, Liposomes: A practical approach, IRL Press, Oxford (1990), pages 33-104; Lasic DD, Liposomes from physics to applications, Elsevier Science Publishers BV, Amsterdam, 1993. For example, liposomes of the present invention may be prepared by diffusing a lipid derivatized with a hydrophilic polymer into preformed liposomes, such as by exposing preformed liposomes to micelles composed of lipid-grafted polymers, at lipid concentrations conesponding to the final mole percent of derivatized lipid which is desired in the liposome. Liposomes containing a hydrophilic polymer can also be formed by homogenization, lipid-field hydration, or extrusion techniques, as are known in the art. In another exemplary formulation procedure, the active agent is first dispersed by sonication in a lysophosphatidylcholine or other low CMC surfactant (including polymer grafted lipids) that readily solubilizes hydrophobic molecules. Thejesulting micellar suspension of active agent is then used to rehydrate a dried lipid sample that contains a suitable mole percent of polymer-grafted lipid, or cholesterol. The lipid and active agent suspension is then formed into liposomes using extrusion techniques as are known in the art, and the resulting liposomes separated from the unencapsulated solution by standard column separation. hi one aspect of the present invention, the liposomes are prepared to have substantially homogeneous sizes in a selected size range. One effective sizing method involves extruding an aqueous suspension of the liposomes through a series of polycarbonate membranes having a selected uniform pore size; the pore size of the membrane will coπespond roughly with the largest sizes of liposomes produced by extrusion through that membrane. See e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,737,323 (Apr. 12, 1988). Release Modifiers The release characteristics of a formulation of the present invention depend on the encapsulating material, the concenfration of encapsulated drug, and the presence of release modifiers. For example, release can be manipulated to be pH dependent, for example, using a pH sensitive coating that releases only at a low pH, as in the stomach, or a higher pH, as in the intestine. An enteric coating can be used to prevent release from occurring until after passage through the stomach. Multiple coatings or mixtures of cyanamide encapsulated in different materials can be used to obtain an initial release in the stomach, followed by later release in the intestine. Release can also be manipulated by inclusion of salts or pore forming agents, which can increase water uptake or release of drug by diffusion from the capsule. Excipients which modify the solubility of the drug can also be used to control the release rate. Agents which enhance degradation of the matrix or release from the matrix can also be incoφorated. They can be added to the drug, added as a separate phase (i.e., as particulates), or can be co-dissolved in the polymer phase depending on the compound. In all cases the amount should be between 0.1 and thirty percent (w/w polymer). Types of degradation enhancers include inorganic salts such as ammonium sulfate and ammonium chloride, organic acids such as citric acid, benzoic acid, and ascorbic acid, inorganic bases such as sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, zinc carbonate, and zinc hydroxide, and organic bases such as protamine sulfate, spermine, choline, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine and surfactants such as Tween and Pluronic . Pore forming agents which add microstructure to the matrices (i.e., water soluble compounds such as inorganic salts and sugars) are added as particulates. The range should be between one and thirty percent (w/w polymer). Uptake can also be manipulated by altering residence time of the particles in the gut. This can be achieved, for example, by coating the particle with, or selecting as the encapsulating material, a mucosal adhesive polymer. Examples include most polymers with free carboxyl groups, such as chitosan, celluloses, and especially polyacrylates (as used herein, polyacrylates refers to polymers including acrylate groups and modified acrylate groups such as cyanoacrylates and methacrylates). Processes for Preparing Matrix— Based Beads In order to facilitate the preparation of a solid, controlled release, oral dosage form according to this invention, any method of preparing a matrix formulation known to those skilled in the art may be used. For example incoφoration in the matrix may be effected, for example, by (a) forming granules comprising at least one water soluble hydroxyalkyl cellulose and the active agent; (b) mixing the hydroxyalkyl cellulose containing granules with at least one C 12 -C 36 aliphatic alcohol; and (c) optionally, compressing and shaping the granules. Preferably, the granules are formed by wet granulating the hydroxyalkyl cellulose/active agent with water. In a particularly prefeπed embodiment of this process, the amount of water added during tie wet granulation step is preferably between 1.5 and 5 times, especially between 1.75 and 3.5 times, the dry weight of the active agent. In yet other alternative embodiments, a spheronizing agent, together with the active ingredient can be spheronized to form spheroids. Microcrystalline cellulose is prefeπed. A suitable microcrystalline cellulose is, for example, the material sold as Avicel PH 101 (Trade Mark, FMC Coφoration). In such embodiments, in addition to the active ingredient and spheronizing agent, the spheroids may also contain a binder. Suitable binders, such as low viscosity, water soluble polymers, will be well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical art. However, water soluble hydroxy lower alkyl cellulose, such as hydroxypropylcellulose, are prefeπed. Additionally (or alternatively) the spheroids may contain a water insoluble polymer, especially an acrylic polymer, an acrylic copolymer, such as a methacrylic acid-ethyl acrylate copolymer, or ethyl cellulose. In such embodiments, the sustained release coating will generally include a hydrophobic material such as (a) a wax, either alone or in admixture with a fatty alcohol; or (b) shellac or zein. Melt Extrusion Matrix Sustained release matrices can also be prepared via melt-granulation or melt- extrusion techniques. Generally, melt-granulation techniques involve melting a normally solid hydrophobic material, e.g. a wax, and incoφorating a powdered drug therein. To obtain a sustained release dosage form, it may be necessary to incoφorate an additional hydrophobic substance, e.g. ethylcellulose or a water-insoluble acrylic polymer, into the molten wax hydrophobic material. Examples of sustained release formulations prepared via melt-granulation techniques are found in U.S. Pat. No. 4,861,598. The additional hydrophobic material may comprise one or more water-insoluble wax-like thermoplastic substances possibly mixed with one or more wax-like thermoplastic substances being less hydrophobic than said one or more water-insoluble wax-like substances, rn order to achieve constant release, the individual wax-like substances in the formulation should be substantially non-degradable and insoluble in gastrointestinal fluids during the initial release phases. Useful water-insoluble wax-like substances may be those with a water-solubility that is lower than about 1 :5,000 (w/w). In addition to the above ingredients, a sustained release matrix may also contain suitable quantities of other materials, e.g., diluents, lubricants, binders, granulating aids, colorants, flavorants and glidants that are conventional in the pharmaceutical art. The quantities of these additional materials will be sufficient to provide the desired effect to the desired formulation. In addition to the above ingredients, a sustained release matrix incoφorating melt-extruded multiparticulates may also contain suitable quantities of other materials, e.g. diluents, lubricants, binders, granulating aids, colorants, flavorants and glidants that are conventional in the pharmaceutical art in amounts up to about 50% by weight of the particulate if desired. Specific examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and excipients that may be used to formulate oral dosage forms are described in the Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients, American Pharmaceutical Association (1986). Melt Extrusion Multiparticulates The preparation of a suitable melt-extruded matrix according to the present invention may, for example, include the steps of blending the active agent, together with at least one hydrophobic material and preferably the additional hydrophobic material to obtain a homogeneous mixture. The homogeneous mixture is then heated to a temperature sufficient to at least soften the mixture sufficiently to extrude the same. The resulting homogeneous mixture is then extruded to form strands. The extrudate is preferably cooled and cut into multiparticulates by any means known in the art. The strands are cooled and cut into multiparticulates. The multiparticulates are then divided into unit doses. The extrudate preferably has a diameter of from about 0.1 to about 5 mm and provides sustained release of the therapeutically active agent for a time period of from about 8 to about 24 hours. An optional process for preparing the melt extrusions of the present invention includes directly metering into an extruder a hydrophobic material, a therapeutically active agent, and an optional binder; heating the homogenous mixture; extruding the homogenous mixture to thereby form strands; cooling the strands containing the homogeneous mixture; cutting the strands into particles having a size from about 0.1 mm to about 12 mm; and dividing said particles into unit doses, hi this aspect of the invention, a relatively continuous manufacturing procedure is realized. The diameter of the extruder aperture or exit port can also be adjusted to vary the thickness of the extraded strands. Furthermore, the exit part of the extrader need not be round; it can be oblong, rectangular, etc. The exiting strands can be reduced to particles using a hot wire cutter, guillotine, etc. The melt extraded multiparticulate system can be, for example, in the form of granules, spheroids or pellets depending upon the extruder exit orifice. For puφoses of the present invention, the terms "melt-extruded multiparticulate(s)" and "melt-extruded multiparticulate system(s)" and "melt-extruded particles" shall refer to a plurality of units, preferably within a range of similar size and/or shape and containing one or more active agents and one or more excipients, preferably including a hydrophobic material as described herein. In this regard, the melt-extruded multiparticulates will be of a range of from about 0.1 to about 12 mm in length and have a diameter of from about 0.1 to about 5 mm. hi addition, it is to be understood that the melt-extruded multiparticulates can be any geometrical shape within this size range. Alternatively, the extradate may simply be cut into desired lengths and divided into unit doses of the therapeutically active agent without the need of a spheronization step. In one prefeπed embodiment, oral dosage forms are prepared to include an effective amount of melt-extruded multiparticulates within a capsule. For example, a plurality of the melt-extruded multiparticulates may be placed in a gelatin capsule in an amount sufficient to provide an effective sustained release dose when ingested and contacted by gastric fluid. hi another prefeπed embodiment, a suitable amount of the multiparticulate extrudate is compressed into an oral tablet using conventional tableting equipment using standard techniques. Techniques and compositions for making tablets (compressed and molded), capsules (hard and soft gelatin) and pills are also described in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, (Arthur Osol, editor), 1553-1593 (1980). In yet another prefeπed embodiment, the extrudate can be shaped into tablets as set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 4,957,681 (Klimesch, et. al). Optionally, the sustained release melt-extruded multiparticulate systems or tablets can be coated, or the gelatin capsule can be further coated, with a sustained release coating such as the sustained release coatings described above. Such coatings preferably include a sufficient amount of hydrophobic material to obtain a weight gain level from about 2 to about 30 percent, although the overcoat maybe greater depending upon the physical properties of the particular active agent utilized and the desired release rate, among other things. The melt-extruded unit dosage forms of the present invention may further include combinations of melt-extruded multiparticulates containing one or more of the therapeutically active agents disclosed above before being encapsulated. Furthermore, the unit dosage forms can also include an amount of an immediate release therapeutically active agent for prompt therapeutic effect. The immediate release therapeutically active agent may be incoφorated, e.g., as separate pellets within a gelatin capsule, or may be coated on the surface of the multiparticulates after preparation of the dosage forms (e.g., controlled release coating or matrix-based). The unit dosage forms of the present invention may also contain a combination of controlled release beads and matrix multiparticulates to achieve a desired effect. The sustained release formulations of the present invention preferably slowly release the therapeutically active agent, e.g., when ingested and exposed to gastric fluids, and then to intestinal fluids. The sustained release profile of the melt-extruded formulations of the invention can be altered, for example, by varying the amount of retardant, i.e., hydrophobic material, by varying the amount of plasticizer relative to hydrophobic material, by the inclusion of additional ingredients or excipients, by altering the method of manufacture, etc. In other embodiments of the invention, the melt extraded material is prepared without the inclusion of the therapeutically active agent, which is added thereafter to the extradate. Such formulations typically will have the therapeutically active agent blended together with the extraded matrix material, and then the mixture would be tableted in order to provide a slow release formulation. Such formulations may be advantageous, for example, when the therapeutically active agent included in the formulation is sensitive to temperatures needed for softening the hydrophobic material and/ or the retardant material. Definitions For convenience, certain terms employed in the specification, examples, and appended claims are collected here. The terms "co-administration" and "co-administering" refer to both concunent administration (administration of two or more therapeutic agents at the same time) and time varied administration (adminisfration of one or more therapeutic agents at a time different from that of the administration of an additional therapeutic agent or agents), as long as the therapeutic agents are present in the patient to some extent at the same time. As used herein, the term "optically pure" means that an active ingredient (e.g., (S)- amlodipine) for use in the compositions or methods of the present invention contains a significantly greater proportion of the specified enantiomer in relation to the non-specified enantiomer. For example, optically pure (S)-amlodipine contains a significantly greater proportion of the (S)-enantiomer in relation to the (R)-enantiomer. In a prefeπed embodiment, compositions including the optically pure active ingredients contain at least 90% by weight of the specified enantiomer and 10% by weight or less of the non-specified enantiomer. More preferably, such compositions contain at least 95% by weight of the specified enantiomer and 5% by weight or less of the non-specified enantiomer. Even more preferably, such compositions contain at least 99% by weight of the specified enantiomer and 1% by weight or less of the non-specified enantiomer. These percentages are based upon the total amount of the active ingredient. The term "patient" refers to a mammal in need of a particular treatment. In a prefeπed embodiment, a patient is a primate, canine, feline, or equine. In another prefeπed embodiment, a patient is a human. The term "solvate" refers to a pharmaceutically acceptable fonn of a specified compound, with one or more solvent molecules, that retains the biological effectiveness of such compound. Examples of solvates include compounds of the invention in combination with solvents such, for example, water (to form the hydrate), isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, ethanolamine, or acetone. Also included are formulations of solvate mixtures such as a compound of the invention in combination with two or more solvents. The term "heteroatom" as used herein means an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen. Prefeπed heteroatoms are boron, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, sulfur and selenium. The term "alkyl" refers to the radical of saturated aliphatic groups, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups. In prefened embodiments, a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C1-C30 for sfraight chain, C3-C30 for branched chain), and more preferably 20 or fewer. Likewise, prefened cycloalkyls have from 3-10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and more preferably have 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure. Unless the number of carbons is otherwise specified, "lower alkyl" as used herein means an alkyl group, as defined above, but having from one to ten carbons, more preferably from one to six carbon atoms in its backbone structure. Likewise, "lower alkenyl" and "lower alkynyl" have similar chain lengths. Prefeπed alkyl groups are lower alkyls. In prefeπed embodiments, a substituent designated herein as alkyl is a lower alkyl. The term "aralkyl", as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group (e.g., an aromatic or heteroaromatic group). The terms "alkenyl" and "alkynyl" refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond respectively. The term "aryl" as used herein includes 5-, 6- and 7-membered single-ring aromatic groups that may include from zero to four heteroatoms, for example, benzene, anthracene, naphthalene, pyrene, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like. Those aryl groups having heteroatoms in the ring structure may also be refeπed to as "aryl heterocycles" or "heteroaromati.es." The aromatic ring can be substituted at one or more ring positions with such substituents as described above, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aromatic or heteroaromatic moieties, -CF3, -CN, or the like. The term "aryl" also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoimng rings (the rings are "fused rings") wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls. The terms ortho, meta andpara apply to 1,2-, 1,3- and 1,4-disubstituted benzenes, respectively. For example, the names 1,2-dimethylbenzene and ortA -dimethylbenzene are synonymous. The terms "heterocyclyl" or "heterocyclic group" refer to 3- to 10-membered ring structures, more preferably 3- to 7-membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms. Heterocycles can also be polycycles. Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, thiophene, thianthrene, furan, pyran, isobenzofuran, chromene, xanthene, phenoxathiin, pyπole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, pyrimidine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phenarsazine, phenothiazine, furazan, phenoxazine, pyπolidine, oxolane, thiolane, oxazole, piperidine, piperazine, moφholine, lactones, lactams such as azetidinones and pyπolidinones, sultams, sultones, and the like. The heterocyclic ring can be substituted at one or more positions with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, -CF3, -CN, or the like. The terms "polycyclyl" or "polycyclic group" refer to two or more rings (e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls) in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are "fused rings". Rings that are joined through non-adjacent atoms are termed "bridged" rings. Each of the rings of the polycycle can be substituted with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, - CF3, -CN, or the like. As used herein, the term "nitro" means -NO2; the term "halogen" designates -F, -Cl, -Br or -I; the term "sulfhydryl" means -SH; the term "hydroxyl" means -OH; and the term "sulfonyl" means -SO2-- The terms "amine" and "amino" are art-recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines, e.g., a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: ■ ^ 10 / 10 I + -N or -N- R10 9 R9 wherein R9, RI Q and R'χo each independently represent a group permitted by the rules of valence. The term "acylamino" is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
Figure imgf000168_0001
wherein R9 is as defined above, and R'χ represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or -(CH2)m-R8, where m and Rg are as defined above. The term "amido" is art recognized as an amino-substituted carbonyl and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
Figure imgf000168_0002
wherein R9, RJQ are as defined above. Prefened embodiments of the amide will not include imides which may be unstable. The term "alkylthio" refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfur radical attached thereto. In prefeπed embodiments, the "alkylthio" moiety is represented by one of -S-alkyl, -S-alkenyl, -S-alkynyl, and -S-(CH2)m-Rg, wherein m and Rg are defined above. Representative alkylthio groups include methylthio, ethyl thio, and the like. The term "carbonyl" is art recognized and includes such moieties as can be represented by the general formula: O O U XR^ i or — X— U— R'^ wherein X is a bond or represents an oxygen or a sulfur, and Rj \ represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, -(CH2)m"R-8 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, R'χχ represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or -(CH2)m-Rg, where m and Rg are as defined above.
Where X is an oxygen and Rj \ or R' \ is not hydrogen, the formula represents an "ester". Where X is an oxygen, and Rj \ is as defined above, the moiety is refeπed to herein as a carboxyl group, and particularly when R \ is a hydrogen, the formula represents a "carboxylic acid". Where X is an oxygen, and R'χ \ is hydrogen, the formula represents a "formate". In general, where the oxygen atom of the above formula is replaced by sulfur, the formula represents a "thiolcarbonyl" group. Where X is a sulfur and R \ or R'χ \ is not hydrogen, the formula represents a "thiolester." Where X is a sulfur and R\ is hydrogen, the formula represents a "thiolcarboxylic acid." Where X is a sulfur and R^ 1/ is hydrogen, the formula represents a "thiolformate." On the other hand, where X is a bond, and Ri is not hydrogen, the above formula represents a "ketone" group. Where X is a bond, and Ri i is hydrogen, the above formula represents an "aldehyde" group. The terms "alkoxyl" or "alkoxy" as used herein refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having an oxygen radical attached thereto. Representative alkoxyl groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, tert-butoxy and the like. An "ether" is two hydrocarbons covalently linked by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an alkyl that renders that alkyl an ether is or resembles an alkoxyl, such as can be represented by one of -O-alkyl, -O- alkenyl, -O-alkynyl, -O-(CH2)m-Rg, where m and Rg are described above. The term "sulfonate" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O II S-OR41 II x O in which R41 is an electron pair, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or aryl. The terms triflyl, tosyl, mesyl, and nonaflyl are art-recognized and refer to trifluoromethanesulfonyl, j^-toluenesulfonyl, methanesulfonyl, and nonafluorobutanesulfonyl groups, respectively. The terms triflate, tosylate, mesylate, and nonaflate are art-recognized and refer to trifluoromethanesulfonate ester, j>-toluenesulfonate ester, methanesulfonate ester, and nonafluorobutanesulfonate ester functional groups and molecules that contain said groups, respectively. The abbreviations Me, Et, Ph, Tf, Nf, Ts, Ms represent methyl, ethyl, phenyl, trifluoromethanesulfonyl, nonafluorobutanesulfonyl, jt?-toluenesulfonyl and methanesulfonyl, respectively. A more comprehensive list of the abbreviations utilized by organic chemists of ordinary skill in the art appears in the first issue of each volume of the Journal of Organic Chemistry; this list is typically presented in a table entitled Standard List of Abbreviations. The abbreviations contained in said list, and all abbreviations utilized by organic chemists of ordinary skill in the art are hereby incoφorated by reference. The term "sulfate" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O II O— S— 0R41 II o in which R4 is as defined above. The term "sulfonylamino" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O II N— S-R I I o II R The term "sulfamoyl" is art-recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:
Figure imgf000170_0001
The term "sulfonyl", as used herein, refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O II S R4 II o in which R44 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. The term "sulfoxido" as used herein, refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: 0 I I — s-R44 in which R44 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, or aryl. A "selenoalkyl" refers to an alkyl group having a substituted seleno group attached thereto. Exemplary "selenoethers" which may be substituted on the alkyl are selected from one of -Se-alkyl, -Se-alkenyl, -Se-alkynyl, and -Se-(CH2)m-R7, m and Rγ being defined above. Analogous substitutions can be made to alkenyl and alkynyl groups to produce, for example, aminoalkenyls, aminoalkynyls, amidoalkenyls, amidoalkynyls, iminoalkenyls, iminoalkynyls, thioalkenyls, thioalkynyls, carbonyl-substituted alkenyls or alkynyls. As used herein, the definition of each expression, e.g. alkyl, m, n, etc., when it occurs more than once in any structure, is intended to be independent of its definition elsewhere in the same structure. It will be understood that "substitution" or "substituted with" includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo fransformation such as by reaπangement, cyclization, elimination, etc. As used herein, the term "substituted" is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds. Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described herein above. The permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds. For puφoses of this invention, the heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms. This invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds. The phrase "protecting group" as used herein means temporary substituents which protect a potentially reactive functional group from undesired chemical transformations. Examples of such protecting groups include esters of carboxylic acids, silyl ethers of alcohols, and acetals and ketals of aldehydes and ketones, respectively. The field of protecting group chemistry has been reviewed (Greene, T.W.; Wuts, P.G.M. Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2nd ed.; Wiley: New York, 1991). Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in particular geometric or stereoisomeric forms. The present invention contemplates all such compounds, including cis- and trans-isom rs, R- and S-enantiomers, diastereomers, (D)-isomers, (L)-isomers, the racemic mixtures thereof, and other mixtures thereof, as falling within the scope of the invention. Additional asymmetric carbon atoms may be present in a substituent such as an alkyl group. All such isomers, as well as mixtures thereof, are intended to be included in this invention. If, for instance, a particular enantiomer of a compound of the present invention is desired, it may be prepared by asymmetric synthesis, or by derivation with a chiral auxiliary, where the resulting diastereomeric mixture is separated and the auxiliary group cleaved to provide the pure desired enantiomers. Alternatively, where the molecule contains a basic functional group, such as amino, or an acidic functional group, such as carboxyl, diastereomeric salts are formed with an appropriate optically-active acid or base, followed by resolution of the diastereomers thus formed by fractional crystallization or chromatographic means well known in the art, and subsequent recovery of the pure enantiomers. Contemplated equivalents of the compounds described above include compounds which otherwise coπespond thereto, and which have the same general properties thereof (e.g., functioning as analgesics), wherein one or more simple variations of substituents are made which do not adversely affect the efficacy of the compound in binding to sigma receptors, hi general, the compounds of the present invention may be prepared by the methods illustrated in the general reaction schemes as, for example, described below, or by modifications thereof, using readily available starting materials, reagents and conventional synthesis procedures. In these reactions, it is also possible to make use of variants which are in themselves known, but are not mentioned here. The term "patient" refers to a mammal in need of a particular freatment. In a prefeπed embodiment, a patient is a primate, canine, feline, or equine, hi another prefeπed embodiment, a patient is a human. The term "solvate" refers to a pharmaceutically acceptable form of a specified compound, with one or more solvent molecules, that retains the biological effectiveness of such compound. Examples of solvates include compounds of the invention in combination with solvents such, for example, water (to form the hydrate), isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, dimethyl sulfoxide, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, ethanolamine, or acetone. Also included are formulations of solvate mixtures such as a compound of the invention in combination with two or more solvents. For puφoses of this invention, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 67th Ed., 1986-87, inside cover. Exemplification The invention now being generally described, it will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples, which are included merely for proposes of illustration of certain aspects and embodiments of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the invention. Example 1 Fonnation of (S Amlodpine-hemi-D-Tarfrate DMAC solvate from (RS)- Amlodipine free base A solution of D-Tartaric acid (9.48 kg, 63.15 moles) in DMAC (104.2 kg) is added to a sluπy of (i?S)-Amlodipine free base (24.9 kg, 60.9 moles) in N,N-Dimethylacetamide (DMAC, 104.3 kg). The reaction mixture is agitated and heated to about 70 °C. The reaction mass is held for one hour with agitation at about 70 °C. The resulting sluπy is then cooled with agitation to about 22 °C over 2.5 to 3 hours with a linear cooling profile at about 0.30 °C/min. The slurry is held with agitation at about 22 °C for about 0.5 h. The solid is isolated by filtration, washed by re-slurrying with DMAC followed by a displacement wash with MTBE. The wet cake is dried at about 45 °C in vacuo to produce (S Amlodipine-hemi-D-Tartrate-DMAC solvate (13.92 kg, 24.37 moles, 40.0 % yield). Example 2 Formation of (SVAmlodipine-L-Malate (form A) from (S)-Amlodipine free base A slurry of (S) -Amlodipine free base (19.5 kg, 47.69 moles) in isopropanol-MTBE (141.9 kg IP A, 14.9 kg MTBE, 9.5 / 1, wt/wt) is agitated and heated to about 50 °C to form a solution. A solution of L-Malic acid (6.68 kg, 49.82 moles) in isopropanol-water (25.45 kg L A, 5.73 kg water 4.44/1 , wt/wt) is then added, and the reaction mixture is held with agitation for about one hour at about 50 °C to form a sluπy. The resulting slurry is then cooled with agitation to about 0 °C over 2.5 to 3 hours, with a linear cooling profile at about 0.25 °C/min. The slurry is held with agitation at about 0 °C for about one hour. The solid product is isolated by filtration at about 0 °C, washed by re-sluπying with cold isopropanol followed by two displacement washes with MTBE. The wet cake is dried at about 60 °C in vacuo to provide (S)-Amlodipine-L-Malate (25.41 kg, 46.79 moles, 98.1 % yield). Example 3 Detailed Process Description for (SVAmlodipine Hemi-D-Tartrate DMAC solvate The following is a typical batch description for the process using the racemic besylate salt as an input. 1. NN-Dimethylacetamide (DMAC) (152.7 kg) was charged to a 100 gal reactor (T- 110A). 2. D-Tartaric acid (13.88 kg) was charged slowly to T-l 10A. 3. The solution in T- 110A was mixed and held for use later in the batch. 4. (^-Amlodipine besylate (49.81 kg) was charged to a 200 gal reactor (R-120), followed by methyl t-butyl ether (MTBE) (239.3 kg). 5. Aqueous sodium hydroxide (1 Ν) (137.2 kg) was added to R-120. 6. The contents of R-120 were agitated for 20-30 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 15 minutes. 7. The bottom aqueous layer was removed and USP water (66.0 kg) was charged to R- 120. 8. The contents of R- 120 were agitated for a minimum of 20 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 15 minutes. 9. The bottom aqueous layer was removed and USP water (66.0 kg) was charged to R- 120. 10. The contents of R-120 were agitated for a minimum of 20 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 15 minutes. 11. The bottom aqueous layer was removed from R-120. 12. The contents of R-120 were polish filtered through a 3 μm cartridge filter to R- 110 A, followed by a reactor and line rinse with MTBE (49.9 kg). 13. The contents of R-110A were concentrated under vacuum (maximum 50°C) to a calculated volume (109 L). 14. DMAC (152.8 kg) was charged to the contents of R-110A. 15. The contents of R-110A were again concenfrated under vacuum, this time until the batch temperature reached 45-55°C. The final volume was 208 L. 16. R-110A contents were cooled to 20 to 25°C, followed by the addition of the previously prepared D-tartaric acid solution (166.0 kg) at 20-25°C over 20 to 30 minutes. 17. The mixture was heated to 68-72°C over 55 to 65 minutes, and held at this temperature for 55 to 65 minutes. 18. The reaction mixture was cooled to 21 to 23 °C over 2 to 3 hours using a linear cooling profile and agitated at this temperature for 30 to 40 minutes. 19. The slurry was filtered on a centrifuge (CE-102) in one load and washed with DMAC (75.7 kg) and MTBE (59.9 kg). 20. The wet cake was discharged (20.33 kg) and dried in vacuum fray dryer (D-401) for a minimum of 6 hours at 45-50°C to yield 20.086 kg of (S)-Amlodipine Hemi-D- Tarfrate DMAC solvate. Example 4 Detailed Process Description for (S -Amlodipine Free Base The following is a typical batch description for the process using the (S)-
Amlodipine Hemi-D-Tartrate DMAC solvate salt as an input. 1. (S)- Amlodipine Hemi-D-Tartrate DMAC solvate (29.99 kg) was charged to a 200 gal reactor (R-120), followed by MTBE (245.4 kg). 2. The batch temperature was adjusted to 20-25°C, followed by the addition of IN sodium hydroxide (85.6 kg) while maintaining a temperature of 20-25°C. 3. The contents of R-120 were agitated for 20-30 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 10 minutes. 4. The bottom aqueous layer was removed and USP water (81.8 kg) was charged to R-120. 5. The contents of R-120 were agitated for 20-30 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 10 minutes. 6. The bottom aqueous layer was removed and USP water (82.5 kg) was charged to R-120. 7. The contents of R-120 were agitated for 20-30 minutes and then the layers were allowed to separate for a minimum of 10 minutes. 8. The bottom aqueous layer was removed. 9. The volume of R-120 was recorded and the solution was transfeπed to a 100 gal reactor (R-110A) through a 3μm polishing filter, followed by a reactor and line rinse of MTBE (45.0 kg) 10. The solution was distilled to a calculated volume (87 L) under vacuum at a maximum jacket temperature of 40°C. 11. The mixture in R-110A was cooled to 20-25 °C, and while maintaining this temperature, heptane (80.4 kg) was charged over 45-60 minutes. 12. The R-110A contents were agitated at 20 to 25°C for 45-60 minutes. 13. The sluπy was filtered on centrifuge CE-102 in one load and washed with heptane (131.4 kg). 14. The wet cake was discharged (21.22 kg) and dried in vacuum tray dryer D-404 at 40-50°C to yield 19.72 kg of (S)-Amlodiρine Free Base. Example 5 Detailed Process Description for (S)-Amlodipine L-Malate (form A) The following is a typical batch description for the process using the (S)- Amlodipine free base as an input. 1. L-Malic acid (6.68 kg), USP Water (5.73 kg) and IPA (17.0 kg) were charged to a suitable mixing vessel and mixed until a solution was obtained. 2. The L-Malic acid solution was drained through a 5μ polish filter into a HDPE drum, and TK-7 and the lines were rinsed forward to the drum with IPA (8.45 kg). This solution was held for later use. 3. (S)-Amlodipine Free Base (19.5 kg) was charged to R-110A, followed by LPA (141.9 kg) and MTBE (14.9 kg). 4. The temperature of R-110A was adjusted to 48-52°C over 20 to 30 minutes. 5. The previously prepared L-malic acid solution was charged to the contents of R- 110A over 15 to 20 minutes while maintaining the temperature at 48-52°C. 6. The contents ofR-HOA were held at 48-52°C for 55 to 65 minutes. 7. The mixture was cooled to -2 to 2°C over 2 to 3 hours and held for a minimum of 1 hour. 8. The sluπy was filtered in one load on centrifuge CE-102, followed by washes of IPA (43.6 kg) and MTBE (43.8 kg and 43.5 kg). 9. The material was discharged from the centrifuge to yield 28.88 kg wet cake, and dried under vacuum in vacuum tray dryer D-401 at 56-60°C to an LOD of less than 1.0%. 10. The product was discharged from the dryer to yield 25.41 kg of (S)-amlodipine L- malate. Example 6 Preparation and Capsule Development of Amlodipine Maleate Capsules Capsules were made based on Norvasc® commercial tablet formulation published in the Physician's Desk Reference. Key for Table 1: * 1 mg of (S)-Ajmlodipine is equivalent tol.282 mg of (S)- Amlodipine Maleate; a) 2.5 mg of free base equivalent of (S)- Amlodipine maleate required; b) 5 mg Norvasc tablet disintegrates in luke warm water @ < 5 seconds; c) (S)-Amlodipine maleate capsules disintegrate in 10 seconds, 5 seconds for capsule to open. As shown in Table 2, the stability study began by preparing 1200 capsules. Then, stability experiments were started to test API stability per ICH guidelines. 35 capsules per bottle were used (White HDPE with C/R cap no desiccant). Key for Table 2: X = Assay; H = Hold.
Table 1. Preparation of (S)-Amlodipine Maleate Capsules
Figure imgf000177_0001
Table 2. (5)-Amlodipine Maleate Capsule Development
Figure imgf000177_0002
Example 7 Conditions of (5)-Amlodipine Maleate Studies A suspension in 0.5% CMC. API is unstable at low pH: 1% loss after 5 hours @ pH 1, 1% loss after 50 hours @ pH 5. Note that pH of saturated solution of (S)-amlodipine maleate in water = 4.9 (no buffer required). Example 8 Preparation of (^-Amlodipine-L-Malate (form A) Tablets Drug substance and excipients were screened and blended using typical manufacturing equipment. A conventional tablet machine was used to compress this blend into tablets weighing nominally 200 mg each. Tablets were packaged in HDPE bottles with C/R cap with no desiccant, and stored at ICH storage conditions of 25°C / 60% RH, 30°C / 60%) RH, and 40°C / 75% RH. Tablets have been assayed at initial time and after 1, 2, 3 and 6 months storage. Stability results are given in Figures 5 and 6. Note that * indicates that 1 mg of (<S)-Amlodipine is equivalent tol.328 mg of (S)-An lodiρine-L-Malate (Table 3). Table 3. Preparation of (S)-Amlodipine L-Malate Tablets
Figure imgf000178_0001
Example 9 Relative Bioavailability The pharmacokinetic parameters AUC and Cmax from three multiple-dose studies in male and female dogs were compared. The 28-day pharmacokinetic assessments were compared. Male and female dogs were administered an oral capsule once daily containing one of two different salts of (S)-amlodipine. One study used only the maleate salt form of (S)-amlodipine and two studies used only the malate salt form of (S)-amlodipine (form A). All doses were adjusted for salt form so all doses are in terms of mg base/kg. Table 4. Mean Dose-Normalized AUC and Cmax Parameters for (S)- Amlodipine Maleate and Malate Salts Following 28-Days of Oral Capsule Dosing in Dogs
Figure imgf000179_0001
The malate salt has also shown greater bioavailability than the maleate salt in both dogs (animal model) and humans. The commercially marketed salt for racemic amlodipine is the besylate and it has been shown that the besylate and maleate have equivalent bioavailabilities. Example 10
Method for Determination of (S Amlodipine in Plasma by LC/MS/MS for Preclinical Analysis An aliquot of each unknown, standard and control sample was analyzed on a high performance liquid chromatographic system equipped with a Positive-Ion mass spectrometer detector (condition tabled below in Table 5).
Table 5. Determination of (S)-Amlodipine in Plasma by LC/MS/MS for Preclinical Analysis
Figure imgf000179_0002
The pharmacokinetic parameters AUC from two multiple-dose studies in people were compared. The 28-day pharmacokinetic assessments were compared. Subjects were administered an oral capsule once daily containing one of two different salts of (ιS)-amlodipine. One study (I) used only the maleate salt form of (S)-amlodipine and the other study (II) used only the malate salt form of (S)-amlodipine (foπn A). All doses were adjusted for salt form so all doses are in terms of mg base/kg and AUC measurements were for 0-24 h. These were compared to literature values (III) for single dose studies in which AUC numbers recorded indicate AUC for 0 to infinity (Taken from a paper entitled: Enantioselective disposition of oral amlodipine in healthy volunteers, by Laufen, Heinrich; Leitold, Matyas. Pfizer Mack Res. Dev. Lab., Illertissen, Germany. Chirality 1994, 6(7), 531-6). Note that * indicates the normalization of the dose tobe equivalent to (S)- amlodipine dose of 10 mg and # indicates the (S)-amlodipine levels after single doses of amlodipine besylate salt and each equivalent to 20 mg of amlodipine racemate (Table 6).
Table 6. Comparison of AUC from two multiple-dose studies
Figure imgf000180_0001
Example 11 Method for Determination of (S)-Amlodipine in Human Plasma by LC/MS/MS An aliquot of each unknown, standard and control sample was analyzed on a high performance liquid chromatographic system equipped with a Positive-Ion mass spectrometer detector (condition tabled below in Table 7). Table 7. Conditions for the determination of (S)- Amlodipine in Human Plasma by LC/MS/MS
Figure imgf000181_0001
Example 12 Polymoφhs and Solvates of (S)- Amlodipine L-Malate (S)-Amlodipine L-malate has several polymoφhic and solvated forms. They were formed through crystallization and mechanical techniques. Characterization of crystal forms were performed using X-ray powder diffraction (XRPD), differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), thermogravimetry (TG), hot stage microscopy, moisture balance, solution proton NMR specfroscopy, thermogravimetry-mfrared spectroscopy (TG-LR), infrared (LR) and Raman specfroscopy. 1. (S)-Amlodipine-L-Malate (Form A) Form A was found to lose approximately 0.1% up to 150 °C indicating an unsolvated material. The DSC curve for form A shows an endotherm at 164 °C. This was attributed to a melt based on hotstage data. Form A showed an increase in weight of 0.5% when equilibrated at 95% RH. The sample then lost this weight upon equilibrating back to 5% RH. XRPD data collected on the sample after the moisture balance experiment indicated that the sample form remained unchanged. Hygroscopicity studies shown that upon equilibrium at 31, 75, 84 and 95% relative humidity for approximately one week, form A remained unchanged. Solution 1H NMR data indicated that the (S)-amlodipine L- malate molecule was intact. Based on these studies Form A is a crystalline, non-solvated material, which melts at 162 °C. 2. Amorphous (S)-Amlodipine-L-Malate An amoφhous material was generated by both room temperature milling and cryogenic milling. At ambient temperature, amoφhous material was produced by grinding in a mixer mill for a total of 40 or 50 minutes in 10 minutes intervals. (The sample was scraped from the walls of the canister every ten minutes). The 40 minute grind was performed at 30Hz. Ambient temperature grinding was also performed in an amalgamater for 30 and 45 minutes in 15 minute intervals. A cryogrinder was also used to make amoφhous material. The sample was ground under liquid nitrogen for 6 cycles, where a cycle = 3 x 2-minute grinding times with two minutes of cooling between grinds. Solution 1H NMR data indicated that the (S)-amlodipine L-malate molecule was intact. The LR and Raman spectra of the amoφhous form are virtually identical to those for form A. The DSC curve for the amoφhous form shows an exotherm at 81°C and an endotherm at 162 °C. This may be due to the crystallization to form A followed by the foπn A melt. A glass transition was measured around 54 °C. 3. (S)-Amlodipine-L-Malate Hydrate (Form B) Form B was obtained from water evaporation, slow evaporation from dioxane, fast and slow evaporations from EtOH, and a fast evaporation from JJPA. Solution 1H NMR indicated that the (S)-amlodipine molecule was intact. Compared to form A, the IR and Raman for form B are virtually identical. The DSC curve for form B shows endotherms at ~91 , ~152, and ~190 °C. The endotherm at -152 °C was attributed to the melt based on hotstage, while events coπelated to thermal activity around 91 and 190 °C in the DSC curve were not observed during the hotstage investigation. Variable temperature XRPD experiments were performed on foπn B. The XRPD data suggests that around 100 °C, form B begins to undergo a conversion because the XRPD pattern is mostly amoφhous. Furthermore, by 125 °C, the sample displayed an XRPD pattern indicative of form A. Desolvation studies were perfonned on form B. When form B was heated at approximately 60 °C for approximately one week, it remained unchanged. When form B was placed in an approximately ~0% relative humidity chamber, the form remained unchanged. Moisture balance data showed an increase in weight of 17.2% when equilibrated at 95% RH. The sample then lost this weight upon equilibrating back to 5% RH. Form B was found to lose 1.3% volatiles up to 150 °C. Karl Fischer water analysis esulted in 4.75% water. TG-LR analysis confirmed the Karl Fischer water analysis. Form B appears to be a hydrate because is was predominately crystallized from experiments involving water and the Karl Fischer data (1.5 moles of water) suggests more water than what can be attributed to just surface water. Form B was also crystallized from dioxane, PA and EtOH without the presence of water, however these solvents may have contained water sorbed from the atmosphere.
4. (S)-Amlodipine-Hemi-L-Malate (Form C) Form C slurried from water, 1:4 EtOH:water, and 1:4 MeOH:water. The characterization of these samples via solution 1H NMR show that form C is the hemi-salt of (S)-amlodiρine L-malate (i.e., a salt consisting of 2 molecules of amlodipine for every molecule of L-malic acid). The hemi-malate could also be made from mixing two equivalents of (S)-amlodipine with one equivalent of L-malic acid in ethanol.
5. (S)-Amlodipine-L-Malate (Form D) Form D was obtained from crystalization from ethanol: ethanol (2 mL) was added to
(S)-amlodipine L-malate (68.4 mg). The sample was sonicated and then placed on a 60 °C shaker block. All solids had dissolved after approximately one day at 60 °C. The sample was then plunged into a dry ice/acetone bath and then placed in a freezer. After approximately five months, the solvent was decanted, and the solids were allowed to air dry. The DSC curve for the D form shows an endotherm at 162 °C. The TGA spectra shows 0.2% weight loss at 125 °C. Moisture balance experiments showed a 1.5% weight increase from 5% to 95% RH and a return to initial weight upon desoφtion.
6. (S)-Amlodipine-L-Malate Solvate (Form E) Form E was only formed in 1,2-propanediol with high cooling rates and it is a solvated form with 1,2-propanediol.
7. (S)-Amlodipine-L-Malate Solvate (Form F) Form F was obtained as single phase and is strongly conelated with DMF as crystallization solvent, which indicate that it is a solvated form with DMF. The XRPD patterns of forms F and G are different, indicating that a different packing of the (S)- amlodipine molecules occurs in the two forms. It should be noticed that form F occuπed in mixtures with form A also in other solvents, indicating that it is also a channel hydrate/solvate, but with a different crystal structure than form G. Based on the screening results we can conclude that form F can incoφorate DMF, methanol and mixtures water:acetone (10:90), water:THF (80:20) and water:2-proρanol (20:80). The TGA analysis of form F shows above 150 °C a high mass loss characteristic to a decomposition process occuπed. The DSC shows a melting endothermic peak at 106.6 °C after which it recrystallizes and melts at 149.3 °C.
8. (S)-Amlodipine-L-Malate Solvate (Form G) Form G is a pyridine solvate. The XRPD patterns of form G obtained in these different solvents are the same, indicating that different solvent molecules can be incoφorated in certain cavities present in the crystal structure (structures called channel hydrates/solvates) without leading to modifications in the XRPD patterns. Based on the screening results we can conclude that form G is likely to be such a channel hydrate/solvate structure. Based on the screening results we can conclude that form G can incoφorate pyridine, water and DMF:water (wet DMF). The TGA analysis shows a 4.85 % mass loss in the 91-125 °C T interval after which a high mass loss characteristic to a decomposition process occuned. The DSC shows a melting endothermic peak at 150.9 °C and a wide decomposition endothermic peak at 192.2 °C. Incorporation by Reference All of the U.S. patents and U.S. patent application publications cited herein are hereby incoφorated by reference. Equivalents Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific embodiments of the invention described herein. Such equivalents are intended to be encompassed by the following claims.

Claims

We claim:
1. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising optically pure (S)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor.
2. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 1 , wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 500 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
3. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 1 , wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 250 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
4. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 1, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 100 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester fransfer protein.
5. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 1 , wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 50 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
6. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 1, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an ICso less than about 25 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester fransfer protein.
7. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 1 , wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 10 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
8. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 1, wherem said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A, CP 532623 , JTT-705, niceritrol, PD 140195, SC-744, SC-794, SC-795, SC-364, SCH 58149, Synthetic Peptide A, torcetrapib, U-106305, wiedendiol-A, wiedendiol-B, WRMWY, SCH- 50678, puupenhenone triacetate, puupenhenone, avarol, aureol, illimaquinone, spongiatriol, spongiadiol, sulfiricin, compounds 100-203, compound of formula I-XVIII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
9. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 1, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is JTT-705, SC-795, torcetrapib, compounds 177-181, compounds 186- 203, compound of formula IV, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
10. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 1 , wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is SC-795 or torcefrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of either of them.
11. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 1 , wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
12. A pharmaceutical composition consisting essentially of optically pure (S)- amlodipine, a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
13. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 12, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 500 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
14. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 12, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 250 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
15. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 12, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 100 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
16. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 12, wherem said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 50 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
17. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 12, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 25 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
18. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 12, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 10 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester fransfer protein.
19. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 12, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A, CP 532623 , JTT-705, niceritrol, PD 140195, SC-744, SC-794, SC-795, SC-364, SCH 58149, Synthetic Peptide A, torcetrapib, U-106305, wiedendiol-A, wiedendiol-B, WRMWY, SCH- 50678, puupenhenone triacetate, puupenhenone, avarol, aureol, illimaquinone, spongiatriol, spongiadiol, sulfiricin, compounds 100-203, compound of formula I-XVTII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
20. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 12, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is JTT-705, SC-795, torcetrapib, compounds 177-181, compounds 186- 203, compound of formula IV, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
21. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 12, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is SC-795 or torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of either of them.
22. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 12, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
23. The pharmaceutical composition of any of claims 1-22, wherein said optically pure (S)-amlodipine is optically pure (S)-amlodipine malate, or a polymoφh, pseudopolymoφh or solvate thereof.
24. A method of treating a patient suffering from a medical condition selected from the group consisting of hypertension, congestive heart failure, angina, hyperlipidemia, coronary artery disease, atherosclerosis, congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, aπhythmia, artheroscierosis, diabetic nephropathy, diabetic cardiac myopathy, renal insufficiency, peripheral vascular disease, left ventricular hypertrophy, cognitive dysfunction, stroke, and headache; comprising the step of: co-administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of optically pure S)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor.
25. The method of claim 24, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 500 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
26. The method of claim 24, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 250 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester fransfer protein.
27. The method of claim 24, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 100 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
28. The method of claim 24, wherein said cholesteryl ester fransfer protein inhibitor has an IC5Q less than about 50 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester fransfer protein.
29. The method of claim 24, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 25 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
30. The method of claim 24, wherein said cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor has an IC50 less than about 10 nM in an assay based on cholesteryl ester transfer protein.
31. The method of claim 24, wherein said cholesteryl fransfer protein inhibitor is CGS 25159, chloropuupehenone, CLR243 Fungal Metabolite A, CP 532623 , JTT-705, niceritrol, PD 140195, SC-744, SC-794, SC-795, SC-364, SCH 58149, Synthetic Peptide A, torcetrapib, U-106305, wiedendiol-A, wiedendiol-B, WRMWY, SCH-50678, puupenhenone triacetate, puupenhenone, avarol, aureol, illimaquinone, spongiatriol, spongiadiol, sulfiricin, compounds 100-203, compound of formula I-XVTII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
32. The method of claim 24, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is JTT- 705, SC-795, torcetrapib, compounds 177-181, compounds 186-203, compound of formula IV, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of any one of them.
33. The method of claim 24, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is SC- 795 or torcefrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate of either of them.
34. The method of claim 24, wherein said cholesteryl transfer protein inhibitor is torcetrapib, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or hydrate thereof.
35. The method of claim 24, wherem said optically pure (5)-amlodipine is optically pure (ιS)-amlodipine malate, or a polymoφh, pseudopolymoφh or solvate thereof.
36. The method of any of claims 24-35, wherein said optically pure (»S)-amlodiρine is optically pure (^-amlodipine malate, or a polymoφh, pseudopolymoφh or solvate thereof.
37. The method of any of claims 24-36, wherein said medical condition is hypertension, congestive heart failure, angina, hyperlipidemia, coronary artery disease, atherosclerosis, or myocardial infarction.
38. The method of any of claims 24-36, wherein said medical condition is hypertension or hyperlipidemia.
39. The method of any of claims 24-36, wherein said medical condition is hypertension.
PCT/US2005/016655 2004-05-12 2005-05-12 Combinations comprising (s)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, and methods for reducing hypertension WO2005117869A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US57018204P 2004-05-12 2004-05-12
US60/570,182 2004-05-12
US64963505P 2005-02-03 2005-02-03
US60/649,635 2005-02-03

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2005117869A1 true WO2005117869A1 (en) 2005-12-15

Family

ID=35159840

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2005/016655 WO2005117869A1 (en) 2004-05-12 2005-05-12 Combinations comprising (s)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, and methods for reducing hypertension

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2005117869A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2012076443A1 (en) * 2010-12-08 2012-06-14 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Liposomal formulation of dalcetrapib
CN103951617A (en) * 2014-01-16 2014-07-30 中国科学院南海海洋研究所 Pyridone alkaloid compounds and preparation method thereof, and applications of pyridone alkaloid compounds in preparation of anti-tumor drugs
WO2018203564A1 (en) * 2017-05-02 2018-11-08 国立大学法人東北大学 Liphagal analog and multi-targeted kinase inhibitor containing liphagal or analog thereof

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20020072532A1 (en) * 1998-11-04 2002-06-13 Foster Robert T. Methods of pharmacological treatment using S (-) amlodipine
WO2004004777A1 (en) * 2002-07-02 2004-01-15 Pfizer Products Inc. Use of cetp inhibitors and antihypertensive agents as well as optionally hmg coa reductase inhibitors

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20020072532A1 (en) * 1998-11-04 2002-06-13 Foster Robert T. Methods of pharmacological treatment using S (-) amlodipine
WO2004004777A1 (en) * 2002-07-02 2004-01-15 Pfizer Products Inc. Use of cetp inhibitors and antihypertensive agents as well as optionally hmg coa reductase inhibitors

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2012076443A1 (en) * 2010-12-08 2012-06-14 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Liposomal formulation of dalcetrapib
CN103237542A (en) * 2010-12-08 2013-08-07 霍夫曼-拉罗奇有限公司 Liposomal formulation of dalcetrapib
CN103951617A (en) * 2014-01-16 2014-07-30 中国科学院南海海洋研究所 Pyridone alkaloid compounds and preparation method thereof, and applications of pyridone alkaloid compounds in preparation of anti-tumor drugs
WO2018203564A1 (en) * 2017-05-02 2018-11-08 国立大学法人東北大学 Liphagal analog and multi-targeted kinase inhibitor containing liphagal or analog thereof
US11691980B2 (en) 2017-05-02 2023-07-04 Tohoku University Liphagal analog and multi-targeted kinase inhibitor containing liphagal or analog thereof

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
DE60220049T2 (en) A pharmaceutical composition comprising a solid dispersion of a sparingly water soluble drug and a solubility enhancing polymer
SK1032003A3 (en) Pharmaceutical compositions of cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors
PL200923B1 (en) SYNERGISTIC COMBINATION OF PDE INHIBITORS AND ß₂ ADRENOCEPTOR AGONIST
HUT77315A (en) Loratadine derivative for use of treating allergic rhinitis and other disorders
TW200902087A (en) Tablet formulations containing 8-[{1-(3,5-Bis-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-ethoxy}-methyl]-8-phenyl-1,7-diaza-spiro[4.5]decan-2-one salts and tablets made therefrom
SK15742003A3 (en) Pharmaceutical composition of adsorbates of amorphous drug
SK15172003A3 (en) Self-emulsifying formulations of cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors
EP2838517B1 (en) Orally available pharmaceutical formulation suitable for improved management of movement disorders
KR20050025578A (en) Use of cetp inhibitors and optionally hmg coa reductable inhibitors and/or antihypertension agents
EP3377064B1 (en) Orvepitant for the treatment of chronic cough
WO2005099699A1 (en) Combination of (s)-amlodipine and a beta-blocker, and methods for reducing hypertension
WO2004004777A1 (en) Use of cetp inhibitors and antihypertensive agents as well as optionally hmg coa reductase inhibitors
JP2023523596A (en) Combination of finerenone and SGLT2 inhibitors for treating and/or preventing cardiovascular and/or renal disease
WO2021179074A1 (en) Purine compounds for treating disorders
US6734192B1 (en) Treatment of viral infections
WO2005117869A1 (en) Combinations comprising (s)-amlodipine and a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, and methods for reducing hypertension
WO1989005642A1 (en) Dextrorphan potentiator for anticonvulsant composition and method
JP4542777B2 (en) Use of irbesartan for the manufacture of a medicament used to prevent or treat pulmonary hypertension
KR101414814B1 (en) Complex formulation comprising lercanidipine hydrochloride and valsartan and method for the preparation thereof
AU2005205914A1 (en) Combination of organic compounds
AU775903B2 (en) Pharmaceutical combination for the treatment of viral infections containing a calcium channel blocker and quinoline
WO2005097191A2 (en) COMBINATIONS COMPRISING (S)- AMLODIPINE AND A HMG-CoA REDUCTASE INHIBITOR OR CHOLESTEROL ABSORPOTION INHIBITOR OR BOTH, AND METHODS FOR REDUCING HYPERTENSION
CA2637000A1 (en) Methods and compositions for treating prostate cancer, benign prostatic hypertrophy, polycystic ovary syndrome and other conditions
JPS63310867A (en) Antidepressant novel product
WO2005079772A2 (en) Combination of (s)-amlodipine and an ace inhibitor, and methods for reducing hypertension

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KM KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NG NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SM SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase